Cambium Networks XR630 802.11ac 3x3 AP User Manual Xirrus AOS Xirrus

Xirrus, Inc. 802.11ac 3x3 AP Xirrus AOS Xirrus

UserManual.wiki >

Cambium Networks >

XR630 User Manual >

User Manual

January 11, 2016 Release 7.6Wireless Access Point User’s Guide

All rights reserved. This document may not be reproduced or disclosed in whole or in part by any means without the written consent of Xirrus, Inc.Part Number: 800-0022-001(Revision T) Wireless Access PointsXR and XD Series

Wireless Access PointiTable of ContentsList of Figures..................................................................................... xvIntroduction......................................................................................... 1The Xirrus Family of Products ............................................................................... 1Nomenclature .................................................................................................... 2Why Choose the Xirrus Access Point? .................................................................. 3Wireless Access Point Product Overview ............................................................ 4XR Wireless AP Product Family ..................................................................... 5XR-320 Wall Mounted 2-Radio Access Points ....................................... 5XR-500 Series 2-Radio Access Points ...................................................... 6XR-600 Series 2-Radio Access Points ...................................................... 7XR-1000 Series 2-Radio Access Points .................................................... 8XD4-130 4-Radio High Density Access Points ...................................... 9XR-2006 Series 2- and 4-Radio High Density Access Points ............. 10XR-2005 Series 2- and 4-Radio Access Points ...................................... 11XR-4006 Series 4- to 8-Radio High Density Access Points ................. 12XR-4000 Series 4- to 8-Radio High Density Access Points (not ending in “6”) ................................................................................................. 13XR-6000 Series 8- to 16-Radio High Density Access Points ............... 14Enterprise Class Security ............................................................................... 14Deployment Flexibility .................................................................................. 15Power over Ethernet (POE) .................................................................... 16Enterprise Class Management ...................................................................... 16Key Features and Benefits ..................................................................................... 18High Capacity and High Performance ........................................................ 18Extended Coverage ......................................................................................... 18Flexible Coverage Schemes .................................................................... 19Non-Overlapping Channels .......................................................................... 20SDMA Optimization ...................................................................................... 20Fast Roaming ................................................................................................... 20Ease of Deployment ........................................................................................ 20Powerful Management ................................................................................... 20Secure Wireless Access .................................................................................. 20

Wireless Access PointiiApplications Enablement .............................................................................. 21Advanced Feature Sets .......................................................................................... 21Xirrus Advanced RF Performance Manager (RPM) .................................. 21Xirrus Advanced RF Security Manager (RSM) .......................................... 22Xirrus Advanced RF Analysis Manager (RAM) ......................................... 23Xirrus Application Control ............................................................................ 24About this User’s Guide ........................................................................................ 25Organization .................................................................................................... 25Notes and Cautions ........................................................................................ 27Screen Images .................................................................................................. 27Product Specifications ........................................................................................... 27Installing the Wireless AP............................................................... 29Installation Prerequisites ...................................................................................... 29Optional Network Components ................................................................... 31Client Requirements ....................................................................................... 31Planning Your Installation .................................................................................... 32General Deployment Considerations .......................................................... 32Coverage and Capacity Planning ................................................................. 34Placement .................................................................................................. 34RF Patterns ................................................................................................ 35Capacity and Cell Sizes ........................................................................... 36Fine Tuning Cell Sizes ............................................................................. 37Roaming Considerations ........................................................................ 39Allocating Channels ................................................................................ 39Other Factors Affecting Throughput .................................................... 41About IEEE 802.11ac ....................................................................................... 42Up to Eight Simultaneous Data Streams — Spatial Multiplexing ..... 44MIMO (Multiple-In Multiple-Out) ........................................................ 44MU-MIMO (Multi-User Multiple-In Multiple-Out) ........................... 45Higher Precision in the Physical Layer ................................................ 4780 MHz and 160 MHz Channel Widths (Bonding) ............................ 48802.11ac Data Rates ................................................................................. 49ACExpress™ ............................................................................................ 50802.11ac Deployment Considerations .......................................................... 50Failover Planning ............................................................................................ 52Switch Failover Protection ..................................................................... 54

Wireless Access PointiiiPower Planning ............................................................................................... 55Power over Ethernet ................................................................................ 55 Security Planning ........................................................................................... 56Wireless Encryption ................................................................................ 56Authentication ......................................................................................... 56Meeting PCI DSS Standards ................................................................... 57Meeting FIPS Standards ......................................................................... 57Port Requirements .......................................................................................... 58Network Management Planning .................................................................. 62WDS Planning ................................................................................................. 63Common Deployment Options .................................................................... 66Installation Workflow ........................................................................................... 67Installing Your Wireless AP ................................................................................. 69Choosing a Location ....................................................................................... 69Wiring Considerations ............................................................................ 69Mounting and Connecting the AP .............................................................. 72Dismounting the AP ....................................................................................... 72Powering Up the Wireless AP .............................................................................. 72AP LED Operating Sequences ...................................................................... 73LED Boot Sequence ................................................................................. 73LED Operation when AP is Running ................................................... 74Zero-Touch Provisioning and Ongoing Management .................................... 75XMS-Cloud Next Generation (XMS-9500-CL-x) ................................. 75XMS-Enterprise ........................................................................................ 75If you are not using XMS ........................................................................ 76AP Management Interfaces .................................................................................. 76User Interfaces ................................................................................................. 76Using the Serial Port ....................................................................................... 78Using the Ethernet Ports to Access the AP ................................................. 78Starting the WMI ............................................................................................. 79Logging In ........................................................................................................ 79Licensing ................................................................................................................. 80Performing the Express Setup Procedure ........................................................... 80Securing Low Level Access to the AP .......................................................... 81The Web Management Interface................................................... 85Managing APs Locally or Using XMS ................................................................ 85

Wireless Access PointivAn Overview .......................................................................................................... 86Structure of the WMI ............................................................................................. 87User Interface ......................................................................................................... 89Logging In ............................................................................................................... 92Applying Configuration Changes ....................................................................... 93Character Restrictions .................................................................................... 93Viewing Status on the Wireless AP................................................ 95Access Point Status Windows .............................................................................. 96Access Point Summary ................................................................................... 96Content of the Access Point Summary Window ................................. 97Access Point Information ............................................................................. 102Access Point Configuration ......................................................................... 103Admin History .............................................................................................. 104Network Status Windows ................................................................................... 104Network ......................................................................................................... 105Network Map ................................................................................................ 106Content of the Network Map Window .............................................. 106Spanning Tree Status .................................................................................... 109Routing Table ................................................................................................ 110ARP Table ...................................................................................................... 110DHCP Leases ................................................................................................. 111Connection Tracking/NAT ......................................................................... 111CDP List ......................................................................................................... 112LLDP List ....................................................................................................... 113Network Assurance ...................................................................................... 113Undefined VLANs ........................................................................................ 114RF Monitor Windows .......................................................................................... 115IAP Monitoring ............................................................................................. 116Spectrum Analyzer .................................................................................... 117Rogues ........................................................................................................... 120Channel History ............................................................................................ 122Radio Assurance ........................................................................................... 124Station Status Windows ...................................................................................... 126Stations ........................................................................................................... 127Location Map ................................................................................................. 129RSSI ................................................................................................................. 132

Wireless Access PointvSignal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) ........................................................................ 134Noise Floor ..................................................................................................... 135Max by IAP .................................................................................................... 137Station Assurance ......................................................................................... 138Statistics Windows ............................................................................................... 139IAP Statistics Summary ................................................................................ 139Per-IAP Statistics ........................................................................................... 140Network Statistics ......................................................................................... 142VLAN Statistics ............................................................................................. 143WDS Statistics ................................................................................................ 144IDS Statistics .................................................................................................. 145Filter Statistics ............................................................................................... 147Station Statistics ............................................................................................ 147Per-Station Statistics ..................................................................................... 149Application Control Windows ........................................................................... 150About Application Control ......................................................................... 150Application Control ...................................................................................... 152Stations (Application Control) .................................................................... 156System Log Window ........................................................................................... 157IDS Event Log Window ...................................................................................... 158Configuring the Wireless AP........................................................ 161Express Setup ........................................................................................................ 163Network ................................................................................................................. 169Interfaces ....................................................................................................... 170Network Interface Ports ........................................................................ 171Bonds and Bridging ...................................................................................... 173DNS Settings .................................................................................................. 180Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) Settings .................................................. 181LLDP Settings ................................................................................................ 182Services .................................................................................................................. 185Time Settings (NTP) ..................................................................................... 186NetFlow .......................................................................................................... 189Wi-Fi Tag ....................................................................................................... 190Location .......................................................................................................... 191System Log ..................................................................................................... 193About Using Splunk for Xirrus APs ................................................... 196

Wireless Access PointviSNMP .............................................................................................................. 197DHCP Server ................................................................................................. 200Proxy Services ............................................................................................... 202About Proxy Forwarding ..................................................................... 203Proxy Forwarding for HTTPS .............................................................. 204Summary of Proxy Forwarding Behavior on the AP ....................... 205About Using a Proxy Client for Management Traffic ...................... 210VLANs ................................................................................................................... 213Understanding Virtual Tunnels .......................................................... 214VLAN Pools ............................................................................................ 215VLAN Management ..................................................................................... 216Tunnels .................................................................................................................. 220About Xirrus Tunnels ........................................................................... 220Tunnel Management .................................................................................... 221SSID Assignments ......................................................................................... 223VLAN Assignments ...................................................................................... 224Security .................................................................................................................. 225Understanding Security ........................................................................ 226Certificates and Connecting Securely to the WMI ............................ 229Using the AP’s Default Certificate ...................................................... 230Using an External Certificate Authority ............................................. 231Admin Management .................................................................................... 231Admin Privileges .......................................................................................... 233Admin RADIUS ............................................................................................ 235About Creating Admin Accounts on the RADIUS Server ............. 235Management Control ................................................................................... 238Access Control List ....................................................................................... 248Global Settings .............................................................................................. 250External Radius ............................................................................................. 254About Creating User Accounts on the RADIUS Server .................. 255Internal Radius .............................................................................................. 258Active Directory ............................................................................................ 260Rogue Control List ........................................................................................ 264OAuth 2.0 Management ............................................................................... 265SSIDs ...................................................................................................................... 268Understanding SSIDs ............................................................................ 269Understanding QoS Priority on the Wireless AP ............................. 271

Wireless Access PointviiHigh Density 2.4G Enhancement—Honeypot SSID ......................... 275SSID Management ........................................................................................ 277SSID List (top of page) .......................................................................... 278SSID Limits and Scheduling ................................................................ 284Web Page Redirect (Captive Portal) Configuration ........................ 287Whitelist Configuration for Web Page Redirect .............................. 293Web Page Redirect for Purple WiFi Venues ..................................... 294WPA Configuration .............................................................................. 297Authentication Service Configuration ............................................... 297Active IAPs .................................................................................................... 298Per-SSID Access Control List ...................................................................... 299Honeypots ...................................................................................................... 300Personal Wi-Fi ............................................................................................... 302Groups ................................................................................................................... 304Understanding Groups ......................................................................... 304Using Groups ......................................................................................... 305Group Management ..................................................................................... 306Group Limits .......................................................................................... 309IAPs ........................................................................................................................ 311Understanding Fast Roaming .............................................................. 312IAP Settings ................................................................................................... 313Global Settings ............................................................................................. 319Beacon Configuration ........................................................................... 321Station Management ............................................................................. 322Advanced Traffic Optimization .......................................................... 324Global Settings .11an .................................................................................... 335Global Settings .11bgn .................................................................................. 341Global Settings .11n ...................................................................................... 347Global Settings .11ac ..................................................................................... 350Global Settings .11u ...................................................................................... 352Understanding 802.11u ......................................................................... 352Advanced RF Settings .................................................................................. 358About Standby Mode ............................................................................ 358RF Monitor .............................................................................................. 359RF Resilience .......................................................................................... 360RF Power and Sensitivity ..................................................................... 361RF Spectrum Management ................................................................... 362

Wireless Access PointviiiStation Assurance .................................................................................. 365Hotspot 2.0 ..................................................................................................... 367Understanding Hotspot 2.0 .................................................................. 367NAI Realms .................................................................................................... 370Understanding NAI Realm Authentication ....................................... 370NAI EAP ......................................................................................................... 371Intrusion Detection ....................................................................................... 373DoS Attacks ............................................................................................ 374Impersonation Attacks .......................................................................... 375About Blocking Rogue APs .................................................................. 376RF Intrusion Detection and Auto Block Mode .................................. 377DoS Attack Detection Settings ............................................................. 379Impersonation Detection Settings ....................................................... 379LED Settings .................................................................................................. 380DSCP Mappings ............................................................................................ 381Roaming Assist .............................................................................................. 382WDS ....................................................................................................................... 385About Configuring WDS Links .................................................................. 385Long Distance Links ..................................................................................... 387WDS Client Links ......................................................................................... 387Filters ..................................................................................................................... 391Filter Lists ...................................................................................................... 392Filter Management ....................................................................................... 395Clusters .................................................................................................................. 401Cluster Management ................................................................................... 401Mobile .................................................................................................................... 406AirWatch ........................................................................................................ 406User Procedure for Wireless Access ................................................... 408Using Tools on the Wireless AP................................................... 411System Tools ......................................................................................................... 412About Licensing and Upgrades ........................................................... 412System ..................................................................................................... 414Remote Boot Services ............................................................................ 416Configuration Management ................................................................. 417Diagnostics ............................................................................................. 421Application Control Signature File Management ............................. 422

Wireless Access PointixWeb Page Redirect (Captive Portal) ................................................... 423Network Tools ........................................................................................ 424Progress Bar and Status Frame ............................................................ 426CLI ......................................................................................................................... 426API Documentation ............................................................................................. 428Status/Settings ....................................................................................... 429GET Requests ......................................................................................... 429Trying a GET Request ........................................................................... 430API Documentation Toolbar ................................................................ 432Options .................................................................................................................. 433Logout .................................................................................................................... 434The Command Line Interface...................................................... 435Establishing a Secure Shell (SSH) Connection ................................................. 435Getting Started with the CLI .............................................................................. 437Entering Commands .................................................................................... 437Getting Help .................................................................................................. 437Top Level Commands ......................................................................................... 440Root Command Prompt ............................................................................... 440configure Commands ................................................................................... 441show Commands .......................................................................................... 445statistics Commands ..................................................................................... 450Configuration Commands .................................................................................. 452acl .................................................................................................................... 452admin .............................................................................................................. 453auth ................................................................................................................. 454cdp ................................................................................................................... 454clear ................................................................................................................. 456cluster ............................................................................................................. 458contact-info .................................................................................................... 459date-time ........................................................................................................ 460dhcp-server .................................................................................................... 461dns ................................................................................................................... 462file .................................................................................................................... 463filter ................................................................................................................. 467Air Cleaner ............................................................................................. 468group .............................................................................................................. 471

Wireless Access Pointxhostname ........................................................................................................ 471interface .......................................................................................................... 472load ................................................................................................................. 473location ........................................................................................................... 473location-reporting ......................................................................................... 474management .................................................................................................. 475mdm ................................................................................................................ 477more ................................................................................................................ 478netflow ............................................................................................................ 479no ..................................................................................................................... 480quick-config ................................................................................................... 481quit .................................................................................................................. 482authentication-server ................................................................................... 482reboot .............................................................................................................. 484reset ................................................................................................................. 484restore ............................................................................................................. 485roaming-assist ............................................................................................... 486run-tests .......................................................................................................... 487security ........................................................................................................... 489snmp ............................................................................................................... 490ssid .................................................................................................................. 491syslog .............................................................................................................. 492tunnel .............................................................................................................. 493uptime ............................................................................................................. 494vlan .................................................................................................................. 494wifi-tag ........................................................................................................... 495Sample Configuration Tasks .............................................................................. 497Configuring a Simple Open Global SSID .................................................. 498Configuring a Global SSID using WPA-PEAP ......................................... 499Configuring an SSID-Specific SSID using WPA-PEAP ........................... 500Enabling Global IAPs ................................................................................... 501Disabling Global IAPs .................................................................................. 502Enabling a Specific IAP ................................................................................ 503Disabling a Specific IAP ............................................................................... 504Setting Cell Size Auto-Configuration for All IAPs .................................. 505Setting the Cell Size for All IAPs ................................................................ 506Setting the Cell Size for a Specific IAP ....................................................... 507

Wireless Access PointxiConfiguring VLANs on an Open SSID ...................................................... 508Configuring Radio Assurance Mode (Loopback Tests) .......................... 509Appendices..................................................................................... 511Appendix A: Quick Reference Guide ...........................................513Factory Default Settings ...................................................................................... 513Host Name ..................................................................................................... 513Network Interfaces ....................................................................................... 513Serial ........................................................................................................ 513Gigabit 1 and Gigabit 2 ......................................................................... 514Server Settings ............................................................................................... 514NTP .......................................................................................................... 514Syslog ...................................................................................................... 514SNMP ...................................................................................................... 515DHCP .............................................................................................................. 515Default SSID .................................................................................................. 516Security .......................................................................................................... 516Global Settings - Encryption ............................................................... 516External RADIUS (Global) .................................................................. 517Internal RADIUS .................................................................................... 518Administrator Account and Password ...................................................... 518Management .................................................................................................. 518Keyboard Shortcuts ............................................................................................. 519Appendix B: FAQ and Special Topics ..........................................521General Hints and Tips ....................................................................................... 521Frequently Asked Questions .............................................................................. 522Multiple SSIDs ............................................................................................... 522Security ........................................................................................................... 524VLAN Support .............................................................................................. 527AP Monitor and Radio Assurance Capabilities ............................................... 529Enabling Monitoring on the AP .......................................................... 529How Monitoring Works ............................................................................... 529Radio Assurance ........................................................................................... 530Radio Assurance Options ..................................................................... 531RADIUS Vendor Specific Attribute (VSA) for Xirrus ..................................... 532Location Service Data Formats .......................................................................... 533

Wireless Access PointxiiEuclid Location Server ................................................................................. 533Non-Euclid Location Server ........................................................................ 533Upgrading the AP Using the Boot Loader ....................................................... 537Sample Output for the Upgrade Procedure: ............................................. 539Appendix C: Notices (XD and XR500/600 Series Only) ..........543Notices ................................................................................................................... 543EU Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance Information ........................................ 549Compliance Information (Non-EU) ................................................................... 556Safety Warnings ................................................................................................... 557Translated Safety Warnings ............................................................................... 558Software License and Product Warranty Agreement ..................................... 559Hardware Warranty Agreement ....................................................................... 559Appendix D: Notices (XR-1000 to XR-6000 Indoor Models) ...561Notices ................................................................................................................... 561EU Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance Information ........................................ 566Compliance Information (Non-EU) ................................................................... 573Safety Warnings ................................................................................................... 575Translated Safety Warnings ............................................................................... 576Software License and Product Warranty Agreement ..................................... 578Hardware Warranty Agreement ....................................................................... 578Appendix E: Medical Usage Notices ...........................................579Appendix F: Auditing PCI DSS ....................................................585Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard Overview .......................... 585PCI DSS and Wireless .......................................................................................... 586The Xirrus AP PCI Compliance Configuration ............................................... 587The pci-audit Command ..................................................................................... 588Additional Resources .......................................................................................... 589Appendix G: Implementing FIPS Security ..................................591Securing the AP Physically ................................................................................. 591Operator Required Actions .................................................................. 591Applying Tamper Evident Seals ......................................................... 592To implement FIPS 140-2, Level 2 using WMI ................................................. 593To implement FIPS 140-2, Level 2 using CLI: .................................................. 596To check if AP is in FIPS mode: ......................................................................... 596

Wireless Access PointxiiiAbout FIPS Configuration .................................................................................. 597Glossary of Terms.......................................................................... 599Index................................................................................................ 611

Wireless Access PointList of Figures xvList of FiguresFigure 1. Xirrus AP ..................................................................................................... 1Figure 2. Wireless AP (XR Series) ............................................................................ 4Figure 3. Wireless Coverage Patterns .................................................................... 15Figure 4. XP8 - Power over Ethernet Usage .......................................................... 16Figure 5. WMI: AP Status......................................................................................... 17Figure 6. Layout of IAPs (XR-7630)........................................................................ 18Figure 7. Coverage Schemes (XR-7230 shown)..................................................... 19Figure 8. Wall Thickness Considerations .............................................................. 33Figure 9. Unit Placement.......................................................................................... 34Figure 10. Full (Normal) Coverage........................................................................... 35Figure 11. Adjusting RF Patterns.............................................................................. 35Figure 12. Custom Coverage ..................................................................................... 36Figure 13. Connection Rate vs. Distance.................................................................. 36Figure 14. Transmit Power......................................................................................... 37Figure 15. Auto Cell Size Options............................................................................. 38Figure 16. Overlapping Cells..................................................................................... 39Figure 17. Allocating Channels Manually............................................................... 40Figure 18. Spatial Multiplexing................................................................................. 44Figure 19. MIMO Signal Processing......................................................................... 45Figure 20. MU-MIMO with Four Antennas ............................................................ 46Figure 21. Physical Layer Data Encoding................................................................ 47Figure 22. Channel Bonding (Channels 36-64 shown)........................................... 49Figure 23. Maximum 802.11ac Data Rates............................................................... 49Figure 24. Port Failover Protection........................................................................... 52Figure 25. Switch Failover Protection ..................................................................... 54Figure 26. Port Requirements for XMS .................................................................... 58Figure 27. WDS Link................................................................................................... 63Figure 28. A Multiple Hop WDS Connection ......................................................... 64Figure 29. WDS Failover Protection ......................................................................... 64Figure 30. Installation Workflow .............................................................................. 67Figure 31. AP Placement ............................................................................................ 69Figure 32. LED Locations........................................................................................... 72Figure 33. Network Interface Ports—XR-520 (left); XR-1000 Series (right) ........ 76Figure 34. Network Interface Ports—XR-600 Series ............................................. 77

Wireless Access Pointxvi List of FiguresFigure 35. Network Interfaces—XR-2000 Series (left); XR-2005/2006 (right) .... 77Figure 36. Network Interface Ports—XR-4000 Series ............................................ 77Figure 37. Network Interface Ports—XR-6000 Series ............................................ 77Figure 38. Web Management Interface .................................................................... 86Figure 39. WMI: Frames............................................................................................. 89Figure 40. WMI Header.............................................................................................. 90Figure 41. WMI Command Log ................................................................................ 91Figure 42. WMI: Utility Buttons................................................................................ 91Figure 43. Logging In to the Wireless AP................................................................ 92Figure 44. AP Summary ............................................................................................. 96Figure 45. Disabled IAP (Partial View).................................................................... 99Figure 46. IAP Cells .................................................................................................... 99Figure 47. Network Assurance and Operating Status......................................... 100Figure 48. AP Information ....................................................................................... 102Figure 49. Show Configuration ............................................................................... 103Figure 50. Admin Login History............................................................................. 104Figure 51. Network Settings .................................................................................... 105Figure 52. Network Map.......................................................................................... 106Figure 53. Spanning Tree Status.............................................................................. 109Figure 54. Routing Table.......................................................................................... 110Figure 55. ARP Table ................................................................................................ 110Figure 56. DHCP Leases........................................................................................... 111Figure 57. Connection Tracking.............................................................................. 111Figure 58. CDP List ................................................................................................... 112Figure 59. LLDP List................................................................................................. 113Figure 60. Network Assurance................................................................................ 113Figure 61. Undefined VLANs.................................................................................. 114Figure 62. RF Monitor — IAPs ................................................................................. 116Figure 63. RF Monitor — IAPs ................................................................................. 116Figure 64. RF Spectrum Analyzer........................................................................... 118Figure 65. Intrusion Detection/Rogue AP List..................................................... 120Figure 66. RF Monitor — Channel History............................................................. 122Figure 67. RF Monitor — Channel History (Rotated) ........................................... 123Figure 68. RF Monitor — Channel History (Text) ................................................. 123Figure 69. Radio Assurance..................................................................................... 124Figure 70. Stations..................................................................................................... 127Figure 71. Location Map........................................................................................... 129

Wireless Access PointList of Figures xviiFigure 72. Controls for Location Map .................................................................... 130Figure 73. Station RSSI Values ................................................................................ 132Figure 74. Station RSSI Values — Colorized Graphical View ............................. 133Figure 75. Station Signal-to-Noise Ratio Values................................................... 134Figure 76. Station SNR Values — Colorized Graphical View.............................. 134Figure 77. Station Noise Floor Values.................................................................... 135Figure 78. Station Noise Floor Values — Colorized Graphical View................. 136Figure 79. Max by IAP.............................................................................................. 137Figure 80. Station Assurance ................................................................................... 138Figure 81. IAP Statistics Summary Page................................................................ 139Figure 82. Individual IAP Statistics Page .............................................................. 141Figure 83. Network Statistics................................................................................... 142Figure 84. VLAN Statistics....................................................................................... 143Figure 85. WDS Statistics ......................................................................................... 144Figure 86. IDS Statistics Page .................................................................................. 145Figure 87. Filtered IDS Statistics ............................................................................. 146Figure 88. Filter Statistics ......................................................................................... 147Figure 89. Station Statistics ...................................................................................... 147Figure 90. Individual Station Statistics Page......................................................... 149Figure 91. Application Control ............................................................................... 152Figure 92. Application Control (Pie Charts).......................................................... 154Figure 93. Application Control (Station Traffic)................................................... 155Figure 94. Stations (Application Control).............................................................. 156Figure 95. System Log (Alert Level Highlighted) ................................................ 157Figure 96. IDS Event Log ......................................................................................... 158Figure 97. WMI: Express Setup............................................................................... 163Figure 98. LEDs are Switched On........................................................................... 168Figure 99. Network Interfaces................................................................................. 169Figure 100. Network Settings .................................................................................... 170Figure 101. Network Bonds and Bridging............................................................... 173Figure 102. Bridging Traffic....................................................................................... 174Figure 103. Port Modes (a, b)..................................................................................... 176Figure 104. Port Modes (c, d)..................................................................................... 177Figure 105. Mirroring Traffic..................................................................................... 179Figure 106. DNS Settings............................................................................................ 180Figure 107. CDP Settings............................................................................................ 181Figure 108. LLDP Settings ......................................................................................... 182

Wireless Access Pointxviii List of FiguresFigure 109. Services..................................................................................................... 185Figure 110. Time Settings (Manual Time)................................................................ 186Figure 111. Time Settings (NTP Time Enabled)...................................................... 187Figure 112. NetFlow.................................................................................................... 189Figure 113. Wi-Fi Tag.................................................................................................. 190Figure 114. Location.................................................................................................... 191Figure 115. System Log .............................................................................................. 193Figure 116. SNMP ....................................................................................................... 197Figure 117. DHCP Management............................................................................... 200Figure 118. Proxy Forwarding Example.................................................................. 203Figure 119. Set up a Proxy Server on each Client (Windows) .............................. 206Figure 120. Specify Proxy Servers (Windows)........................................................ 207Figure 121. Set up a Proxy Server on each Client (Apple) .................................... 208Figure 122. Specify Proxy Servers (Apple).............................................................. 209Figure 123. Proxy Forwarding................................................................................... 210Figure 124. Proxy Client for Management Traffic.................................................. 211Figure 125. VLANs...................................................................................................... 213Figure 126. VLAN Management............................................................................... 216Figure 127. Tunnel Summary.................................................................................... 220Figure 128. Tunnel Management .............................................................................. 221Figure 129. Tunnel SSID Assignments..................................................................... 223Figure 130. Tunnel VLAN Assignments.................................................................. 224Figure 131. Security..................................................................................................... 225Figure 132. Import Xirrus Certificate Authority..................................................... 230Figure 133. Admin Management .............................................................................. 231Figure 134. Admin Privileges.................................................................................... 233Figure 135. Admin RADIUS...................................................................................... 236Figure 136. Management Control ............................................................................. 238Figure 137. Pre-login Banner ..................................................................................... 239Figure 138. Management Transports........................................................................ 240Figure 139. Management Modes............................................................................... 242Figure 140. HTTPS (X.509) Certificate...................................................................... 245Figure 141. External Certificate Authority .............................................................. 246Figure 142. Access Control List................................................................................. 248Figure 143. Global Settings (Security) ...................................................................... 250Figure 144. External RADIUS Server ....................................................................... 254Figure 145. Internal RADIUS Server ........................................................................ 258

Wireless Access PointList of Figures xixFigure 146. Active Directory Server ......................................................................... 261Figure 147. Finding the Domain Name from Active Directory............................ 262Figure 148. Rogue Control List ................................................................................. 264Figure 149. OAuth 2.0 Management - Token List .................................................. 266Figure 150. SSIDs......................................................................................................... 268Figure 151. Four Traffic Classes................................................................................ 271Figure 152. Priority Level—IEEE 802.1p (Layer 2)................................................. 272Figure 153. Priority Level—DSCP (DiffServ - Layer 3) ......................................... 272Figure 154. SSID Management.................................................................................. 277Figure 155. SSID Management—Encryption, Authentication, Accounting ...... 281Figure 156. WPR Internal Splash Page Fields (SSID Management)..................... 287Figure 157. Customizing an Internal Login or Splash Page.................................. 292Figure 158. Whitelist Configuration for WPR......................................................... 293Figure 159. Purple WiFi Guest Access ..................................................................... 294Figure 160. Setting Active IAPs per SSID ................................................................ 298Figure 161. Per-SSID Access Control List................................................................ 299Figure 162. Honeypot Whitelist ................................................................................ 301Figure 163. Personal Wi-Fi......................................................................................... 302Figure 164. Groups...................................................................................................... 304Figure 165. Group Management ............................................................................... 306Figure 166. IAPs........................................................................................................... 311Figure 167. Source of Channel Setting ..................................................................... 311Figure 168. IAP Settings ............................................................................................. 313Figure 169. Global Settings (IAPs)............................................................................ 319Figure 170. Multicast Processing .............................................................................. 324Figure 171. Additional Optimization Settings........................................................ 330Figure 172. Global Settings .11an.............................................................................. 335Figure 173. Global Settings .11bgn ........................................................................... 341Figure 174. Global Settings .11n................................................................................ 347Figure 175. Global Settings .11ac .............................................................................. 350Figure 176. 802.11u Global Settings.......................................................................... 353Figure 177. Advanced RF Settings............................................................................ 358Figure 178. Station Assurance (Advanced RF Settings) ........................................ 366Figure 179. Hotspot 2.0 Settings................................................................................ 369Figure 180. NAI Realms ............................................................................................. 370Figure 181. NAI EAP .................................................................................................. 371Figure 182. Intrusion Detection Settings.................................................................. 373

Wireless Access Pointxx List of FiguresFigure 183. LED Settings............................................................................................ 380Figure 184. DSCP Mappings...................................................................................... 381Figure 185. Roaming Assist ....................................................................................... 383Figure 186. WDS.......................................................................................................... 385Figure 187. Configuring a WDS Link....................................................................... 386Figure 188. WDS Client Links ................................................................................... 387Figure 189. Filters........................................................................................................ 391Figure 190. Filter Lists ................................................................................................ 392Figure 191. Filter Management ................................................................................. 395Figure 192. Filter Category or Application.............................................................. 399Figure 193. Clusters .................................................................................................... 401Figure 194. Cluster Management.............................................................................. 402Figure 195. Viewing Statistics in Cluster Mode...................................................... 404Figure 196. AirWatch Settings................................................................................... 406Figure 197. System Tools............................................................................................ 412Figure 198. Remote Boot Services............................................................................. 416Figure 199. Configuration Management.................................................................. 417Figure 200. Saving the Diagnostic Log..................................................................... 421Figure 201. Managing Application Control Signature files .................................. 422Figure 202. Managing WPR Splash/Login page files............................................ 423Figure 203. System Command (Ping)....................................................................... 424Figure 204. Radius Ping Output................................................................................ 425Figure 205. CLI Window............................................................................................ 426Figure 206. API Documentation................................................................................ 428Figure 207. API — GET Request Details ................................................................. 429Figure 208. API — GET Request Response ............................................................. 431Figure 209. API Documentation Toolbar................................................................. 432Figure 210. WMI Display Options............................................................................ 433Figure 211. Login Window ........................................................................................ 434Figure 212. Logging In................................................................................................ 436Figure 213. Help Window.......................................................................................... 438Figure 214. Full Help .................................................................................................. 438Figure 215. Partial Help.............................................................................................. 439Figure 216. Air Cleaner Filter Rules ......................................................................... 469Figure 217. Configuring a Simple Open Global SSID............................................ 498Figure 218. Configuring a Global SSID using WPA-PEAP................................... 499Figure 219. Configuring an SSID-Specific SSID using WPA-PEAP..................... 500

Wireless Access PointList of Figures xxiFigure 220. Enabling Global IAPs............................................................................. 501Figure 221. Disabling Global IAPs............................................................................ 502Figure 222. Enabling a Specific IAP.......................................................................... 503Figure 223. Disabling a Specific IAP......................................................................... 504Figure 224. Setting Cell Size Auto-Configuration for All IAPs............................ 505Figure 225. Setting the Cell Size for All IAPs.......................................................... 506Figure 226. Setting the Cell Size for a Specific IAP ................................................ 507Figure 227. Configuring VLANs on an Open SSID................................................ 508Figure 228. Configuring Radio Assurance Mode (Loopback Testing)................ 510Figure 229. Sample output of pci-audit command................................................. 589Figure 230. Tamper Evident Seal Application for Indoor Enclosure .................. 592Figure 231. Tamper Evident Seal Application Close-up ....................................... 593Figure 232. AP Information ....................................................................................... 594Figure 233. Security - Management Control Window.......................................... 595

Wireless Access Pointxxii List of Figures

Wireless Access PointIntroduction 1IntroductionThis chapter introduces the Xirrus Family of Products, with an overview of its key features and benefits. z“The Xirrus Family of Products” on page 1.z“Why Choose the Xirrus Access Point?” on page 3.z“Wireless Access Point Product Overview” on page 4.z“Key Features and Benefits” on page 18.z“Advanced Feature Sets” on page 21.z“About this User’s Guide” on page 25.The Xirrus Family of ProductsFigure 1. Xirrus APThe Xirrus family of products includes the following:zXirrus High Density Wireless Access Points Xirrus APs are designed to provide distributed intelligence, integrated switching capacity, application-level intelligence, increased bandwidth, and smaller size. The radios support IEEE802.11 ac, a, b, g, and n clients, and feature the capacity and performance needed to replace switched Ethernet to the desktop. Modular radios allow you to increase the number of radios, upgrade to more powerful radios, or even upgrade later to future technologies like 802.11ac and 802.11ad as they are introduced.

Wireless Access Point2 IntroductionzXirrus Management System (XMS)XMS is used for managing large wireless deployments from a centralized Web-based interface. Xirrus offers XMS-Cloud—a software as a service option for XMS, providing zero-touch provisioning and initial startup for new AP deployments. XMS is capable of managing large numbers of APs, including automated software and firmware upgrades for the network. Another option is XMS, hosted on your own server. It manages all aspects of your Xirrus wireless network. For customers using the XMS-9000-CL-x Cloud-hosted version, all AP management is performed via the cloud. For detailed information, refer to the XMS User’s Guide.zXirrus-supplied Power over Ethernet (POE) Injectors and POE+ SwitchesXirrus offers 24- and 48-port enterprise-class L2+ gigabit managed access switches with IEEE802.3at PoE+, four 1G/10G SFP+ ports, and stacking. One-, two-, and eight-port POE injectors are also available for a range of AP power requirements.NomenclatureThroughout this User’s Guide, Xirrus Wireless Access Points are referred to as simply APs or APs. In some instances, the terms product and unit are also used. When discussing specific products from the Xirrus family, the product name is used (for example, XR-4830). The Wireless AP’s operating system is referred to as the ArrayOS (AOS). The Web Management Interface for browser-based management of the AP is referred to as WMI. APs have very flexible radio capabilities — each of the radios may be independently configured to support IEEE802.11a, 11b, 11g, or 11n clients or a combination of client types. On APs featuring 802.11ac, this option is also included. One radio may be assigned as the RF monitor radio, supporting intrusion detection and prevention, self-monitoring, and other services. Radios support both 2.4GHz and 5 GHz, and are named iap1, iap2, ... iapn. The Xirrus Management System is referred to as XMS. The Power over Ethernet system may be referred to as POE.

Wireless Access PointIntroduction 3Why Choose the Xirrus Access Point?The deployment of wireless is a necessity as businesses strive for greater flexibility in the workplace and the need for employee mobility rises. The user community is placing spiraling and often unanticipated demands on the wireless network, with the rapid proliferation of devices such as iPads and wireless enabled phones. Xirrus High Density APs have the capability to support the large number of user devices present in today’s environments, with superior range and coverage. Wireless has come a long way in the past few years and now offers the performance, reliability and security that Enterprise customers have come to expect from their networks. The technology is being driven by these major IEEE standards:z802.11acOperates in the 5 GHz range, using a number of advanced techniques to achieve a maximum speed of 1.3 Gbps. These techniques include improvements on the methods used for 802.11n, below. z802.11nUses multiple antennas per radio to boost transmission speed as high as450Mbps, increasing throughput, range, and maximum number of users. 802.11n is backwards compatible with 802.11a/b/g.z802.11aOperates in the 5 GHz range with a maximum speed of 54 Mbps.z802.11bOperates in the 2.4 GHz range with a maximum speed of 11 Mbps. z802.11gSupports a higher transmission speed of 54 Mbps in the 2.4 GHz range and is backwards compatible with 802.11b.Whether you have just a few users or many users, the Xirrus AP has the scalability and flexibility to serve your needs.

Wireless Access Point4 IntroductionSee AlsoKey Features and BenefitsWireless Access Point Product OverviewThe Xirrus Family of ProductsWireless Access Point Product OverviewThe Wireless AP is a high capacity, multi-mode device designed with up to four times the coverage and eight times the bandwidth and user density compared with legacy thin access point wireless products. Its distributed intelligence eliminates the use of separate controllers and their accompanying bottlenecks.Each radio, with its directional high-gain antennas, can achieve up to 1.3 Gbps throughput.Figure 2. Wireless AP (XR Series) The Wireless AP (regardless of the product model) is Wi-Fi® compliant and simultaneously supports 802.11ac (on .11ac models), 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, and 802.11n clients. The multi-state design allows you to assign radios to 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands (or both) in any desired arrangement. Integrated switching and active enterprise class features such as VLAN support and multiple SSIDcapability enable robust network compatibility and a high level of scalability and system control. The Xirrus Management System (XMS) allows global management of hundreds of APs from a central location.Multiple versions of the AP with different numbers of IAPs support a variety of deployment applications.

Wireless Access PointIntroduction 5XR Wireless AP Product FamilyXR-320 Wall Mounted 2-Radio Access PointsThe XR-320 is a high performance Gigabit Wi-Fi wall access point with integrated wired Gigabit switch designed for in-room connectivity. This AP, built to support the latest 802.11ac Wi-Fi standards, is designed for multi-device wired and wireless connectivity in hotel rooms, dormitories, hospital rooms, offices, and similar locations. Using existing in-wall cabling, the XR-320 can deliver Wi-Fi access, connectivity to multiple wired devices and pass through access for legacy devices like POTS. These models have omni-directional antennas rather than directional antennas. The XR-320 runs a different operating system than ArrayOS, and the WMI and CLI described in this book do not apply to the XR-320. This model should be managed using XMS-Cloud. Feature XR-320No. radios: 802.11 a/b/g/n/ac/Monitor 2Radio type 2x2Integrated antennas 4Integrated wireless switch ports 2 Gigabit Uplink Port 1Wireless bandwidth 1.1 GbpsUsers supported 256

Wireless Access Point6 IntroductionXR-500 Series 2-Radio Access PointsThese Access Points have one Gigabit Ethernet port and two multi-state radios (2.4GHz or 5GHz). They support 600Mbps total, connecting up to 240 users at one time. The Access Point provides flexibility for delivering wireless service in low-to-medium user density scenarios, in challenging deployments in areas with high RF attenuation, and in isolated or physically separated locations. These models have an integrated controller, firewall, threat sensor, and spectrum analyzer. Indoor units have omni-directional antennas rather than directional antennas. Feature XR-520No. radios: 802.11 a/b/g/n/monitor 2Radio type 2x2Integrated omni-directional antennas 4Integrated wireless switch ports 2 Integrated RF spectrum analyzer, threat sensors YesGigabit Uplink Port 1Wireless bandwidth 600 MbpsUsers supported 240

Wireless Access PointIntroduction 7XR-600 Series 2-Radio Access PointsThese Access Points provide robust wireless service in low-to-medium user density scenarios. They have two Gigabit Ethernet ports and two multi-state radios (2.4GHz or 5GHz), so that as more of your clients migrate to 802.11ac, you can increase the number of radios operating at 5 GHz. Each of the XR-630’s two 3x3 802.11ac radios supports 1.3Gbps, connecting up to 240 users at one time with 2.6Gbps total Wi-Fi bandwidth. These models have an integrated controller, firewall, threat sensor spectrum analyzer, and application-level intelligence. They have omni-directional antennasrather than directional antennas.The XR-630 supports a unique feature that optimizes wireless performance by automatically segmenting faster 802.11ac clients from slower Wi-Fi clients. Since Wi-Fi is a shared medium, this separation ensures slower 802.11a/b/g/n clients do not slow down 802.11ac clients and prevent them from achieving high performance.Note that the XH2-120 is an outdoor AP that is similar to the XR-620, except that it uses customer-provided external antennas rather than integrated antennas. See the Xirrus XH2-120 Quick Installation Guide for more information. Feature XR-620 XR-630No. radios: 802.11 ac/a/b/g/n/monitor 22Radio type 2x2 3x3Integrated omni-directional antennas 46Integrated wireless switch ports 2 2 Integrated RF spectrum analyzer, threat sensors Yes YesGigabit Uplink Ports 2 2Wireless bandwidth 1.7 Gbps 2.6 GbpsUsers supported 240 240

Wireless Access Point8 IntroductionXR-1000 Series 2-Radio Access PointsThese APs include models with one Gigabit Ethernet port and two multi-state radios (2.4GHz or 5GHz) that can support 300Mbps or 450Mbps, connecting up to 480 users at one time. The Xirrus XR-1000 Series Wireless AP is a two slot chassis available in a two multi-state (2.4GHz or 5GHz) radio configuration with up to 900Mbps of bandwidth (up to 450 Mbps per radio). The XR-1000 provides flexibility for delivering wireless service in low user density scenarios, challenging deployments in areas with high RF attenuation, and in isolated or physically separated locations. The elliptical-shaped coverage pattern produced by its directional antennas is ideal for covering facilities with central hallways and adjacent rooms commonly found in office buildings, hotels, and dormitories.Like larger APs, these models integrate multi-state radios with high gain directional antennas, an onboard multi-gigabit switch, controller, firewall, threat sensor and spectrum analyzer, built on a modular chassis for future extensibility. Feature XR-1220 XR-1230No. radios: 802.11 a/b/g/n/monitor 22Radio type 2x2 3x3Integrated antennas 4 6Integrated wireless switch ports 22Integrated RF spectrum analyzer, threat sensors Yes YesGigabit Uplink Port 1 1Wireless bandwidth 600 Mbps 900 MbpsUsers supported 480 480

Wireless Access PointIntroduction 9XD4-130 4-Radio High Density Access Points These APs have two Gigabit Ethernet ports and four multi-state radios (2.4GHz or 5GHz) supporting 802.11ac and 802.11a/b/g/n. Each of the four 3x3 802.11ac radios supports 1.3Gbps, connecting up to 780 users at one time with up to 5.2 Gbps total Wi-Fi bandwidth. The Xirrus XD4-130 AP supports high-performance for medium density needs. It integrates multi-state radios with high gain directional antennas, an onboard multi-gigabit switch, controller, firewall, threat sensor and spectrum analyzer.A unique feature optimizes wireless performance by automatically segmenting faster 802.11ac clients from slower Wi-Fi clients. Since Wi-Fi is a shared medium, this separation ensures slower 802.11a/b/g/n clients do not slow down 802.11ac clients and prevent them from achieving high performance. Feature XD4-130No. radios: 802.11 ac/a/b/g/n/monitor 4Radio type 3x3Integrated antennas 12Integrated wireless switch ports 4Integrated RF spectrum analyzer, threat sensors YesGigabit Uplink Ports 2Wireless bandwidth 5.2 GbpsUsers supported 780

Wireless Access Point10 IntroductionXR-2006 Series 2- and 4-Radio High Density Access Points These APs have two Gigabit Ethernet ports and two or four multi-state radios (2.4GHz or 5GHz) supporting 802.11ac and 802.11a/b/g/n. Each of the XR-2436’s four 3x3 802.11ac radios supports 1.3Gbps, connecting up to 512 users at one time with up to 5.2 Gbps total Wi-Fi bandwidth. The Xirrus XR-2006 Series has a four-slot chassis that allows you to purchase a two-radio model and add more radios later as your needs grow. These models support high-performance for medium to high density needs. Like larger XR APs, these models integrate multi-state radios with high gain directional antennas, an onboard multi-gigabit switch, controller, firewall, threat sensor and spectrum analyzer on a modular chassis designed for extensibility.A unique feature optimizes wireless performance by automatically segmenting faster 802.11ac clients from slower Wi-Fi clients. Since Wi-Fi is a shared medium, this separation ensures slower 802.11a/b/g/n clients do not slow down 802.11ac clients and prevent them from achieving high performance. Feature XR-2226 XR-2236 XR-2426 XR-2436No. radios: 802.11 ac/a/b/g/n/monitor 2244Radio type 2x2 3x3 2x2 3x3Integrated antennas 4 6 8 12Integrated wireless switch ports 4444Integrated RF spectrum analyzer, threat sensors Yes Yes Yes YesGigabit Uplink Ports 2222Wireless bandwidth 1.7 Gbps 2.6 Gbps 3.4 Gbps 5.2 GbpsUsers supported 256 256 512 512

Wireless Access PointIntroduction 11XR-2005 Series 2- and 4-Radio Access Points These APs include models with one or two Gigabit Ethernet ports and two or four multi-state radios (2.4GHz or 5GHz) that can support 300Mbps or 450Mbps, connecting up to 960 users at one time. The Xirrus XR-2005 Series Wireless AP has a four slot chassis available in a multi-state (2.4GHz or 5GHz) radio configuration supporting up to 1.8Gbps of bandwidth. These models support a range of low to high-performance applications, including offices, hospitals, campuses and classrooms, and hotels. Like larger XR APs, these models integrate multi-state radios with high gain directional antennas, an onboard multi-gigabit switch, controller, firewall, threat sensor and spectrum analyzer on a modular chassis designed for extensibility. XR-2005 Series APs have no console port, but have two Gigabit ports, one of which accepts POE+ power supplied by a Xirrus-supplied power injector or an IEEE802.3at powered switch. Note that older XR-2000 Series APs ending in “0” have one Gigabit POE port and a Console port. Feature XR-2225 XR-2235 XR-2425 XR-2435No. radios: 802.11 a/b/g/n/monitor 2244Radio type 2x2 3x3 2x2 3x3Integrated antennas 4 6 8 12Integrated wireless switch ports 4444Integrated RF spectrum analyzer, threat sensors Yes Yes Yes YesGigabit Uplink Ports 2222Wireless bandwidth 600 Mbps 900 Mbps 1.2 Gbps 1.8 GbpsUsers supported 480 480 960 960

Wireless Access Point12 IntroductionXR-4006 Series 4- to 8-Radio High Density Access Points These APs include models with two Gigabit Ethernet ports and four or eight multi-state radios (2.4GHz or 5GHz) supporting 802.11ac and 802.11a/b/g/n. Each of the XR-4836’s eight 3x3 802.11ac radios supports 1.3Gbps, connecting up to 1024 users at one time with up to 10.4 Gbps total Wi-Fi bandwidth. The Xirrus XR-4006 Series Wireless AP has an eight-slot chassis that allows you to purchase a four-radio model and add more radios later as your needs grow. These models support high-performance for high density needs, integrating multi-state radios with high gain directional antennas, an onboard multi-gigabit switch, controller, firewall, threat sensor and spectrum analyzer on a modular chassis designed for extensibility.A unique feature optimizes wireless performance by automatically segmenting faster 802.11ac clients from slower Wi-Fi clients. Since Wi-Fi is a shared medium, this separation ensures slower 802.11a/b/g/n clients do not slow down 802.11ac clients and prevent them from achieving high performance. Feature XR-4426 XR-4436 XR-4826 XR-4836No. of radios: 802.11 ac/a/b/g/n/monitor 4488Radio type 2x2 3x3 2x2 3x3Integrated antennas 8 12 16 24Integrated wireless switch ports 8888Integrated RF spectrum analyzer, threat sensors Yes Yes Yes Yes1 Gigabit Uplink Ports 2 2 2 2Wireless bandwidth 3.5 Gbps 5.2 Gbps 6.9 Gbps 10.4 GbpsUsers supported 512 512 1024 1024

Wireless Access PointIntroduction 13XR-4000 Series 4- to 8-Radio High Density Access Points (not ending in “6”)These APs include models with two Gigabit Ethernet ports and four or eight radios (IAPs), connecting up to 1920 users at one time and offering a maximum wireless bandwidth of 3.6 Gbps (up to 450 Mbps per radio). Smaller models may be upgraded to eight radios later when your needs change. Feature XR-4420 XR-4430 XR-4820 XR-4830Number of radios:802.11a/b/g/n/monitor 4488Radio type 2x2 3x3 2x2 3x3Integrated antennas 8 12 16 24Integrated wireless switch ports 8888Integrated RF spectrum analyzer, threat sensors Yes Yes Yes Yes1 Gigabit Uplink Ports 2 2 2 2Wireless bandwidth 1.2 Gbps 1.8 Gbps 2.4 Gbps 3.6 GbpsUsers supported 960 960 1920 1920

Wireless Access Point14 IntroductionXR-6000 Series 8- to 16-Radio High Density Access PointsThese APs include models with four Gigabit Ethernet ports and up to sixteen radios, connecting up to 3840 users at one time and offering a maximum wireless bandwidth of 7.2 Gbps (up to 450 Mbps per radio). Smaller models may be upgraded to sixteen radios later when your needs change. A 10 Gigabit modular Ethernet expansion port (DVI connector) is available to meet high traffic demands. It is used only with an optional Xirrus 10 Gig fiber optics adapter. Enterprise Class SecurityThe latest and most effective wireless encryption security standards, including Wireless Protected Access (WPA) and WPA2 with 802.11i Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) are available on the Wireless AP. In addition, the use of an embedded RADIUS server (or 802.1x with an external RADIUS server) ensures user authentication — multiple APs can authenticate to the XMS, ensuring only authorized APs become part of the wireless network. With the Xirrus Advanced Feature XR-6820 XR-6830 XR-7620 XR-7630Number of radios:802.11a/b/g/n/monitor 881616Radio type 2x2 3x3 2x2 3x3Number of integrated antennas 16 24 32 48Integrated wireless switch ports 16 16 16 16Integrated RF spectrum analyzer, threat sensors Yes Yes Yes Yes1 Gigabit Uplink Ports 4 4 4 4External 10 Gigabit Modular Expansion Port 1111Wireless bandwidth (Gbps) 2.4 3.6 4.8 7.2Users supported 1920 1920 3840 3840

Wireless Access PointIntroduction 15Feature Sets, intrusion detection and prevention, site monitoring, and RF spectrum analysis are performed in the background by the AP automatically.Deployment FlexibilityXirrus’ unique multi-radio architecture (on all APs except the XR-500 Series) generates 360 degrees of sectored high-gain 802.11a/b/g/n coverage that provides extended range and the highest possible data rates for a large volume of clients. Each sector can be adjusted automatically or manually, creating a pattern of wireless coverage perfectly tailored to individual customer needs. For example:Figure 3. Wireless Coverage PatternsFigure 3 depicts the following two scenarios:zFull pattern coverageAll radios are activated with coverage spanning 360 degrees. If within range, clients will always receive coverage regardless of their geographic position relative to the AP. Radios may be assigned to 2.4 GHz and/or 5.0 GHz bands in any desired pattern.zPartial pattern coverageIf desired, the Wireless AP can be deployed close to an exterior wall. In this case, half of all available radios have been deactivated to prevent redundant signals from “bleeding” beyond the site’s perimeter wall. This configuration may also be used in those cases where you want to restrict wireless coverage to selected areas of the building’s interior.outside wall

Wireless Access Point16 IntroductionPower over Ethernet (POE) Some smaller APs (XR-2000 models ending in “5” or “6”, and XR-500/600 Series) are compatible with IEEE802.3af and/or IEEE802.3at PoE+, and may be connected to appropriate powered switches. For example, the Xirrus XT-5024 and XT-5048 are 24-and 48-port 802.3at POE+ managed switches. See the Installation Guide for the AP for compatible injectors or powered switches.POE modules provide power to APs over the same Cat 5e or Cat 6 cable used for data. Managed modules provide the ability to control power using XMS.Figure 4. XP8 - Power over Ethernet UsageSpecific models of the AP are compatible with specific POE modules. Enterprise Class ManagementThe Wireless AP can be used with its default settings, or it can be initially configured using zero touch cloud-based automated provisioning. Settings may also be customized using the AP’s embedded WMI. The WMI enables easy

Wireless Access PointIntroduction 17configuration and control from a graphical console, plus a full complement of troubleshooting tools and statistics. Figure 5. WMI: AP Status In addition, a fully featured Command Line Interface (CLI) offers IT professionals a familiar management and control environment. Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is also supported to allow management from an SNMP compliant management tool, such as the optional XMS.#For deployments of more than five APs, we recommend that you use the cloud-based or enterprise version of XMS. XMS offers a rich set of features for fine control over large deployments.

Wireless Access Point18 IntroductionKey Features and BenefitsThis section describes some of the key product features and the benefits you can expect when deploying the Wireless AP (the XR-7630 product is used as an example in this section). High Capacity and High Performance Figure 6. Layout of IAPs (XR-7630) The XR-7630 version of the Wireless AP (Figure 6) enables wireless connectivity and easily handles time-sensitive traffic such as voice. This model includes four Gigabit uplink ports for connection to the wired network. Its sixteen IAPs (radios) provide a maximum wireless capacity of 7.2 Gbps, which offers ample reserves for the high demands of current and future applications. Of the sixteen IAPs, fifteen operate as radios which may be set up to serve your choice of client types — any or all of 802.11a/b/g/n (5 GHz or 2.4 GHz bands), providing backwards compatibility with 802.11b and 802.11g.In the recommended configuration, one IAP is configured in RF monitoring and intrusion detection/prevention mode.Extended CoverageOne XR-7630 solution enables you to replace fifteen access points (including one omni-directional IAP for monitoring the network). Fifteen IAP radios with integrated directional antennas provide increased wireless range and enhanced

Wireless Access PointIntroduction 19data rates in all directions. With a Wireless AP deployed, far fewer access points are needed and wired-like resiliency is delivered throughout your wireless network. Your Wireless AP deployment ensures:zContinuous connectivity if an IAP (radio) fails.zContinuous connectivity if an AP fails.zContinuous connectivity if a WDS link or switch fails.zContinuous connectivity if a Gigabit uplink or switch fails.Flexible Coverage SchemesFigure 7. Coverage Schemes (XR-7230 shown)z802.11a/nDelivers 60° wireless coverage per IAP, with 6 dBi of gain.z802.11b/g/nDelivers 180° wireless coverage, with 3 dBi of gain.

Wireless Access Point20 Introductionz802.11a/b/g/n (monitor only)Delivers 360° wireless coverage, with 2 dBi of gain.Non-Overlapping ChannelsComplete use of non-overlapping channels limits interference and delivers maximum capacity. On the XR-7630, up to 16 non-overlapping channels are fully utilized across the 5GHz and 2.4GHz spectrums.SDMA OptimizationSDMA (Spatial Division Multiple Access) technology provides full 360° coverage while allowing independent channel and power output customization. Also supports fast inter-zone handoffs for time-sensitive applications and roaming.Fast RoamingFast roaming utilizes the Xirrus Roaming Protocol ensuring fast and seamless roaming capabilities between IAPs or APs at both Layer 2 and Layer 3.Ease of DeploymentXirrus XMS simplifies and speeds deployment of the wireless network by automatically setting up each AP’s license, software image, and initial configuration. When the AP is installed and has Internet connectivity, it contacts Xirrus, which performs these initialization tasks. Powerful ManagementThe XMS offers real time monitoring and management capabilities for the wireless network. Secure Wireless AccessMultiple layers of authentication and encryption ensure secure data transmissions. The Wireless AP is 802.11i compliant with line-rate encryption support for 40 and 128 bit WEP, WPA and WPA2 with TKIP and AES encryption. Authentication is provided via 802.1x, including PEAP, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-SIM, EAP-GTC, EAP-AKA, EAP-AKA-Prime, and Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol (LEAP) passthrough. Intrusion detection and prevention provide proactive monitoring of the environment for threats.

Wireless Access PointIntroduction 21Applications EnablementThe Wireless AP’s Quality of Service (QoS) functionality combined with true switch capabilities enable high density video and Voice over Wireless LAN deployments. Compliant with 802.1p and 802.1Q standards. See AlsoWireless Access Point Product OverviewPower over Ethernet (POE)Why Choose the Xirrus Access Point?Advanced Feature Sets The Wireless AP offers a family of powerful functionality packages, including the RF Performance Manager (RPM), RF Security Manager (RSM), RF Analysis Manager (RAM), and Application Control. These four packages are separately licensed for operation on your AP. RPM, RSM, and RAM are automatically included as part of all APs. Application Control is an optional feature.Xirrus Advanced RF Performance Manager (RPM)The Xirrus RPM optimizes the bandwidth usage and station performance of wireless networks. Leveraging the multiple integrated access point (multi-radio) design of the Xirrus Wireless AP, RPM manages the allocation of wireless bandwidth to wireless stations across multiple RF channels. The result maximizes overall network performance with superior flexibility and capacity. Today's wireless infrastructure is faced with ever increasing numbers and variations of wireless enabled clients, whether in the form of notebooks, tablets, smart phones, IP phones, printers, projectors, cameras, RFID tags, etc. The advent of higher speed wireless and its increased use of the 5GHz spectrum adds to the number of variables today's wireless networks must accommodate. Backwards compatibility with older clients is crucial, however their operation in a wireless network can significantly hinder the performance of faster clients. As an example, 802.11b wireless stations communicate more than 10 times slower than 802.11n stations.

Wireless Access Point22 IntroductionWith each of the AP’s multiple radios operating on a different channel, RPM selects the ideal radio for each station. High-speed stations are grouped together on radios with other high speed stations, while lower speed stations are combined with other lower speed stations. This ensures optimal performance for high-speed 802.11ac stations without compromise. The complete feature set of the RPM package includes: zWireless Distribution System (WDS) for point-to-point communicationzWireless Mode per IAPzSharp Cell technologyzWireless Data Rate OptimizationzWireless Traffic ShapingzWireless Voice Call Admission ControlzFast Layer 2 and 3 Roaming zStandby Mode Xirrus Advanced RF Security Manager (RSM)The Xirrus RSM improves security and minimizes the risk in deploying 802.11wireless networks. Leveraging an integrated 24/7 threat sensor and hardware-based encryption/decryption in each AP, RSM secures the wireless network from multiple types of threats. The result delivers uncompromised overall network security with superior flexibility and performance. Wireless networks face a number of potential security threats in the form of rogue access points, ad-hoc clients, unauthorized clients, wireless-based attacks, eavesdropping, etc. As “bring your own device” (BYOD) becomes ubiquitous in enterprise networks, defending against these threats becomes more critical. With the AP’s threat sensor radio scanning all channels in the 2.4GHz and 5GHz spectrums, RSM searches for security threats and automatically mitigates them. High performance encryption/decryption in the enterprise wireless network is a must. The wireless network needs to support each client using the highest level of encryption (WPA2 Enterprise/128 bit AES) and without degrading the overall performance of the network. Xirrus incorporates hardware-based encryption/

Wireless Access PointIntroduction 23decryption into each AP, delivering line-rate encryption at the edge of the network instead of at a choke point within a centralized controller. The complete feature set of the RSM package includes: zWireless IDS/IPS (Intrusion Detection/Prevention System)zWireless stateful firewallzUser group policieszAuthenticated guest access gatewayzNAC integrationXirrus Advanced RF Analysis Manager (RAM)The RF Advanced Analysis Manager (RAM) tests and troubleshoots wireless networks. The deployment of 802.11ac presents a set of unique challenges based on technology differences with legacy 802.11a/b/g/n networks, both on the wireless infrastructure and client side. Xirrus RAM equips each Wireless AP with a powerful set of tools and features to optimally tune and verify an 802.11ac installation, as well as give IT administrators the ability to troubleshoot issues that may occur within the wireless environment. 802.11ac deployment will continue to evolve over the next several years with additional performance and optional functions, along with an ongoing stream of IEEE 802.11 amendments. This changing wireless landscape mandates that appropriate tools are available to the user to analyze, optimize, and troubleshoot their changing environments. The distributed architecture of the AP enables the execution of powerful wireless and networking analysis at the edge of the network where packets traverse the wireless-to-wired boundary. The AP includes an embedded wireless controller with the necessary computing and memory resources to provide these functions securely at the network's edge. The key elements of the RAM package include: zRF Analysis – An embedded Spectrum Analyzer leverages the dedicated threat sensor radio in each Wireless AP to provide a continual view of utilization, interference, and errors across all available wireless channels.

Wireless Access Point24 IntroductionzPacket Analysis – Integrated packet capture provides filterable views of all traffic traversing on the wired and wireless interfaces of the AP.zPerformance Analysis – Embedded traffic generation enables the throughput of the AP’s wireless or wired interfaces to be analyzed.zFailure Recovery – Radio Assurance provides an automatic self-test and self healing mechanism that ensures continuous system operation.zNetflow SupportzNetwork Tools: ping, RADIUS ping, tracerouteXirrus Application ControlThe Application Control feature is available on APs to provide real-time visibility of application usage by users across the wireless network. Network usage has changed enormously in the last few years, with the increase in smart phone and tablet usage stressing networks. The AP uses Deep Packet Inspection (DPI) to determine what applications are being used and by whom, and how much bandwidth they are consuming. These applications are rated by their degree of risk and productiveness. The results are presented to you both graphically and in tables. Filters can be used to implement per-application policies that keep network usage focused on productive uses, eliminating risky and non-business-oriented applications such as BitTorrent. You can increase the priority of mission-critical applications like VoIP and WebEx. See “Application Control Windows” on page 150 for more information.

Wireless Access PointIntroduction 25About this User’s GuideThis User’s Guide provides detailed information and procedures that will enable wireless network administrators to install, configure and manage the Wireless AP so that end users can take full advantage of the product’s features and functionality without technical assistance.OrganizationTopics and procedures are organized by function under the following chapter headings: zIntroductionProvides a brief introduction to wireless technology, an overview of the product, including its key features and benefits, and presents the product specifications.zInstalling the Wireless APDefines prerequisites for deploying and installing the AP and provides instructions to help you plan and complete a successful installation.zThe Web Management InterfaceOffers an overview of the product’s embedded Web Management Interface, including its content and structure. It emphasizes what you need to do to ensure that any configuration changes you make are applied, and provides a list of restricted characters. It also includes instructions for logging in to the AP with your Web browser.zViewing Status on the Wireless APDescribes the status and statistics displays available on the AP using its embedded Web Management Interface. zConfiguring the Wireless APContains procedures for configuring the AP using its embedded Web Management Interface. zUsing Tools on the Wireless APContains procedures for using utility tools provided in the Web Management Interface. It includes procedures for upgrading the system

Wireless Access Point26 Introductionfirmware, uploading and downloading configurations and other files, using diagnostic tools, and resetting the AP to its factory defaults.zThe Command Line InterfaceIncludes the commands and the command structure used by the Wireless AP’s Command Line Interface (CLI), and provides a procedure for establishing a Telnet connection to the AP. This chapter also includes some sample key configuration tasks using the CLI.zAppendix A: Quick Reference Guide Contains the product’s factory default settings.zAppendix B: FAQ and Special TopicsOffers guidance to resolve technical issues, including general hints and tips to enhance your product experience, and a procedure for isolating problems within an AP-enabled wireless network. Also includes Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) and Xirrus contact information.zAppendix D: Notices (XR-1000 to XR-6000 Indoor Models)Contains the legal notices and compliance statements for the AP. Please read this section carefully. zAppendix C: Notices (XD and XR500/600 Series Only)Contains the legal notices and compliance statements for the XD and XR500 Series Access Points. Please read this section carefully if you are using these models. zAppendix E: Medical Usage NoticesProvides compliance information for Xirrus devices with respect to the requirements of IEC 60601-1-2. zAppendix F: Auditing PCI DSSDiscusses using AP features to assist in meeting security standards for PCI DSS audits. zAppendix G: Implementing FIPS SecurityDiscusses meeting FIPS security standards with Xirrus devices.

Wireless Access PointIntroduction 27zGlossary of TermsProvides an explanation of terms directly related to Xirrus product technology, organized alphabetically.zIndexThe index is a valuable information search tool. Use the index to locate specific topics discussed in this User’s Guide. Simply click on any page number in the index to jump to the referenced topic.Notes and CautionsThe following symbols are used throughout this User’s Guide: Screen ImagesSome screen images of the Web Management Interface have been modified for clarity. For example, an image may have been cropped to highlight a specific area of the screen, and/or sample data may be included in some fields.Product SpecificationsPlease refer to the Xirrus web site for the latest specifications for these APs—www.xirrus.com. #This symbol is used for general notes that provide useful supplemental information.!This symbol is used for cautions. Cautions provide critical information that may adversely affect the performance of the product.

Wireless Access PointInstalling the Wireless AP 29Installing the Wireless APThe instructions for planning and completing a successful installation include the following topics: z“Installation Prerequisites” on page 29.z“Planning Your Installation” on page 32.z“Installation Workflow” on page 67.z“Installing Your Wireless AP” on page 69.z“Powering Up the Wireless AP” on page 72.z“Zero-Touch Provisioning and Ongoing Management” on page 75.z“Performing the Express Setup Procedure” on page 80.Installation PrerequisitesWireless AP deployment requires the presence of hardware and services in the host wired/wireless network, including:zPower Source Xirrus APs are powered via Xirrus-supplied Power over Ethernet. POE supplies power over the same Cat 5e or Cat 6 cable used for data, thus reducing cabling and installation effort. POE power injector modules are available in 1-, 2-, and 8-port configurations and are typically placed near your Gigabit Ethernet switch. An AC outlet is required for each injector module. Some smaller APs are compatible with IEEE802.3af and/or IEEE802.3at, and may be connected to appropriate powered switches. For example, the Xirrus XT-5024 is a 24-port 802.3at PoE+ managed switch. See the Installation Guide for the AP for compatible injectors or powered switches. zEthernet ports You need at least one 100/1000 BaseT port to establish wired Gigabit Ethernet connectivity. XR Series APs have different numbers of ports,

Wireless Access Point30 Installing the Wireless APdepending on the model (see “XR Wireless AP Product Family” on page 5). zSecure Shell (SSH) utilityTo establish secure remote command line access to the AP, you need a Secure Shell (SSH) utility, such as PuTTY. The utility must be configured to use SSH-2, since the AP will only allow SSH-2 connections. zSecure Web browserXirrus supports the latest version of the following Browsers: Internet Explorer, Mozilla Firefox, Chrome, or Safari. A secure Web browser is required for Web-based management of the AP. The browser must be on the same subnet as the AP, or you must set a static route for management as described in the warning above. zSerial connection capabilityA serial port (console) is present on most XR-2000 models and all larger XR series models. The Xircon utility can be used in place of a console port—see the Xircon User’s Guide. To connect directly to the console port on the AP, your computer must be equipped with a male 9-pin serial port and terminal emulation software (for example, HyperTerminal). The Xirrus AP only supports serial cable lengths up to 25’ per the RS-232 specification. Use the following settings when establishing a serial connection:!The AP’s Ethernet ports should be connected to an Ethernet switch, not an Ethernet hub — if a hub is used, we recommend that you do not bond-pair Ethernet ports.Bits per second 115,200Data bits 8Parity NoneStop bits 1Flow control None

Wireless Access PointInstalling the Wireless AP 31Optional Network ComponentsThe following network components are optional.zXirrus Management System (XMS)The optional XMS offers powerful management features for small or large Wireless AP deployments.Client RequirementsThe Wireless AP should only be used with Wi-Fi certified client devices.See AlsoCoverage and Capacity PlanningFailover PlanningPlanning Your Installation

Wireless Access Point32 Installing the Wireless APPlanning Your InstallationThis section provides guidelines and examples to help you plan your Xirrus Wireless AP deployment to achieve the best overall coverage and performance. We recommend you conduct a site survey to determine the best location and settings for each AP you install.z“General Deployment Considerations” on page 32z“Coverage and Capacity Planning” on page 34z“About IEEE 802.11ac” on page 42 z“Failover Planning” on page 52z“Power Planning” on page 55z“Security Planning” on page 56z“Port Requirements” on page 58z“Network Management Planning” on page 62z“WDS Planning” on page 63z“Common Deployment Options” on page 66General Deployment ConsiderationsThe Array’s unique multi-radio architecture generates 360 degrees of sectored high-gain 802.11a/b/g/n/ac coverage that provides extended range. (Note that XR-500/600 Series radios are omni-directional rather than sectored.) The number, thickness and location of walls, ceilings or other objects that the wireless signals must pass through may affect the range. Typical ranges vary depending on the types of materials and background RF (radio frequency) noise at your location. To maximize wireless range, follow these basic guidelines:1. Keep the number of walls and ceilings between the AP and your receiving devices to a minimum — each wall or ceiling can reduce the wireless range from between 3 and 90 feet (1 to 30 meters). Position your devices so that the number of walls or ceilings is minimized.#For optimal placement of APs, we recommend that a site survey be performed by a qualified Xirrus partner.

$Wireless Access PointInstalling the Wireless AP 332. Be aware of the direct line between each device. For example, a wall that is 1.5 feet thick (half a meter) at 90° is actually almost 3 feet thick (or 1 meter) when viewed at a 45° angle. At an acute 2° degree angle the same wall is over 42 feet (or 14 meters) thick. For best reception, try to ensure that your wireless devices are positioned so that signals will travel straight through a wall or ceiling.Figure 8. Wall Thickness Considerations3. Try to position wireless client devices so that the signal passes through drywall (between studs) or open doorways and not other materials that can adversely affect the wireless signal.See AlsoCoverage and Capacity PlanningCommon Deployment OptionsInstallation Prerequisites90° 45°1.5 feet/.5 m ~ 3 feet/1 m> 42 feet\14 m2°$

Wireless Access Point34 Installing the Wireless APCoverage and Capacity PlanningThis section considers coverage and capacity for your deployment(s), including placement options, RF patterns and cell sizes, area calculations, roaming considerations, and channel allocations. PlacementUse the following guidelines when considering placement options:1. The best placement option for the AP is ceiling-mounted within an open plan environment (cubicles rather than fixed walls).2. Keep the AP away from electrical devices or appliances that generate RF noise. Because the AP is generally mounted on ceilings, be aware of its position relative to lighting (especially fluorescent lighting) — we recommend maintaining a distance of at least 3 to 6 feet (1 to 2 meters).Figure 9. Unit Placement3. If using multiple APs in the same area, maintain a distance of at least 100ft/30m between APs if there is direct line-of-sight between units, or at least 50ft/15m if a wall or other barrier exists between units.#XR-500/600 Series Integrated Access Points are omni-directional rather than directional (sectored), and discussions involving sectored radios are not applicable to these APs. 100 ft/ 30 m100 ft/ 30 m100 ft/30 m

Wireless Access PointInstalling the Wireless AP 35RF PatternsThe Wireless AP allows you to control — automatically or manually — the pattern of wireless coverage that best suits your deployment needs. You can choose to operate with full coverage, half coverage, or custom coverage (by enabling or disabling individual sectors).Full (Normal) CoverageIn normal operation, the AP provides a full 360 degrees of coverage.Figure 10. Full (Normal) CoverageHalf CoverageFigure 11. Adjusting RF PatternsIf installing a unit close to an exterior wall, you can deactivate half of the radios to prevent redundant signals from “bleeding” beyond the wall and extending service into public areas. The same principle applies if you want to restrict service to an adjacent room within the site.outside wall

Wireless Access Point36 Installing the Wireless APCustom CoverageWhere there are highly reflective objects in proximity to the AP, you can turn off specific radios to avoid interference and feedback.Figure 12. Custom CoverageCapacity and Cell SizesCell sizes should be estimated based on the number of users, the applications being used (for example, data/video/voice), and the number of APs available at the location. The capacity of a cell is defined as the minimum data rate desired for each sector multiplied by the total number of sectors being used.Figure 13. Connection Rate vs. Distance Figure 13 shows relative connection rates for 802.11n vs. 802.11a/g and 802.11b, and the effect of distance on the connection rates. 802.11ac rates behave like 802.11n over distance—see Figure 23 for 802.11ac data rates). Wireless environments can vary greatly so the actual rates may be different depending on the specific network deployment. objectreflective

Wireless Access PointInstalling the Wireless AP 37Fine Tuning Cell SizesAdjusting the transmit power allows you to fine tune cell sizes. There are four standard sizes — Small, Medium, Large, or Max (the default is Max). There is also an Auto setting that automatically determines the best cell size, and a Manual setting that allows you to choose your power settings directly. Figure 14. Transmit PowerAuto Cell Size is an automatic, self-tuning mechanism that balances cell size between APs to guarantee coverage while limiting the RF energy that could extend beyond the organizational boundary. Auto Cell uses communication between APs to dynamically set radio power so that complete coverage is provided to all areas, yet at the minimum power level required. This helps to minimize potential interference with neighboring networks. Additionally, APs running Auto Cell automatically detect and compensate for coverage gaps caused by system interruptions. To enable the Auto Cell Size feature, go to “RF Power and Sensitivity” on page 361. There are two ways of performing Auto Cell Size—by band (Multichannel Auto Cell) or by channel (this is the default version). Auto Cell by channel adjusts the size of two or more neighboring AP radios that are on the same channel (Figure 15 A and B). Multichannel Auto Cell adjusts cell sizes of neighboring radios on the same band (2.4GHz or 5GHz) even if they are on different channels. A potential application of Autocell by Band is depicted in Figure 15 B and C. In this example, LargeMediumSmall

Wireless Access Point38 Installing the Wireless APcell sizes are to be adjusted so that they are contained in each room. The goal is for stations to associate to the AP located in the same room with them. Figure 15. Auto Cell Size OptionsMultichannel Auto Cell is configured by turning off Auto Cell by Channel in “Procedure for Configuring Global 802.11an IAP Settings” on page 335 for the 5GHz band, and in “Procedure for Configuring Global 802.11b/g IAP Settings” on page 342 for the 2.4GHz band. Note that Multichannel Auto Cell is run separately for each band. Thus, to optimize cell size of both 2.4G and 5G, the Auto Cell function should be run once for each of these pages. APs must be at least 15 feet apart for Auto Cell to work properly.If you are installing many units in proximity to each other, we recommend that you use Auto Cell Size; otherwise, reduce the transmit power using manual settings to avoid excessive interference with other APs or installed APs. See also, “Coverage and Capacity Planning” on page 34.Sharp CellThis patented Xirrus RF management option automatically creates more intelligently defined cells and improves performance by creating smaller, high-throughput cells. By dynamically limiting each cell to a defined boundary (cell size), the trailing edge bleed of RF energy is reduced, thus minimizing interference between neighboring Wireless APs or other Access Points. To enable the Sharp Cell feature, go to “RF Power and Sensitivity” on page 361. ABC

Wireless Access PointInstalling the Wireless AP 39Roaming ConsiderationsCells should overlap approximately 10 - 15% to accommodate client roaming.Figure 16. Overlapping CellsAllocating ChannelsBecause the Wireless AP is a multi-channel device, allocating the best channels to radios is important if peak performance is to be maintained.Automatic Channel SelectionIn the automatic mode, channels are allocated dynamically, driven by changes in the environment. Auto Channel assignment is performed by scanning the surrounding area for RF activity on all channels, then automatically selecting and setting channels on the AP to the best channels available. This function is typically executed when initially installing APs in a new location and may optionally be configured to execute periodically to account for changes in the RF environment over time. Auto Channel selection has significant advantages, including: #Note that Auto Channel normally assigns individual channels. However, if you select Auto bond 5GHz channels on the Global Settings .11n page, and have 40MHz channels set up prior to running Auto Channel, those bonds will be preserved. 80MHz bonds will not be preserved.ROAMING10 - 15% overlap

Wireless Access Point40 Installing the Wireless APzAllows the AP to come up for the first time and not interfere with existing equipment that may be already running, thereby limiting co-channel interference.zMore accurately tunes the RF characteristics of a wireless installation than manual configuration since the radios themselves are scanning the environment from their physical location. zMay be configured to run periodically. To set up the automatic channel selection feature, go to “Advanced RF Settings” on page 358. Manual Channel SelectionYou can manually assign channels on a per radio basis, though manual selection is not recommended (and not necessary).Figure 17. Allocating Channels Manually#To avoid co-channel interference, do not select adjacent channels for radios that are physically next to each other.Maintain channel separation

Wireless Access PointInstalling the Wireless AP 41Other Factors Affecting ThroughputThroughput of the AP can be affected by many factors such as distance, number of stations, obstacles, construction materials used at the site, etc. In addition, features applied to traffic may have an effect. Performance may decrease as you add increasing numbers of SSIDs, VLANs, and features such as Application Control, encryption, management via XMS-Cloud, etc. XR-500/1000 Series models are more prone to performance degradation since they have less memory than other models. See AlsoFailover PlanningInstallation Prerequisites

Wireless Access Point42 Installing the Wireless APAbout IEEE 802.11ac 802.11ac is a continuation of the IEEE 802.11 standard. It multiplies the maximum data rate—eventually, up to ten times the 802.11n maximum. Along with increased data rates, it offers simultaneous transmission to multiple clients. 802.11ac will be rolled out in two phases. Wave 1 products currently available support 80MHz channels and up to 3 data streams for a maximum data rate of 1.3 Gbps. Wave 2 and future products will add 160MHz channels and up to 8 streams, for a maximum data rate of 6.93Gbps. Xirrus currently supports up to three streams (in units with 3x3 radios) and 80 MHz channels. Xirrus models that offer 802.11ac support this technology on all IAPs, not just on one. IAPs are individually configurable to different modes or groups of modes (such as 802.11a, 11b, 11g, and 11n). Xirrus optimizes 802.11ac performance with ACExpress™, an innovation that intelligently separates fast and slow devices on separate IAPs to maximize system performance. The major advantages of 802.11ac are: zFaster speeds than 802.11n over the same coverage area, operating at up to 1.3 Gbps in Wave 1 implementations. While the maximum distance that a Wi-Fi signal can reach is unchanged with 802.11ac, multiple antennas increase the data rate at every distance. zOperates only in the less congested 5 GHz spectrum, which offers “cleaner” air and supports much greater capacity than the 2.4 GHz spectrum still used by 802.11n.zSupports simultaneous communications to multiple clients on a single channel with multi-user MIMO in future Wave 2 products. zExtends the techniques pioneered in 802.11n: more antennas, more spatial streams and wider channels to improve throughput.The techniques that 802.11ac uses to realize these performance improvements and the expected results are discussed in: z“Up to Eight Simultaneous Data Streams — Spatial Multiplexing” on page 44z“MIMO (Multiple-In Multiple-Out)” on page 44

Wireless Access PointInstalling the Wireless AP 43z“MU-MIMO (Multi-User Multiple-In Multiple-Out)” on page 45z“Higher Precision in the Physical Layer” on page 47z“80 MHz and 160 MHz Channel Widths (Bonding)” on page 48z“802.11ac Data Rates” on page 49 z“ACExpress™” on page 50It is important to consider 80 MHz and 160 MHz Channel Widths (Bonding) when planning your deployment, since it contributes greatly to 802.11ac’s speed improvements and because it is configured separately for each IAP. Your selection of channel width in IAP Settings—40 MHz or 80 MHz or 20 MHz (if bonding is turned off)—has a major effect on your channel planning. A global setting is provided to enable or disable 802.11ac mode. See “Global Settings .11ac” on page 350 to configure operation. There are other factors to keep in mind when planning a roll-out of 802.11ac. Please see “802.11ac Deployment Considerations” on page 50.

Wireless Access Point44 Installing the Wireless APUp to Eight Simultaneous Data Streams — Spatial MultiplexingSpatial Multiplexing transmits completely separate data streams on different antennas (in the same channel) that are recombined to produce new 802.11ac data rates. Previously used for 802.11n, the maximum number of streams for 802.11ac has been increased to eight. Higher data rates are achieved by splitting the original data stream into separate data streams. Each separate stream is transmitted on a different antenna (using its own RF chain). MIMO signal processing at the receiver can detect and recover each stream. Streams are then recombined, yielding higher data rates. Figure 18. Spatial MultiplexingThe date rate increases directly with the number of transmit antennas used. Note that mobile devices in the near future will support up to three or four streams at most, with many supporting less.MIMO (Multiple-In Multiple-Out) MIMO (Multiple-In Multiple-Out) signal processing is one of the core technologies of 802.11n and 802.11ac. It mitigates interference and maintains broadband performance even with weak signals. Prior to 802.11n, a data stream was transmitted via one antenna. At the receiving end, the antenna with the best signal was selected to receive data. MIMO signal processing uses multiple antennas to send and receive data. It takes advantage of multipath reflections to improve signal coherence and greatly increase receiver sensitivity (Figure 19). Multipath signals were considered to be interference by MRx 1Rx 2Rx MMTransmitterData Stream Data StreamReceiverTx 1Tx 2Tx N

Wireless Access PointInstalling the Wireless AP 45802.11a/b/g radios, and degraded performance. In 802.11n and 802.11ac, these signals are used to enhance performance. Figure 19. MIMO Signal Processing802.11ac increases the number of antennas and spatial streams from a maximum of four in 802.11n to a maximum of eight, contributing to much higher maximum data rates (up to 6.93Gbit/s). The spatial streams can be concurrently allocated to more than one receiving device when the AP operates in multi-user MIMO mode (MU-MIMO, see the next section).MU-MIMO (Multi-User Multiple-In Multiple-Out) MU-MIMO (multi-user multiple-in/multiple-out) signal processing uses multiple antennas on the transmitter and receiver operating on the same channel. With spatial multiplexing in 802.11ac, up to 8 data streams may be concurrently transmitted. MU-MIMO’s innovation allows the streams to be split between multiple devices at once. With 802.11n, whenever the IAP transmitted data, all of the traffic at any instant of time was directed to a single client. As a consequence, if a set of devices included a mix of fast and slow client clients, the fast traffic was often substantially delayed by the transmission to slower clients. 802.11ac MU-MIMO works by directing some of the spatial streams to one client and other spatial streams to other clients, up to four at a timeFor example, in the figure below, the transmitter has four antennas. Three are transmitting to an 802.11ac laptop that has three antennas, while the remaining Frequency Across SubcarriersAttenuationAntenna 1 SignalMIMO Processed SignalAntenna 2 SignalAntenna 3 SignalReceiver

Wireless Access Point46 Installing the Wireless APone is directed to a mobile phone. When a transmission is complete, the antennasare reallocated. Figure 20. MU-MIMO with Four AntennasThe table below illustrates how data streams might be allocated to multiple users on an 802.11ac transmitter with multiple antennas.# of AP Antennas Possible Combinations of Receiver Antennas2 1 station w/ 2 antennas -or- 2 stations w/ 1 antenna3 1 station w/ 3 antennas -or-1 station w/ 2 antennas + 1 station w/ 1 antenna -or-3 stations w/ 1 antenna4 1 station w/4 antennas -or- 2 stations w/2 antennas -or-1 station w/2 antennas + 2 stations w/1 antenna -or- 4 stations w/ 1 antenna8 1 station w/ 8 antennas -or- 2 stations w/ 4 antennas -or-1 station w/ 4 antennas + 2 stations w/ 2 antennas -or- 2 stations w/ 2 antennas + 4 stations w/1 antenna -or-… many other combinations …Spatial StreamsRx 1Rx 1Rx 3Data StreamData StreamData StreamTx 1Tx 3Rx 2Tx 2Tx 4Transmitter(AccessPoint)

Wireless Access PointInstalling the Wireless AP 47Higher Precision in the Physical LayerWi-Fi utilizes several digital modulation techniques and automatically switches between them to optimize for throughput or range. The basic unit of data transmitted is called a symbol. The number of points in the modulation constellation determines the number of bits of data conveyed with each symbol. Figure 21. Physical Layer Data Encoding802.11n uses 16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM), which conveys log2(16) = 4 bits per symbol and 64 QAM, which conveys 6 bits per symbol. 802.11ac adds 256 QAM which conveys 8 bits per symbol for a 33% increase in throughput vs. the highest 802.11n data rate.You may select the highest Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS) level allowed with 1, 2, or 3 Spatial Streams (see the Max MCS setting in “Procedure for Configuring Global 802.11ac IAP Settings” on page 351). You may limit the highest level of modulation to 64-QAM, or allow 256-QAM. It also determines the coding scheme used for error correction. Higher MCS levels allocate fewer bits to error correction, and thus more bits are used for data. The default value is MCS9, the highest level. 256-QAMIQ64-QAMQ+1-1 +1 +3 +5 +7-3-5-7+3+5+7I-7-5-3-1IQPhase˚Amplitude

Wireless Access Point48 Installing the Wireless APThe higher the MCS value, the higher the data rate, as shown in the table below. Xirrus APs support MCS7 -MCS9. Higher MCS levels require higher signal-to-noise ratios (i.e., a less noisy environment) and shorter transmission distances.80 MHz and 160 MHz Channel Widths (Bonding)Channel bonding increases data rates by combining two, four, or eight adjacent 20 MHz channels into one channel. This increases the data rate proportional to the width of the bond. Bonding is specified on the IAP Settings page for each IAP in terms of the primarychannel and the width of the bond. Be aware that Channel Bonding impacts channel planning, since you are using multiple channels per IAP. 802.11ac allows creation of 20, 40, 80, or 160 MHz wide channels. The 160MHz channel can also be a combination of two non-contiguous 80MHz channels (80+80). Although channel bonding increases bandwidth, wider channels are more susceptible to signal interference which may lead to reduced range and poorer signal quality. Figure 22 is an example showing how Channels 36-64 may MCS index value Modulation Code rate (R)0BPSK1/21QPSK1/22QPSK3/43 16-QAM 1/24 16-QAM 3/45 64-QAM 2/36 64-QAM 3/47 64-QAM 5/68 256-QAM 3/49 256-QAM 5/6

Wireless Access PointInstalling the Wireless AP 49be used: as eight 20 MHz channels; four 40 MHz channels; two 80 MHz channels; or one 160 MHz channel. Xirrus currently supports channels up to 80 MHz wide. Figure 22. Channel Bonding (Channels 36-64 shown)802.11ac Data Rates Figure 23. Maximum 802.11ac Data Rates FrequencyChannelNumber 365150MHzChannel Bandwidth5250MHz5350MHz40 44 48 52 6056 6420MHz40MHz80MHz160MHz2-20MHzbonded channels2-40MHzbonded channels2-80MHzbonded channelsUNII-1 UNII-2Phase 1Phase 2+Maximum # Transmit Bandwidth # Data Rate Antennas (MHz) Streams Modulation293Mbps 1 40 1 64QAM433Mbps 1 80 1 256QAM867Mbps 2 80 2 256QAM1.299Gbps 3 80 3 256QAM1.730Gbps 4 80 4 256QAM3.470Gbps 8 80 8 256QAM867Mbps 1 160 1 256QAM1.730Gbps 2 160 2 256QAM3.470Gbps 8 160 4 256QAM6.930Gbps 8 160 8 256QAM

Wireless Access Point50 Installing the Wireless APIEEE 802.11ac data rates are dependent on the number of spatial streams obtained through the use of MU-MIMO, 80 vs. 160MHz channel widths, the number of transmit antennas, and the type of modulation. Figure 23 shows the maximum data rate achievable at each level, with many additional lower rates occurring at each level dependent on signal level, signal to noise ratio in the environment, etc.Phase 1 802.11ac, first available in consumer products in 2012 and enterprise products in 2013, supports up to 80MHz channels and up to 3 spatial streams for a maximum data rate of 1.3Gbps.Phase 2 and beyond products, expected starting in 2014, will add 160MHz channels and up to 8 spatial streams for a maximum data rate of 6.9Gbps.ACExpress™Xirrus 802.11ac IAPs use ACExpress™ to optimize wireless performance by automatically separating faster 802.11ac clients from slower Wi-Fi clients. Since Wi-Fi is a shared medium, this separation ensures that slower 802.11a/b/g/n clients do not starve the performance of 802.11ac clients. For example, the data rate of an 802.11n client is less than 25% of the rate of an 802.11ac client, and thus will take four times as much air time for a given amount of data. This takes available bandwidth away from faster clients, reducing their performance significantly. ACExpress intelligently separates clients by type onto different radios, grouping fast clients separately from slow clients, thereby maximizing performance for all. ACExpress is supported on all Xirrus 802.11ac products, and may be enabled or disabled as part of the Load Balancing feature. See Step 26 on page 331.802.11ac Deployment ConsiderationsThe theoretical data rates shown are just that, theoretical. For 802.11ac deployments, numerous factors affect real-world performance. These are some important considerations in the deployment of networks that include 802.11ac:zWireless networks are not wired networks. Wired network users who share a Gigabit network can expect to see bursts of up to 900Mbps, depending on their hardware. Maximum Wi-Fi data rates are reduced by signaling overhead and media contention. Most 802.11ac users will see

Wireless Access PointInstalling the Wireless AP 51data rates less than 100Mbps as the effective bandwidth is shared among all devices connecting to a given radio.zMigration to 802.11ac will take time. Older Wi-Fi technologies will continue to be with us for years. In order for 802.11ac to provide maximum data rates, it is important to keep interference from earlier Wi-Fi standards at a minimum. For example, 802.11n devices operating in the 5GHz band can slow down 802.11ac devices to 300Mbps or 450Mbps depending on the 2x2 or 3x3 MIMO technology used.zInfrastructures must be upgraded as well. The bandwidth required out of 802.11ac APs will certainly exceed 1Gbps and may reach 10Gbps. The links from the APs to the core network must keep pace with this need. Centralized firewalls, LAN controllers, and authentication servers may also reach their limits. Migration to a decentralized architecture, with intelligence at the edge of the network may be a more scalable solution, avoiding single points of failure.zMore power. Multi-antenna APs handling 802.11ac speeds will likely require more power. Power planning for your access switches should be carefully considered. zA new site survey may be needed. Wireless networks established as recently as a few years ago were probably designed for coverage and not capacity. APs were placed so that there were no dead zones, without considering future capacity needs. With the increasing use of mobile devices, new site surveys that ensure enough bandwidth for anticipated usage should precede deployment of 802.11ac APs. zManage application usage. With 802.11ac, a range of applications are now practical on mobile devices that were previously only used over wired networks or on laptops. Uncontrolled use of Wi-Fi bandwidth can cause wireless networks to quickly degrade. Network control elements must control use of applications and prioritize critical applications.zUpgrading with 802.11ac radio modules. Xirrus offers modular APs that enable you to evolve the capacity of your Arrays as your needs grow. XI Series 802.11ac Wireless Access Points (APs) are offered in two models: 867 Mbps (2X2 MIMO) or 1300 Mbps (3X3 MIMO).

Wireless Access Point52 Installing the Wireless APWhen you add IAPs to an AP or replace 802.11n IAPs with 802.11ac modules, the Access Point determines its model number based on the count and types of radios. For example, if you add four 1300 Mbps (3X3 MIMO) IAPs to an XR-4420, the AP will display its model number as XR-4836 because it now has eight 3x3 IAPs including 802.11ac radios. Failover PlanningThis section discusses failover protection at the unit and port levels. To ensure that service is continued in the event of a port failure, you can utilize two Gigabit Ethernet ports simultaneously as a bonded pair (on APs with two or more Gigabit ports).Figure 24. Port Failover Protection # Xirrus highly recommends that the upgraded Array have a radio count that matches one of our standard Arrays (e.g., XR-4000 with 4 or 8 radios, XR-2000 with 2 or 4). The Array may have more of one type of radio than another. For example, an upgraded XR-4830 may have six 802.11n radios and two 802.11ac radios, or vice versa. Ethernet switchMultiple port connections

Wireless Access PointInstalling the Wireless AP 53In addition, the AP has full failover protection between the bonded-pair Gigabit ports (see following table).The Wireless AP Gigabit Ethernet ports actually support a number of modes:z802.3ad Link AggregationzLoad BalancingzBroadcastzLink BackupzMirroredFor more details on Gigabit port modes and their configuration, please see “Bonds and Bridging” on page 173. Interface Bridges Data?Bridges Management Traffic?Fails Over To: IP addressGigabit port Yes Yes Bonded port DHCP or staticBonded Gigabit port Yes Yes Bonded port Same

Wireless Access Point54 Installing the Wireless APSwitch Failover ProtectionTo ensure that service is continued in the event of a switch failure, you can connect APs having multiple Gigabit ports to more than one Ethernet switch (not a hub).Figure 25. Switch Failover Protection See AlsoCoverage and Capacity PlanningInstallation PrerequisitesNetwork Management PlanningPlanning Your InstallationPower PlanningSecurity Planning#Gigabit Ethernet connections must be on the same subnet.Ethernet switch Backup switchEthernet connections

Wireless Access PointInstalling the Wireless AP 55Power Planning All AP models support Power over Ethernet (POE) with an integrated splitter. Power over EthernetTo deliver power to the AP, you must use Xirrus-supplied Power over Ethernet (POE) modules or powered switches that are compatible with your AP. They provide power over Cat 5e or Cat 6 cables to the AP without running power cables — see Figure 4 on page 16. Specific models of the AP are compatible with specific PoGE modules. For details, please see the Power over Gigabit Ethernet Installation and User Guide. See AlsoCoverage and Capacity PlanningFailover PlanningNetwork Management PlanningSecurity Planning#When using Cat 5e or Cat 6 cable, power can be provided up to a distance of 100m.Certain models (XR-500/600 Series and some XR-2000 models) also accept IEEE802.3af and/or IEEE802.3at powered switch ports.

Wireless Access Point56 Installing the Wireless AP Security PlanningThis section offers some useful guidelines for defining your preferred encryption and authentication method. For additional information, see “Understanding Security” on page 226 and the Security section of “Frequently Asked Questions” on page 522. Wireless EncryptionEncryption ensures that no user can decipher another user’s data transmitted over the airwaves. There are three encryption options available to you, including:zWEP-40bit or WEP-128bitBecause WEP is vulnerable to cracks, we recommend that you only use this for legacy devices that cannot support a stronger encryption type.zWi-Fi Protected Access (WPA)This is much more secure than WEP and uses TKIP for encryption.zWi-Fi Protected Access (WPA2) with AES This is government-grade encryption — available on most new client adapters — and uses the AES–CCM encryption mode (Advanced Encryption Standard–Counter Mode).AuthenticationAuthentication ensures users are who they say they are. Users are authenticated when they attempt to connect to the wireless network and periodically thereafter. The following authentication methods are available with the Wireless AP:zRADIUS 802.1x 802.1x uses a remote RADIUS server to authenticate large numbers of clients, and can handle different authentication methods (EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-PEAP, and EAP-LEAP Passthrough). Administrators may also be authenticated via RADIUS when preferred, or to meet particular security standards. zXirrus Internal RADIUS serverRecommended for smaller numbers of users (about 100 or less). Supports EAP-PEAP only

Wireless Access PointInstalling the Wireless AP 57zPre-Shared KeyUses a pass-phrase or key that is manually distributed to all authorized users. The same passphrase is given to client devices and entered into each AP.zMAC Access Control Lists (ACLs)MAC access control lists provide a list of client adapter MAC addresses that are allowed or denied access to the wireless network, and can be used in addition to any of the above authentication methods. ACLs are good for embedded devices, like printers and bar-code scanners (though MAC addresses can be spoofed). The AP supports 1,000 global ACL entries. You may also define per-SSID access control lists, with up to 1000 entries each.Meeting PCI DSS StandardsThe Payment Card Industry (PCI) Data Security Standard (DSS) was developed by major credit card companies. It lays out a set of requirements that must be met in order to provide adequate security for sensitive data. The AP may be configured to assist in satisfying PCI DSS standards. For details, please see “Auditing PCI DSS” on page 585. Note that the license installed on the AP must include the Advanced RF Security Manager (RSM) to support the PCI audit command.Meeting FIPS StandardsThe Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) Publication 140-2 establishes a computer security standard used to accredit cryptographic modules. The standard is a joint effort by the U.S. and Canadian governments. To implement Level 2 security requirements of FIPS Level 2 on the Wi-Fi AP, see “Implementing FIPS Security” on page 591. See AlsoFailover PlanningNetwork Management PlanningPower Planning

Wireless Access Point58 Installing the Wireless APPort Requirements A number of ports are used by various AP features and by the Xirrus Management System (XMS). The Port Requirements table on page 59 lists ports and the features that require them (XMS port requirements are included in the table for your convenience). If you are using a feature, please make sure that the ports that it requires are not blocked by firewalls or other policies, and that they do not conflict with any other port assignments.As an example, XMS port requirements are illustrated in Figure 26. XMS requires ports 161, 162, and 443 to be passed between APs and the XMS server. Similarly, port 9443 is required for communication between the XMS server and XMS clients, and port 25 is typically used by the XMS server to access an SMTP server to send email notifications. Figure 26. Port Requirements for XMSFirewallXMS Server XMS Client*L2 Switching InfrastructureSMTP Server*Internal ResourcesExternal Network /InternetPorts:9090, 9091Ports:161, 162, 443SSID Trafﬁc onVLANs A, B, etc.Management overNative VLANTrafﬁc from ArraysVLAN BTrafﬁc from ArraysVLAN ATrunked 802.1qVLAN ConnectionPorts:25* XMS Client and SMTP Server may be internal or external resources.

Wireless Access PointInstalling the Wireless AP 59The following table lists port requirements for the AP and for XMS, how the ports are used, and whether they may be changed.Port Application Peer ConfigurableAPicmp Ping XMS Server No20 tcp21 tcp FTP Client Yes22 tcp SSH Client Yes23 tcp Telnet Client Yes25 tcp SMTP Mail Server No69 udp TFTP TFTP Server No123 udp NTP NTP Server No161 udp SNMP XMS Server No162 udp SNMP Traphost Note - Up to four Traphosts may be configured.XMS ServerYes - but required by XMS443 tcp HTTPS (WMI,WPR) Client Yes514 udp Syslog Syslog Server No1812, 1645 udpRADIUS (some servers use 1645) RADIUS Server Yes1813, 1646 udpRADIUS Accounting(some servers still use 1646)RADIUS Accounting Server Yes2055 udp Netflow Client Yes5000 tcp Virtual Tunnel VTUN Server Yes22610 udp Xirrus Roaming APs Yes22612 udp Xircon (Console Utility) Admin Workstation Yes

Wireless Access Point60 Installing the Wireless APXMSicmp Ping APs No22 tcp SSH APs Yes25 tcp SMTP Mail Server Yes123 udp NTP NTP Server No161 udp SNMP APs No162 udp SNMP Traphost 1 APs Via XMS config file443 tcp HTTPS APs No514 udp Resident Syslog server Internal* Via XMS config file1099 tcp RMI Registry Internal* No2000 tcp XMS Back-end Server Internal* No3306 tcp MySQL Database Internal* No8001 tcp Status Viewer Internal* No8007 tcp Tomcat Shutdown Internal* During installation8009 tcp Web Container Internal* During installation9090 tcp XMS Webserver XMS client During installation9091 tcp XMS Client Server XMS client Via XMS config file9092 tcp XMS Client Server XMS client Via XMS config file9443 tcp XMS WMI SSL XMS web client Yes* Internal to XMS Server, no ports need to be unblocked on other network devices Port Application Peer Configurable

Wireless Access PointInstalling the Wireless AP 61See AlsoManagement ControlExternal RadiusServicesVLAN Management

Wireless Access Point62 Installing the Wireless APNetwork Management PlanningNetwork management can be performed using any of the following methods:zCentralized Web-based management, using the optional Xirrus Management System (XMS). XMS-Cloud provides zero-touch provisioning and ongoing management. XMS is hosted on a dedicated Xirrus appliance or your own server. XMS manages large Wireless AP deployments from a centralized Web-based interface and offers the following features: Globally manage large numbers of APs Seamless view of the entire wireless network Easily configure large numbers of APs  Rogue AP monitoring Easily manage system-wide firmware updates  Monitor performance and trendsAggregation of alerts and alarmszThe AP’s Command Line Interface, using an SSH (Secure Shell) utility, like PuTTY. The utility must be set up to use SSH-2, since the AP will only allow SSH-2 connections. zWeb-based management, using the AP’s embedded Web Management Interface (WMI). This method provides configuration and basic monitoring tools, and is good for small deployments (one or two units).See AlsoFailover PlanningPower PlanningSecurity Planning

Wireless Access PointInstalling the Wireless AP 63WDS PlanningWDS (Wireless Distribution System) creates wireless backhaul connections between APs, allowing your wireless network to be expanded using multiple APs without the need for a wired backbone to link them (see Figure 27). WDS features include:zOne to three IAPs may be used to form a single WDS link, yielding up to 1350 Mbps bandwidth per link. Up to three different WDS links may be created on a single AP. zAutomatic IAP load balancing zIf desired, you may allow clients to associate to a BSS on the same radio interface used for a WDS Host Link. This will take bandwidth from the WDS link. Figure 27. WDS LinkzMultiple links per AP allow you to configure multi-hop connections.

Wireless Access Point64 Installing the Wireless APFigure 28. A Multiple Hop WDS ConnectionzMultiple WDS links can provide link redundancy (failover capability - see Figure 29). A network protocol (Spanning Tree Protocol — STP) prevents APs from forming network loops. Figure 29. WDS Failover Protection

Wireless Access PointInstalling the Wireless AP 65WDS links have a Host/Client relationship similar to the usual IAP/station pattern for APs:zA WDS Client Link associates/authenticates to a host (target) AP in the same way that stations associate to IAPs. The client side of the link must be configured with the root MAC address of the target (host) AP.zA WDS Host Link acts like an IAP by allowing one WDS Client Link to associate to it. An AP may have both client and host links.WDS configuration is performed only on the client-side AP. See “WDS” on page 385. Note that both APs must be configured with the same SSID name.

Wireless Access Point66 Installing the Wireless APCommon Deployment OptionsThe following table lists some typical and recommended deployment options for a number of the features that have been discussed in this chapter. See AlsoCoverage and Capacity PlanningNetwork Management PlanningPlanning Your InstallationPower PlanningSecurity PlanningFunction Number of Wireless APsOne or Two Three or MorePower Power over Ethernet Power over EthernetUPS backup(recommended)Failover Recommended Highly recommendedVLANs Optional Optional use,Can be used to put all APs on one VLAN or map to existing VLAN schemeEncryption WPA2 with AES (recommended)PSK or 802.1x WPA2 with AES (recommended)802.1x keyingAuthentication Internal RADIUS serverEAP-PEAPPre-Shared KeyExternal RADIUS serverManagement Cloud XMS or Internal WMIInternal CLI (via SSHv2)Cloud XMS orXMS (Enterprise-hosted)

Wireless Access PointInstalling the Wireless AP 67Installation WorkflowThis workflow illustrates the steps that are required to install and configure the AP successfully. Review this flowchart before attempting to install the unit on a customer’s network. Cloud XMS customers will skip the last two steps.Figure 30. Installation WorkflowSee AlsoCoverage and Capacity PlanningCommon Deployment OptionsDetermine the number of Arrays neededChoose the location(s) for your Wireless ArraysInstall the mounting plateConnect the cables and turn on the powerVerify that the Ethernet link and radio LEDs are functioning correctlyReview the Array ConfigurationRun Ethernet cables for PoE(<100m total distance from switch)Log in to WMI

Wireless Access Point68 Installing the Wireless APFailover PlanningInstallation PrerequisitesPlanning Your InstallationPower PlanningWireless Access Point Product OverviewSecurity Planning

Wireless Access PointInstalling the Wireless AP 69Installing Your Wireless APThis section provides information about the physical installation of your Xirrus Wireless AP. For complete instructions, please see the Installation Guide for your model of AP or Access Point. Choosing a LocationBased on coverage, capacity and deployment examples previously discussed, choose a location for the AP that will provide the best results for your needs. The Wireless AP was designed to be mounted on a ceiling where the unit is unobtrusive and wireless transmissions can travel unimpeded throughout open plan areas.Choose a location that is central to your users (see the following diagram for correct placement.Figure 31. AP PlacementWiring ConsiderationsBefore using the Xirrus-supplied POE to distribute power, see “Power over Ethernet (POE)” on page 16. WRONGCORRECTRORRERORRECWRONGGGOONRORONONRORON

Wireless Access Point70 Installing the Wireless APOnce you have determined the best location for your Wireless AP, you must run cables to the location for the following services:PowerNo separate power cable is required to the AP—Xirrus wireless APs use POE (Power over Ethernet). See the Installation Guide for your AP model for compatible power injectors or switches.The total of all Cat 5e or Cat 6 cable segments from the Gigabit Ethernet switch to the power injector and then to an AP POE port must be less than 100m long. The AP must be connected to POE networks without routing cabling to the outside plant, to ensure that cabling is not exposed to lightning strikes or possible high voltage crossover.NetworkAPs have at least one POE port to supply power and data over the same cable. Many models have additional Gigabit ports, or even additional POE ports. Please see the Installation Guide for your AP model for detailed information about running cables to the AP and connecting it. Some models also have a serial (console) port. The Serial cable may be up to 25 feet long per the RS-232 specification.#When the unit’s IP address is unknown or a network connection has not been established, the serial cable is used for connecting directly with the Command Line Interface (CLI) via HyperTerminal. When a network connection is established, the AP can be managed from any of the available network connections, either Gigabit 1 or Gigabit 2. For models with no console port, such as the XR-500, XR-1000, and some XR-2000 models, the Xircon utility may be used locally to set up an IP address if necessary.

Wireless Access PointInstalling the Wireless AP 71Important Note About Network ConnectionsSee AlsoFailover PlanningInstallation PrerequisitesInstallation WorkflowMounting and Connecting the APPower over Ethernet (POE)!The AP’s Ethernet ports should be plugged into an Ethernet switch, not an Ethernet hub — if a hub is used, we recommend that you connect only one Ethernet port.

Wireless Access Point72 Installing the Wireless APMounting and Connecting the AP A detailed Installation Guide is available at support.xirrus.com that describes mounting your AP. Please follow the provided instructions carefully. Data and power connections to the AP are also detailed in the Installation Guide. Please follow the cabling and connection instructions carefully. Dismounting the AP For all AP models, push up on the AP (i.e., push it against the mounting plate). Then turn the AP to the left to remove it. This is similar to dismounting a smoke detector. Powering Up the Wireless APWhen powering up, the AP follows a specific sequence of LED patterns showing the boot progress, and following a successful boot will provide extensive status information.Figure 32. LED LocationsAP LED settings may be altered or disabled entirely for diagnostic purposes or for personal preference. Changes are made via the AP’s Command Line Interface or the Web Management Interface — refer to “LED Settings” on page 380. Ethernet Activity, Status, and Radio LEDs

Wireless Access PointInstalling the Wireless AP 73AP LED Operating SequencesUse the following tables to review the operating sequences of the AP’s LEDs. z“LED Boot Sequence” on page 73z“LED Operation when AP is Running” on page 74LED Boot SequenceThe normal boot LED sequence is as follows:AP Activity Status LED IAP LEDsPower ON Blinking GREEN All OFFBoot loader power ON self-testBlinking GREEN All ONImage load from compact FLASHBlinking GREEN Spinning pattern (rotate all to ON, then all to OFF)Image load failure Blinking ORANGE All OFFHand off to ArrayOS Solid GREEN All OFFSystem software initializationSolid GREEN Walking pattern — (LED rotating one position per second)Up and running Solid GREEN ON for IAPs that are up:OFF for IAPs that are down.Green or orange per table on the next page.Behavior may be changed using “LED Settings” on page 380.

Wireless Access Point74 Installing the Wireless APLED Operation when AP is RunningThe normal LED operation when the AP is running is shown in the table below. Note that behavior may be modified using “LED Settings” on page 380 or via the CLI.LED Status ReasonIAP LED is OFF IAP is downIAP LED is solid ON IAP is up, but no associations and no trafficIAP LED heartbeat IAP is up, with stations associated but no trafficIAP LED flashingFlashing at 10 HzFlashing at 5 HzFlashing at 2.5 HzIAP is up, passing trafficTraffic > 1500 packets/secTraffic > 150 packets/secTraffic > 1 packet/sec IAP LED is GREEN IAP is operating in the 2.4 GHz bandIAP LED is ORANGE IAP is operating in the 5 GHz bandIAP LED flashing ORANGE to GREEN at 1 HzThe radio is in monitor mode(standard intrude detect)STATUS LED is GREEN *** AP is operational GIG (Ethernet) LEDs are dual colorEthernet LED is ORANGEEthernet LED is GREENTransferring data at 1 GbpsTransferring data at 10/100 Mbps *** NOTE: On an XR-2000 Series AP model ending in 5 or 6, there is a combined GIG2/STS LED. If the GIG2 port is not connected, the LED behaves as a Status LED. If the GIG2 port is connected, the LED behaves as a GIG2 LED.

Wireless Access PointInstalling the Wireless AP 77Figure 34. Network Interface Ports—XR-600 Series Figure 35. Network Interfaces—XR-2000 Series (left); XR-2005/2006 (right)Figure 36. Network Interface Ports—XR-4000 Series Figure 37. Network Interface Ports—XR-6000 SeriesGigabit2 (gig2)Gigabit1/PoE+ (gig1)Gigabit1 PoE /Gigabit1 PoE+Gigabit2CONSOLESerial (Console)Gigabit PoE (gig1)Gigabit 2 (gig2)Serial (Console)Gigabit PoE1 (gig1)Gigabit PoE2 (gig2)Gigabit 3 (gig3)Gigabit 4 (gig4)

Wireless Access Point78 Installing the Wireless APUsing the Serial PortIf using the serial port to make your connection, use serial settings of 8 bits, no parity, no flow control, 1 stop bit (8N1) and a speed setting of 115200 baud. Use the communication package of your choice. You may use the serial port to change settings on the AP, even if the AP’s Gigabit interfaces are in XMS managed mode (i.e., read-only mode, see “Managing APs Locally or Using XMS” on page 85). Using the Ethernet Ports to Access the APBy default, the AP's Ethernet interfaces use DHCP to obtain an IP address. If the AP is booted and does not receive DHCP addresses on Gigabit Ethernet ports, then both Gigabit1 and its bonded pair port (if any) will default to 10.0.2.1 with a mask of 255.255.255.0. If the AP is connected to a network that provides DHCP addresses, the IP address can be determined by the following methods:1. The simplest way to address the AP is using its default hostname which is the AP’s serial number, found on the AP label and shipping container (for example, XR40123091CACD). If your network provides DHCP and DNS, then you can use this hostname.2. Otherwise, examine the DHCP tables on the server and find the addresses assigned to the AP (Xirrus MAC addresses begin with 00:0F:7D or 50:60:28 and are found on the AP label and shipping container).3. Alternatively, you may query the AP using the CLI via the console port (on all models except the XR-500/600/1000, and some XR-2000 models). Log in using the default user name admin and password admin. Use the show ethernet command to view the IP addresses assigned to each port.#The Xircon utility may also be used to communicate with APs locally as an alternative to using a serial connection to the console. This is especially useful for the XR-500/600/1000 Series and some XR-2000 models, which do not have a console port. See “Securing Low Level Access to the AP” on page 81.

Wireless Access PointInstalling the Wireless AP 794. If the AP cannot obtain an IP address via DHCP, the factory default uses a static IP address of 10.0.2.1 with a mask of 255.255.255.0 on its Gigabit POE port. To connect to the AP, you must set your laptop to be in the same subnet as the AP: set your laptop’s IP address to be in the 10.0.2.xx subnet, and set its subnet mask to 255.255.255.0. If this subnet is already in use on your network, you may connect your laptop directly to the AP by connecting the laptop to the power injector’s IN port temporarily (this port may be called the SWITCH port or the DATA port on your injector). Starting the WMIUse this procedure to log in to the WMI on a Web browser. 1. Establish a network connection and open your Web browser.2. Connect to the Wireless AP using its host name or IP address as described in the previous section.http://<hostname or IPaddress>Logging InEnter the default user name and password — the default user name is admin, and the default password is admin.See AlsoInstallation WorkflowPerforming the Express Setup ProcedurePowering Up the Wireless AP#Take care to ensure that your network is not using the 10.0.2.1 IP address prior to connecting the AP to the network.

Wireless Access PointInstalling the Wireless AP 81Setup” on page 163. Also see “Zero-Touch Provisioning and Ongoing Management” on page 75. See AlsoZero-Touch Provisioning and Ongoing ManagementInstallation PrerequisitesInstallation WorkflowLogging InMultiple SSIDsSecuritySecuring Low Level Access to the APMost local management of the Xirrus AP is done via the WMI or CLI—see “The Command Line Interface” on page 435. The AP also has a lower level interface: XBL(Xirrus Boot Loader), which allows access to more primitive commands. You won’t normally use XBL unless instructed to do so by Xirrus Customer Support. For proper security, you should replace the default XBL login username and password with your own, as instructed below. XBL has its own username and password, separate from the ArrayOS Admin User and Password (used for logging in to the WMI and CLI) that you may change on the Express Setup page (see Step 5 on page 167). Xirrus also provides the Xircon utility for connecting to Xirrus APs that are not reachable via the normal access methods such as Secure Shell (SSH) or WMI and that do not have a physical console port, or whose console port is not accessible. Xircon discovers APs on your network subnet by sending IP/UDP broadcast packets. Once an AP is discovered, Xircon can establish an encrypted console session to the AP via the network even if the AP IP configuration is incorrect. Xircon allows you to manage the AP using CLI, just as you would if connected to the console port. Xircon also has an option for easily accessing XBL.In normal circumstances Xirrus APs should be configured and managed through SSH or via the WMI. A connection is established using either the AP hostname or DHCP-assigned IP address, or via the other options described in “Using the Ethernet Ports to Access the AP” on page 78. Xircon may be needed in special circumstances as directed by Xirrus Customer Support for troubleshooting AP

Wireless Access Point82 Installing the Wireless APproblems or IP connectivity. (In this case, see the Xircon User Guide for detailed information.) Xircon access to the AP:zYou may enable or disable all Xircon access to the AP as instructed in the procedure below. There are also options to allow access only to CLI (i.e., ArrayOS access) or only to XBL. zSince some models do not have a console port, these models have Xircon access to both XBL and CLI enabled by default. For APs that do not have a console port, to avoid potentially being locked out of the AP, Xircon should always be enabled at the XBL level at least.zOn all other AP models (those with a console port), Xircon access to both XBL and CLI is disabled by default. If Xircon is not going to be used to access an AP, we recommend leaving Xircon access disabled.Procedure for Securing Low Level AP AccessUse the following steps to replace the default XBL username and password, and optionally to change the type of Xircon management access that is allowed. These steps use CLI commands. 1. To access CLI via the WMI, click CLI under the Tools section on the left (for detailed instructions see “CLI” on page 426). Skip to Step 4 on page 83.To access CLI via SSH, see “Establishing a Secure Shell (SSH) Connection” on page 435. Then proceed to the next step. !If you disable Xircon access to both XBL and CLI on models with no console port, you must ensure that you do not lose track of the username and password to log in to CLI/WMI! In this situation, there is no way to recover from a lost password, other than returning the AP to Xirrus. If you have Xircon access to XBL enabled, you can reset the password, but this recovery will require setting the unit to factory defaults with loss of all configuration data.

Wireless Access PointInstalling the Wireless AP 832. At the login as prompt, log in to CLI using the username and password that you set in Step 5 on page 167, or the default value of admin/admin if you have not changed them. login as: jsmithjsmith@xr4012802207c's password:Xirrus Wi-Fi APArrayOS Version 6.1.2-3299Copyright (c) 2005-2012 Xirrus, Inc.http://www.xirrus.comAP42#3. Type configure to enter the CLI config mode.AP42#configure4. If Xircon access at the XBL level is to be allowed, use the following three commands to change the XBL username and password from the default values of admin/admin. In the example below, replace newusernameand newpassword with your desired entries. Note that these entries are case-sensitive. AP42#(config)#boot-envAP42#(config-boot)#set username newusernameAP42#(config-boot)#set password newpasswordAP42#(config-boot)#saveSaving boot environment .... OKAP42(config-boot)# exit5. Enter the following commands if you wish to change Xircon access permission: AP42#(config)# managementAP42#(config-mgmt)# xircon <management-status>AP42#(config-mgmt)# saveAP42#(config-mgmt)# exitAP42#(config)#<management-status> may be one of:zon—enables both CLI and XBL accesszoff—disables both CLI and XBL accesszaos-only—enables only CLI (i.e. ArrayOS) access

Wireless Access Point84 Installing the Wireless APzboot-only—enables only XBL accessNote that there is a WMI setting for changing Xircon access, timeout period, and the UDP port used. This may be used instead of CLI if you wish. See “Management Control” on page 238. Note that you cannot change the XBL username and password via the WMI.

Wireless Access PointThe Web Management Interface 85The Web Management InterfaceThis topic provides an overview of the Xirrus Wireless AP’s embedded Web Management Interface (WMI), used for establishing your network’s configuration settings and wireless operating parameters. It also includes login instructions. The following topics are discussed: zManaging APs Locally or Using XMS zAn Overview zStructure of the WMI zUser InterfacezLogging InzApplying Configuration ChangesManaging APs Locally or Using XMSFor Xirrus deployments of any size, we recommend that you use XMS to manage the network rather than directly managing each AP individually. You may change settings directly on the AP—but be aware that XMS may not sync up with these changes for up to 24 hours. All XMS versions automatically “rediscover” the wireless network once a day by default, and XMS will fetch updated settings into its database at that time. If you are an XMS-Cloud customer (XMS-9500-CL-x), you may wish to use WMI or CLI directly on the wireless device to change settings that may not be available in XMS-Cloud. To immediately sync up XMS with changes that you have made to a particular AP, you may go to the XMS Monitor > APs or Configure > APs page. Select the AP, and click the Refresh button to update XMS with your changes on an AP. This causes XMS to read the current configuration of the AP and update the XMS database with these values.

Wireless Access Point86 The Web Management InterfaceAn OverviewThe WMI is an easy-to-use graphical interface to your Wireless AP. It allows you to configure the product to suit your individual requirements and ensure that the unit functions efficiently and effectively. Figure 38. Web Management Interface

Wireless Access PointThe Web Management Interface 87Structure of the WMI The content of the WMI is organized by function and hierarchy, shown in the following table. Click on any item below to jump to the referenced destination.Status WindowsAccess Point Status WindowsAccess Point SummaryAccess Point InformationAccess Point ConfigurationAdmin HistoryNetwork Status WindowsNetwork MapSpanning Tree StatusRouting TableARP TableDHCP LeasesConnection Tracking/NATCDP ListNetwork AssuranceRF Monitor WindowsIAP MonitoringSpectrum AnalyzerRoguesChannel HistoryRadio AssuranceStation Status WindowsStationsLocation MapRSSISignal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR)Noise FloorMax by IAPStation AssuranceStatistics WindowsIAP Statistics SummaryPer-IAP StatisticsNetwork StatisticsVLAN StatisticsWDS StatisticsIDS StatisticsFilter StatisticsStation StatisticsPer-Station StatisticsApplication Control WindowsSystem Log WindowIDS Event Log Window

Wireless Access Point88 The Web Management InterfaceConfiguration Windows Express SetupNetworkInterfacesBonds and BridgingDNS SettingsCisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) SettingsServicesTime Settings (NTP)NetFlowWi-Fi TagLocationSystem LogSNMPDHCP ServerProxy ServicesVLANsVLAN ManagementTunnelsTunnel ManagementSSID AssignmentsSecurityAdmin ManagementAdmin PrivilegesAdmin RADIUSManagement ControlAccess Control ListGlobal SettingsExternal RadiusInternal RadiusActive DirectoryRogue Control ListOAuth 2.0 ManagementSSIDsSSID ManagementActive IAPsPer-SSID Access Control ListHoneypotsConfiguration Windows (cont’d)GroupsGroup ManagementIAPsIAP SettingsGlobal SettingsGlobal Settings .11an Global Settings .11bgnGlobal Settings .11nGlobal Settings .11uGlobal Settings .11acAdvanced RF SettingsHotspot 2.0NAI RealmsNAI EAPIntrusion DetectionLED SettingsDSCP Mappings Roaming AssistWDSWDS Client LinksFiltersFilter ListsFilter ManagementClustersCluster ManagementMobileAirWatchTool WindowsSystem ToolsCLIAPI DocumentationOptionsLogout

Wireless Access PointThe Web Management Interface 89User Interface Figure 39. WMI: FramesThe WMI has been designed with simplicity in mind, making navigation quick and easy. In the following example, you’ll see that windows are divided into left and right frames. (Figure 39 )The left frame contains two main elements: zThe menu is organized into three major sections (Status, Configuration, Tools). Each has headings for major functions, such as Network, SSIDs, Security, etc. Click a heading, such as Network, to display a page Left frame Right frame UtilitiesLog Message countersHelpCommand logUtilities

Wireless Access Point90 The Web Management Interfaceshowing a summary of its current configuration, as well as to show links for all of its associated WMI pages. zThree Log Messages counters are located at the bottom of the menu. They provide a running total of messages generated by the ArrayOS Syslog subsystem during your session — organized into Critical, Warning, and General messages. Click on a counter to display the associated Syslog messages. Messages at the selected level or higher will be shown. For more information, please see “System Log Window” on page 157. The right frame has four main elements:zThe header shows the AP type in the upper right corner, along with the hostname (this defaults to the unit’s serial number) and IP address. TheUptime shows the time since the AP was last rebooted. Below this is the page title, and the user name you used to log in. On the right, click the Utilities button for a drop-down menu that allows you to Refresh Page, Save your changes, open the Help system, or Logout. If you have any unsaved changes, the Save button is displayed on the right, in the top bar.Figure 40. WMI Header zThe main window displays the status information or configuration page that you requested. This is where you review the AP’s current status and activity or enter changes if you wish. #If you have added modular IAPs to your AP, note that its model number will be automatically adjusted to reflect the count and types of IAPs currently installed. See Upgrading with 802.11ac radio modules.

Wireless Access PointThe Web Management Interface 91zThe Command Log shows the resulting commands for requests made through the WMI.Figure 41. WMI Command LogzUtility buttons are located at the bottom right of each window — a Feedback button, a Print button and a Help button. Figure 42. WMI: Utility ButtonszClick the Feedback button to generate a Web page that allows you to submit your comments to Xirrus, Inc.zClick the Print button to open a print dialog to send a copy of the active window to your local printer.zClick the Help button to access the AP’s online help system.Submitting Your CommentsWhen submitting comments via the Feedback button ensure that you provide as much detail as possible, including your contact information, the product model number that the comment relates to, and the ArrayOS software version (if known). When finished, click on the Submit button to submit your comment.Print buttonHelp buttonFeedback button

Wireless Access Point92 The Web Management InterfaceNote that WMI provides an option that allows you to change its behavior. You may change:zRefresh Interval — the refresh interval, if automatic refresh is selected.See “Options” on page 433 for more information.Logging InUse this procedure to log in to the WMI via your Web browser. 1. Establish a network connection and open your Web browser.2. If your network supports DHCP and DNS, enter the AP’s default host name in the browser’s URL. The default host name is simply the AP’s serial number (for example, XR0823091CACD). Otherwise, enter the AP’s IP address. This may be determined as described in “Using the Ethernet Ports to Access the AP” on page 78. 3. The default login to the AP’s Web Management Interface is admin for both the user name and password.Figure 43. Logging In to the Wireless AP#Some pages or individual settings are only available if the AP’s license includes appropriate Xirrus Advanced Feature Sets. If a setting is unavailable (grayed out), then your license does not support the feature. See “About Licensing and Upgrades” on page 412.

$Wireless Access PointThe Web Management Interface 93Applying Configuration ChangesIn most of the WMI configuration windows, your changes to settings are applied to the AP as you make them. In most cases, there is no separate Apply button to click to make the changes take effect. There are a few exceptions to this rule. In these cases, a particular section of a page may have its own Apply Settingsbutton right below the settings. In both cases described above, the changes that you have made are not saved to the latest configuration file in the AP’s flash memory, so they will not be restored after a reboot. Click the Save button (located on the upper right of each page) in order to make sure that these changes will be applied after rebooting. This will save the entire current configuration, not only the changes on current WMI page. Character RestrictionsWhen inputting strings in the WMI (for example, assigning SSIDs, host name, password, etc.), use common alphanumeric characters. Some of the fields in the WMI will not accept special characters, so use of the following characters should typically be avoided: &<>' “ / \$

Wireless Access Point94 The Web Management Interface

Wireless Access PointViewing Status on the Wireless AP 95Viewing Status on the Wireless APThese windows provide status information and statistics for your AP using the product’s embedded Web Management Interface (WMI). You cannot make configuration changes to your AP from these windows. The following topics have been organized into functional areas that reflect the flow and content of the Status section of the navigation tree in the left frame of the WMI. z“Access Point Status Windows” on page 96z“Network Status Windows” on page 104z“RF Monitor Windows” on page 115z“Station Status Windows” on page 126z“Statistics Windows” on page 139z“Application Control Windows” on page 150 z“System Log Window” on page 157z“IDS Event Log Window” on page 158Configuration and Tools windows are not discussed here. For information on these windows, please see:z“Configuring the Wireless AP” on page 161z“Using Tools on the Wireless AP” on page 411#If you have added modular IAPs to your AP, note that its model number will be automatically adjusted to reflect the count and types of IAPs currently installed. See Upgrading with 802.11ac radio modules.

Wireless Access Point96 Viewing Status on the Wireless APAccess Point Status WindowsThe following AP Status windows are available:zAccess Point Summary — displays information on the configuration of all AP interfaces, including IAPs. zAccess Point Information — provides version/serial number information for all AP components. zAccess Point Configuration — shows all configuration information for the AP in text format. zAdmin History — shows all current and past logins since the last reboot.Access Point SummaryThis is a status only window that provides a snapshot of the global configuration settings for all Wireless AP network interfaces and IAPs. You must go to the appropriate configuration window to make changes to any of the settings displayed here — configuration changes cannot be made from this window. Clicking on an interface or IAP will take you to the proper window for making configuration changes. Figure 44. AP Summary

Wireless Access PointViewing Status on the Wireless AP 97Content of the Access Point Summary WindowThe Access Point Summary window is sub-divided into the Ethernet Interfacessection and the Integrated Access Point (radio) section, providing you with the following information:zEthernet Settings SummaryThis section provides information about network interface devices. To make configuration changes to these devices, go to “Interfaces” on page 170.•Interface: Lists the network interfaces that are available on the AP.•State: Shows the current state of each interface, either enabled or disabled.•Mgmt: Shows whether AP management traffic is allowed on this interface.•Auto Neg: Shows whether auto-negotiation is in use on this interface, to determine settings for speed, parity bits, etc.•LED: Shows whether LED display of interface status is enabled.•Link: Shows whether the link on this interface is up or down. •Duplex: Shows whether full duplex mode is in use.•Speed: Shows the speed of this interface in Mbps.•MTU Size: Shows the Maximum Transmission Unit size that has been configured. This is the largest packet size (in bytes) that the interface can pass along.•DHCP: Shows whether DHCP on this port is enabled or disabled.•IP Address: Shows the current IP address assigned to each network interface device.•Subnet Mask: Shows the subnet mask, which defines the number of IP addresses that are available on the routed subnet where the AP is located.•Gateway: Shows the IP address of the router that the AP uses to transmit data to other networks.

Wireless Access Point98 Viewing Status on the Wireless APzBond Settings SummaryThis section provides information about the relationship that has been selected for the Gigabit ports. For detailed explanations and to make configuration changes, see “Bonds and Bridging” on page 173.•Bond: Lists all network bonds that have been configured. •Mode: Shows the type of relationship that has been selected for the Gigabit ports. •Ports: Shows the Gigabit ports that are part of this bond. •Port Mode: Shows the relationship that has been selected for the Ethernet ports. See “Bonds and Bridging” on page 173 for details•Active VLANs: Shows the VLANs that are active in this bond. •Mirror: Shows whether mirroring is enabled on this bond. zIAP SectionThis section provides information about the Integrated Access Points (IAPs) that are contained within the AP. How many IAPs are listed depends on which product model you are using. To make configuration changes to these IAPs, go to “IAP Settings” on page 313.•IAP: Lists the IAPs that are available on the AP.•State: Shows the current state of each IAP, either up or down. IAPs that are down are shown in RED. Figure 45 shows an example where iap7 is down.•AP Type: Shows the types of 802.11 clients supported by this IAP (11/a/b/g/n) and the number of separate data streams transmitted and received by the antennas of each IAP for 802.11n. For example, 3x3 means that the IAP supports three transmit chains and three receive chains. See “Up to Eight Simultaneous Data Streams — Spatial Multiplexing” on page 44.

Wireless Access PointViewing Status on the Wireless AP 99Figure 45. Disabled IAP (Partial View)•Channel: Shows which channel each IAP is using, and the channel setting. To avoid co-channel interference, adjacent radios should not be using adjacent channels. To make channel selections for a specific IAP, go to “IAP Settings” on page 313.•Wi-Fi Mode: Shows the 802.11 client types that the IAP has been configured to support.•Antenna: Shows which antenna is being used by each IAP.•Cell Size: Indicates which cell size setting is currently active for each IAP — small, medium, large, max, automatic, or manually defined by you. Figure 46. IAP CellsThe cell size of an IAP is a function of its transmit power and determines the IAP’s overall coverage. To define cell sizes, go to “IAP Settings” on page 313. For additional information about cell sizes and the importance of planning for and defining the optimum cell sizes for your AP, go to “Coverage and Capacity Planning” on page 34.•Tx Power: Shows the transmit power for each IAP.

Wireless Access Point100 Viewing Status on the Wireless AP•Rx Threshold: Shows the receive threshold for each IAP. •Stations: Informs you how many client stations are currently associated with each IAP. •WDS Link/Distance: The WDS Link on this radio (if any), and whether the link has been set to support Long Distance Links. See “WDS” on page 385. •MAC Address/BSSID: Shows the MAC address for each IAP. •Description: The description (if any) that you set for this IAP. zNetwork Assurance SectionThis section shows the results of ongoing network assurance testing. This is the same as information shown in “Network Assurance” on page 113.Figure 47. Network Assurance and Operating StatusThe AP checks connectivity to network servers that you have configured (for example, DNS and NTP servers) on an ongoing basis. For each Setting, this list shows the server’s Host Name (if any), IP Address, and Status. Network assurance must be enabled on the AP in order to perform these connectivity tests and display this information. See “Management Control” on page 238.zOperating Status SectionThis section shows the AP controller board’s current internal temperatures, current fan speed, and compass heading. (Figure 47)

Wireless Access PointViewing Status on the Wireless AP 101Notice that the Compass Heading field will only show a value if the AP model is one that includes a built-in compass. In order for this reading to be correct, the AP must be mounted with iap1 facing north. If the AP does not have an integrated compass, this field will just show a dash.See AlsoManagement ControlInterfacesBonds and BridgingIAP SettingsNetwork Assurance

Wireless Access Point102 Viewing Status on the Wireless APAccess Point InformationThis is a status only window that shows you the current firmware versions utilized by the AP, serial numbers assigned to each module, MAC addresses, licensing information, and recent boot timestamps. It will also show current internal temperatures, fan speed, and compass heading if the AP model supports these features. Notice that the License Features row lists the features that are supported by your AP’s license. See “About Licensing and Upgrades” on page 412 and “Advanced Feature Sets” on page 21 for more information. Figure 48. AP InformationYou cannot make configuration changes in this window, but if you are experiencing issues with network services, you may want to print the content of this window for your records.

Wireless Access PointViewing Status on the Wireless AP 103Access Point ConfigurationThis is a status only window that allows you to display the configuration settings assigned to the AP, based on the following filter options: zRunning — displays the current configuration (the one running now).zSaved — displays the saved configuration from this session.zLastboot — displays the configuration as it was after the last reboot.zFactory — displays the configuration established at the factory.Figure 49. Show Configuration If you want to see just the differences between the Running, Saved, Lastboot, and Factory configurations, you can do this by choosing a configuration option from the Select Config pull-down menu then selecting an alternative configuration option from the Select Diff pull-down menu.To include the default configuration settings in the output, choose the configuration then click the Include Defaults check box. If Include Defaults is disabled, then only the changes from the default configuration are shown.

Wireless Access Point104 Viewing Status on the Wireless APAdmin HistoryIt is useful to know who else is currently logged in to an AP while you're configuring it, or who has logged in since the AP booted. This status-only window shows you all administrator logins to the AP that have occurred since the last reboot. To determine who is currently logged in, check which entries say active in the Logout Time column.Figure 50. Admin Login HistoryNetwork Status Windows The following Network Status windows are available:zNetwork — displays a summary of network interface settings. zNetwork Map — displays information about this AP and neighboring APs that have been detected. zSpanning Tree Status — displays the spanning tree status of network links on this AP. zRouting Table — displays information about routing on this AP. zARP Table — displays information about Address Resolution Protocol on this AP. zDHCP Leases — displays information about IP addresses (leases) that the AP has allocated to client stations. zConnection Tracking/NAT — lists connections that have been established for client stations. zCDP List — lists neighboring network devices using Cisco Discovery Protocol. zLLDP List — lists devices on the AP’s network that support the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP).

Wireless Access PointViewing Status on the Wireless AP 105zNetwork Assurance — shows results of connectivity tests for network servers. zUndefined VLANs — shows VLANs present on an 802.1Q connection to the AP, that are not configured in the AP's VLAN list. NetworkThis window provides a snapshot of the configuration settings currently established for AP’s wired interfaces. This includes the Gigabit interfaces and their bonding settings. DNS Settings are summarized as well. You can click on any item in the Interface or Bond columns to go to the associated configuration window. Figure 51. Network SettingsWMI windows that allow you to change or view configuration settings associated with the network interfaces include:z“Interfaces” on page 170z“Bonds and Bridging” on page 173z“DNS Settings” on page 180z“Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) Settings” on page 181

Wireless Access Point106 Viewing Status on the Wireless APNetwork MapThis window offers detailed information about this AP and all neighboring APs, including how the APs have been set up within your network.Figure 52. Network Map The Network Map has a number of options at the top of the page that allow you to customize your output by selecting from a variety of information that may be displayed. You may sort the rows based on any column that has an active column header, indicated when the mouse pointer changes to the hand icon . Click Refresh to update the information at any time. Click Auto Refresh to instruct the AP to refresh this window automatically.Content of the Network Map WindowBy default, the network map shows the following status information for each AP:zAccess Point Name: The host name assigned to the AP. To establish the host name, go to “Express Setup” on page 163. You may click the host name to access WMI for this AP. zIP Address: The AP’s IP address. You may click the address to access WMI for this AP. If DHCP is enabled, the AP’s IP address is assigned by the DHCP server. If DHCP is disabled, you must assign a static IP address. To enable DHCP or to assign a static IP address for the AP, go to “Express Setup” on page 163.zLocation: The location assigned to the AP. To establish the location information, go to “Express Setup” on page 163.zArray OS: The software version running on the AP.zIAP: The number of IAPs on the AP.

Wireless Access PointViewing Status on the Wireless AP 107z(IAP) Up: Informs you how many IAPs are currently up and running. To enable or disable all IAPs, go to “Express Setup” on page 163. To enable or disable individual IAPs, go to “IAP Settings” on page 313.zSSID: Informs you how many SSIDs have been assigned for the AP. To assign an SSID, go to “SSID Management” on page 277.z(SSID) On: Informs you how many SSIDs are enabled. To enable or disable SSIDs, go to “SSID Management” on page 277.zIn Range: Informs you whether the AP is within wireless range of another Wireless AP.zFast Roam: Informs you whether or not the Xirrus fast roaming feature is enabled. This feature utilizes the Xirrus Roaming Protocol (XRP) ensuring fast and seamless roaming capabilities between IAPs or APs at both Layer 2 and Layer 3. To enable or disable fast roaming, go to “Global Settings” on page 319.zUptime (D:H:M): Informs you how long the AP has been up and running (in Days, Hours and Minutes).To see additional information, select from the following checkboxes at the bottom of the page. This will show the columns described below.HardwarezModel: The model number of each AP, plus the amount of RAM memory and the speed of the processor.zSerial: Displays the serial number of each AP.LicensezLicense: The license key of each AP.zLicensed Features: Lists the features enabled by the key.Software (enabled by default)zEnable/disable display of the AP OS column.FirmwarezBoot Loader: The software version number of the boot loader on each AP.

Wireless Access Point108 Viewing Status on the Wireless APzSCD Firmware: The software version number of the SCD firmware on each AP.IAP Info (enabled by default)zEnable/disable display of the IAP/Up columns.StationszStations: Tells you how many stations are currently associated to each AP. To de-authenticate a station, go to “Stations” on page 127.The columns to the right (H, D, W, and M) show the highest number of stations that have been associated over various periods of time: the previous hour, day, week, and month.DefaultzSets the columns displayed to the default settings. By default, only Software and IAP Info are selected.

Wireless Access PointViewing Status on the Wireless AP 109Spanning Tree StatusMultiple active paths between stations can cause loops in the network. If a loop exists in the network topology, the potential exists for the duplication of messages. The spanning tree protocol is a link management protocol that provides path redundancy while preventing undesirable loops. For a wireless network to function properly, only one active path can exist between two stations. To facilitate path redundancy, the spanning tree protocol defines a tree that spans all stations in the network and forces certain redundant data paths into a standby (blocked) state. If one segment in the spanning tree becomes unreachable, the spanning tree algorithm reconfigures the network topology and reestablishes the link by activating the standby path. The spanning tree function is transparent to client stations.Figure 53. Spanning Tree StatusThis window shows the spanning tree status (forwarding or blocked) for path segments that terminate on the Gigabit ports and WDS links of this AP. You may sort the rows based on the VLAN Name or Number columns by clicking the column header. Click Refresh to update the information at any time. Click Auto Refresh to instruct the AP to refresh this window automatically.See AlsoNetworkInterfacesNetwork Status WindowsVLANsWDS

Wireless Access Point110 Viewing Status on the Wireless APRouting Table This status-only window lists the entries in the AP’s routing table. The table provides the AP with instructions for sending each packet to its next hop on its route across the network. Figure 54. Routing Table See AlsoVLANsConfiguring VLANs on an Open SSIDARP Table This status-only window lists the entries in the AP’s ARP table. For a device with a given IP address, this table lists the device’s MAC address. It also shows the AP interface through which this device may be reached. The table typically includes devices that are on the same local area network segment as the AP. Figure 55. ARP Table See AlsoRouting TableARP Filtering

Wireless Access PointViewing Status on the Wireless AP 111DHCP LeasesThis status-only window lists the IP addresses (leases) that the AP has allocated to client stations. For each, it shows the IP address assigned from one of the defined DHCP pools, and the MAC address and host name of the client station. The start and end time of the lease show how long the allocation is valid. The same IP address is normally renewed at the expiration of the current lease. Figure 56. DHCP Leases See AlsoDHCP ServerConnection Tracking/NATThis status-only window lists the session connections that have been created on behalf of clients. This table may also be used to view information about current NAT sessions. Figure 57. Connection TrackingClick the Show Hostnames checkbox at the top of the page to display name information (if any) for the source and destination location of the connection. The Hostname columns will replace traffic statistics columns.

Wireless Access Point112 Viewing Status on the Wireless APYou may sort the rows based on any column that has an active column header, indicated when the mouse pointer changes to the hand icon . Click Refresh to update the information at any time. Click Auto Refresh to instruct the AP to refresh this window automatically.See AlsoFiltersCDP ListThis status-only window lists devices on the AP’s network that support the Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP). Figure 58. CDP ListThe AP performs discovery on the network on an ongoing basis. This list shows the devices that have been discovered — Cisco devices and other devices on the network that have CDP running. For each, it shows the device’s host name, IP address, manufacturer and model name, the device interface that is connected to the network (i.e., the port that was discovered), and the network capabilities of the device (switch, router, supported protocols, etc.). CDP must be enabled on the AP in order to gather and display this information. For details and some restrictions, see “Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) Settings” on page 181.

Wireless Access PointViewing Status on the Wireless AP 113LLDP List This status-only window lists devices on the AP’s network that support the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP). Figure 59. LLDP List The AP performs discovery on the network on an ongoing basis. This list shows the devices that have been discovered — devices on the network that have LLDP running. For each, it shows the device’s host name, IP address, and model name, the device interface that is connected to the network (i.e., the port that was discovered), and the network capabilities of the device (switch, router, supported protocols, etc.). LLDP must be enabled on the AP in order to gather and display this information. For details and some restrictions, see “LLDP Settings” on page 182.Network AssuranceThis status-only window shows the results of ongoing network assurance testing. Figure 60. Network AssuranceThe AP checks connectivity to network servers that you have configured (for example, DNS and NTP servers) on an ongoing basis. For each server, this list shows the server’s host name (if any), IP address, and status.

Wireless Access Point114 Viewing Status on the Wireless APNetwork assurance must be enabled on the AP in order to perform these connectivity tests and display this information. See “Management Control” on page 238.See AlsoManagement ControlUndefined VLANsThis status-only window lists VLANs that are detected on the AP’s trunk ports (i.e., wired ports), but have not been configured on the AP. See “VLANs” on page 213. Figure 61. Undefined VLANsThis feature alerts you to the fact that an 802.1Q trunk to the AP has VLANs that are not being properly handled on the AP. To reduce unnecessary traffic, only VLANs that are actually needed on the AP should normally be on the trunk, e.g., the management VLAN and SSID VLANs. In some cases such as multicast forwarding for Apple Bonjour you may want to extend other VLANs to the AP, in order to forward Bonjour or other multicast packets (see “Advanced Traffic Optimization” on page 324). See AlsoVLANs

Wireless Access PointViewing Status on the Wireless AP 115RF Monitor WindowsEvery Wireless AP includes an integrated RF spectrum analyzer as a standard feature. The spectrum analyzer allows you to characterize the RF environment by monitoring throughput, signal, noise, errors, and interference levels continually per channel. This capability uses the assigned threat-sensor (monitor) radio. The associated software is part of the ArrayOS. The following RF Status windows are available:zIAP Monitoring — displays current statistics and RF measurements for each of the AP’s IAPs. zSpectrum Analyzer — displays current statistics and RF measurements for each of the AP’s channels. zRogues — displays rogue APs that have been detected by the AP. zChannel History — charts ongoing statistics and RF measurements for one selected channel over time. zRadio Assurance — displays counts of types of problems that caused each IAP to reset.

Wireless Access Point116 Viewing Status on the Wireless APIAP MonitoringThe RF Monitor — IAP Monitoring window displays traffic statistics and RF readings observed by each AP IAP (radio). Note that the data is an instantaneous snapshot for the IAP — it is not an average or a cumulative total. To graph these values over time for a particular channel, see “Channel History” on page 122. For detailed information on the measurements displayed, please see “Spectrum Analyzer Measurements” on page 119. Figure 62. RF Monitor — IAPsFigure 62 presents the data as a graphical display, enabled by selecting the Graphcheckbox on the upper left. If this option is not selected, data is presented as a numerical table. Figure 63. RF Monitor — IAPs You may sort the rows based on any column that has an active column header, indicated when the mouse pointer changes to the hand icon . Click Refresh to update the information at any time. Click Auto Refresh to instruct the AP to refresh this window automatically.

Wireless Access PointViewing Status on the Wireless AP 117Spectrum Analyzer Spectrum analysis on Wireless APs is a distributed capability that automatically covers the entire wireless network, since a sensor is present in every unit. APs monitor the network 24/7 and analyze interference anywhere in the network from your desk. There’s no need to walk around with a device as with traditional spectrum analyzers, thus you don’t have to be in the right place to find outside sources that may cause network problems or pose a security threat. The AP monitors all 802.11 radio bands (a/b/g/n), not just those currently used for data transmission. The RF Spectrum Analyzer window displays instantaneous traffic statistics and RF readings for all channels, as measured by the AP’s monitor radio. This differs from the RF Monitor-Radio Monitoring window, which displays values measured by each IAP for its current assigned channel. For the spectrum analyzer, the monitor radio is in a listen-only mode, scanning across all wireless channels. Each channel is scanned in sequence, for a 250 millisecond interval per channel. The spectrum analyzer window presents the data as a graphical display of vertical bar graphs for each statistic as shown in Figure 64 (the default presentation), or horizontally as bar graphs or numerical RF measurements. The measurements displayed are explained in “Spectrum Analyzer Measurements” on page 119. As an aid to viewing data for a particular channel, click the channel number. The channel will be highlighted down the page (or across the page for a rotated view, in both text and graph modes). Click additional channels to highlight them for easy comparison. To remove the highlighting from a channel, click the channel number again. Click Refresh to update the information at any time. Click Auto Refresh to instruct the AP to refresh this window automatically.#The RF measurements for this feature are obtained by the monitor radio. You must have a radio set to monitor mode for any data to be available. See “IAP Settings” on page 313. #Spectrum Analysis is not available for APs or Access Points featuring 802.11ac IAPs.

Wireless Access Point118 Viewing Status on the Wireless APFigure 64. RF Spectrum AnalyzerThe Spectrum Analyzer offers several display options:zTo display horizontal bar graphs, click the Rotate checkbox at the bottom of the data window. zIn the rotated view, if you wish to view data as a numerical table, click the Text checkbox. Click again to return to a graphical display. The text option is only available in the rotated view. zWhen viewing a graphical display, click Bars to have the bar graphs displayed against a gray background — you may find this easier on the eyes. This operation is not available when Text is selected.zYou may sort the rows based on any column that has an active column header, indicated when the mouse pointer changes to the hand icon . Sorting is only available in the rotated view. Click Channel number to highlightSelect Display Options

Wireless Access PointViewing Status on the Wireless AP 119zAt the bottom left of the frame, you may select whether to display only 2.4 GHz channels, 5 GHz channels, or both (the default is both). Note that the data is an instantaneous snapshot — it is not an average or a cumulative total. Spectrum Analyzer MeasurementsThe spectrum analyzer displays the following information:zPackets/Sec: Total number of wireless packets per second on the channel, both valid and errored packets. zBytes/Sec: Total number of wireless bytes per second on the channel, valid packets only.z802.11 Busy: Percentage of time that 802.11 activity is seen on the channel. zOther Busy: Percentage of time that the channel is unavailable due to non-802.11 activity. The total busy time (802.11 Busy plus Other Busy) will never total more than 100%. The remaining time (100% minus total busy time) is quiet time — the time that no activity was seen on the channel.zSignal to Noise: Average SNR (signal to noise ratio) seen on the channel, calculated from the signal seen on valid 802.11 packets less the noise floor level. A dash value “-“means no SNR data was available for the interval.zNoise Floor: Average noise floor reading seen on the channel (ambient noise). A dash value “-“means no noise data was available for the interval.zError Rate: Percentage of the total number of wireless packets seen on the channel that have CRC errors. The Error rate percentage may be high on some channels since the monitor radio is set to receive at a very sensitive level, enabling it to hear packets from devices at far distances.zAverage RSSI: Average RSSI level seen on 802.11 packets received on the channel. A dash value “-“means no RSSI data was available for the interval.zAverage Data Rate: Average data rate over time (per byte, not per packet) seen on 802.11 packets received on the channel. A dash value “-“means

Wireless Access Point120 Viewing Status on the Wireless APno data rate information was available for the interval. A higher date rate (above 6 Mbps) typically indicates user data traffic on the channel. Otherwise, the data rate reflects control packets at the lower basic rates.Rogues This window displays all detected access points, according to the classifications you select from the checkboxes at the top — Blocked, Unknown, Known, or Approved. This includes ad hoc access points (station-to-station connections). For more information about intrusion detection, rogue APs, and blocking, please see “About Blocking Rogue APs” on page 376. Figure 65. Intrusion Detection/Rogue AP List The Intrusion Detection window provides the easiest method for classifying rogue APs as Blocked, Known, Approved, or Unknown. Choose one or more APs using the checkbox in the Select column, then use the buttons on the upper left to classify them with the following actions: Approve, Set Known, Block, or Set Unknown. You can sort the results based on the following parameters by clicking the desired column header: zSSIDzSecurityzBSSIDzTypezManufacturerzStatuszChannelzDiscoveredzRSSIzLast ActiveSelect APs to DisplayClassify APs

Wireless Access PointViewing Status on the Wireless AP 121You can refresh the list at any time by clicking on the Refresh button, or click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the AP to refresh the list automatically. See AlsoNetwork MapRogue Control List SSIDsSSID Management

Wireless Access Point122 Viewing Status on the Wireless APChannel HistoryThe RF Monitor — Channel History window focuses on traffic statistics and RF readings observed for just one channel that you select in the Channel field. A new set of readings is added every 10 seconds for a 5 GHz channel, or every 5 seconds for a 2.4 GHz channel. For descriptions of the measurements displayed, please see “Spectrum Analyzer Measurements” on page 119.Figure 66. RF Monitor — Channel History Figure 66 presents the data in graphical form. New data appears at the left, with older readings shifting to the right. To make the data appear as a bar chart, click the Bar checkbox which will shade the background. You also have the option of clicking the Rotate checkbox to give each statistic its own column. In other words, the graph for each statistic will grow down the page as new readings display at the top. (Figure 67)#Channel History is not available for APs or Access Points featuring 802.11ac IAPs.

Wireless Access PointViewing Status on the Wireless AP 123Figure 67. RF Monitor — Channel History (Rotated)If you select Rotate and Text together, data is presented as a numerical table. (Figure 68)Click Pause to stop collecting data, or Resume to continue.Figure 68. RF Monitor — Channel History (Text)

Wireless Access Point124 Viewing Status on the Wireless APRadio AssuranceWhen Radio Assurance mode is enabled, the monitor radio performs loopback tests on the AP’s radios. When problems are encountered, the AP can take various actions to correct them by performing different levels of reset on the affected radio. This window shows which resets, if any, have been performed on which radios since the last reboot. The AP’s response to radio problems is controlled by the Radio Assurance Modeselected, as described in “RF Resilience” on page 360. If you have selected Failure Alerts & Repairs (with or without reboots), then the AP can take corrective action if a problem is detected. Note that radio assurance requires RF Monitor Mode to be enabled in Advanced RF Settings to turn on self-monitoring functions. It also requires a radio to be set to monitoring mode. For a detailed discussion of the operation of this feature and the types of resets performed, see “Radio Assurance” on page 530. Figure 69. Radio Assurance For each of the AP’s radios, this window shows the radio’s state, its type (IEEE 802.11 type, and antenna type—2x2 or 3x3), the assigned channel, and the selected 802.11 wireless mode. To the right, the table shows counts for the number of times, if any, that radio assurance has performed each of the following types of resets since the last reboot, as described in Radio Assurance:zMonitorzBeaconzPhyzMACzSystem (i.e., reboot the AP)

Wireless Access PointViewing Status on the Wireless AP 125See AlsoIAPsXirrus Advanced RF Analysis Manager (RAM)RF ResilienceRadio Assurance

Wireless Access Point126 Viewing Status on the Wireless APStation Status WindowsThe following Station Status windows are available: zStations — this list describes all stations associated to the AP. zLocation Map — displays a map showing the approximate locations of all stations associated to the AP. zRSSI — for each associated station, this displays the Received Signal Strength Indicator at each of the AP’s IAPs. zSignal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) — for each associated station, this displays the SNR at each of the AP’s IAPs. zNoise Floor — for each associated station, this displays the ambient noise (silence) value at each of the AP’s IAPs. zMax by IAP — for each IAP, this shows the historical maximum number of stations that have been associated to it over various periods of time. zStation Assurance — displays stations that are having connectivity problems.

Wireless Access PointViewing Status on the Wireless AP 127StationsThis window shows client stations currently visible to the AP. You may choose to view only stations that have Associated to the AP, or include stations that are Unassociated by selecting the appropriate buttons above the list. The list always shows the MAC address of each station, its IP address, the SSID used for the association, the Group (if any) that this station belongs to, its VLAN, its QoS, the IAP used for the association, transmit and receive rates, the RSSI for each station, and how long each association has been active (up time).In the Link column, click the details button to jump to a detailed statistics page for this station. Click to see Application Control information.You may click other buttons above the list to show a number of additional columns: zIdentification: shows more identifying information for the station — its User Name, Host Name, Manufacturer, Device Type, and Device Class(for example, notebook, iPad, etc.). zSecurity: includes security settings used by the connection — Encryptiontype, Cipher used, and Key Management used by the station.zConnection Info: shows the Band (5GHz or 2.4 GHz) used. Shows an additional RF measurement that affects the quality of the connection: SNR (signal to noise ratio). zReset: click this button to return the display to showing just the default columns. Figure 70. Stations

Wireless Access Point128 Viewing Status on the Wireless APYou may sort the rows based on any column that has an active column header.Click again to reverse the sort order. You may select one or more specific stationsand perform one of the following actions by clicking the associated button:zDeny Access: Sends a de-authentication frame to the selected station and explicitly denies it access by adding its MAC address to the Deny List in the Access Control List window. To permit access again, go to “Access Control List” on page 248 and delete the station from the Deny list.zDeauthenticate: Sends a de-authentication frame to the selected station. The station may re-authenticate. Click on the Refresh button to refresh the station list, or click in the Auto Refreshcheck box to instruct the AP to refresh this window automatically. See AlsoAccess Control ListStation Status WindowsStation Statistics

Wireless Access PointViewing Status on the Wireless AP 129Location Map The Location Map shows the approximate locations of stations relative to this AP. The location of each station is computed based on the RSSI of its signal as received by the AP. The distance is adjusted based on the environment setting that you selected. You may display just the stations associated to this AP, unassociated stations (shown in gray), or both. The station count is shown on the right, above the map. You may also choose to display only 5 GHz stations (shown in orange) or 2.4 GHz stations (shown in green), or both. Figure 71. Location MapThe map and AP are shown as if you were looking down on the AP from above, say from a skylight on the roof. Thus the positions of the radios are a mirror image of the way they are typically drawn when looking at the face of the AP. Radios are marked on the map to show the orientation of the AP. A station is identified by the type of Preferred Label that you select: Netbios Name, IP Address, MAC Address, or Manufacturer. If multiple stations are near each other, they will be displayed slightly offset so that one station does not Associated Stations orange - 5 GHz green - 2.4GHzUnassociated StationHover mouse to show detailsAP

Wireless Access Point130 Viewing Status on the Wireless APcompletely obscure another. You may minimize a station that is not of interest by clicking it. There is also a Minimize All button. You may replace the range-finder background image above with your own custom image of the floor plan of the area served by the AP — see “Working with the Custom Image” on page 132Hover the mouse over a station to show detailed information. (Figure 71) For a station that is associated to this AP, the details include:zThe IAP, Channel, and SSID to which the station is associated.zThe MAC and IP address and Netbios name of the station.zThe TX Rate and RX Rate of this connection. zThe approximate Distance of this station from the AP. The distance is estimated using the received signal strength and your environment setting. The environment determines the typical signal attenuation due to walls and other construction that affect signal reception. Controls and items displayed on the Location Map window Figure 72. Controls for Location Map#The Location Map has its own scroll bars in addition to the browser’s scroll bars. If you narrow the browser window, the map’s scroll bar may be hidden. Use the browser’s bottom scroll bar if you need to move it into view. Stations to display EnvironmentSettingReplace backgroundMinimize stationsReset display Rotate mapZoom in Zoom outScaleStation counts

Wireless Access PointViewing Status on the Wireless AP 131zDisplay Associated/Unassociated: Select whether to display stations that are associated to the AP, stations that are not associated, or both. zDisplay 2.4 GHz/5 GHz: Select whether to display 802.11bgn stations, or 802.11an stations, or both.zPreferred Label: This field is located on the top of the window towards the right. It shows the type of label to be displayed for stations: NetBIOS is the default, else, an IP or MAC address will be used, in that order. zAuto Refresh: Instructs the AP to refresh this window automatically. zRefresh: Updates the stations displayed. zCustom Image: Use this feature to replace the default background image with your own image of the floor plan of your location. Click the Browsebutton and browse to the desired file on your computer. This may be a .gif, .jpg, .jpeg., .png, .htm, or .html file. The scale of the file should be 100 feet per inch. Then click Upload (see below). For more information on using the custom, image, see “Working with the Custom Image” on page 132. zUpload: After browsing to the desired custom image, click the Uploadbutton to install it. The map is redisplayed with your new background. No hash marks (for the map scale) are added to the image display. zReset: Click this button to restore the map display to the factory settings. All attributes are restored — including the stations selected for display, the scale, the rotation, and the background map. zRotate: Click this button to rotate the orientation of the entire map. It rotates the map 45o counter-clockwise. zEnlarge: Click this button to enlarge (zoom in on) the map. The displayed Scale is updated with the new scale for the map. zReduce: Click this button to reduce (zoom out on) the map. The displayed Scale is updated with the new scale for the map. zEnvironment: This field is located on the top right of the window. Select the type of environment for this AP’s deployment: Indoor open (few walls or obstructions), Indoor walled (typical wall or cubicle

Wireless Access Point132 Viewing Status on the Wireless APconstruction), or Indoor dense (many walls or obstructions, or unusually dense walls). zScale: This view-only value shows the approximate distance represented by each hash mark on the default map background. zAssociated, Unassociated, Total Stations: These view-only values show the station counts observed by the AP. See AlsoStation Status WindowsWorking with the Custom ImageAfter you have uploaded a custom image (see Custom Image and Upload in “Controls and items displayed on the Location Map window” on page 130), you should move the display of the AP on your map to correspond with its actual location at your site. To move the AP on the map, simply click it, then drag and drop it to the desired location. The AP will continue to follow the mouse pointer to allow you to make further changes to its location. When you are satisfied with its location, click the AP again to return to normal operation. RSSI For each station that is associated to the AP, the RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator) window shows the station’s RSSI value as measured by each IAP. In other words, the window shows the strength of the station’s signal at each radio. You may choose to display Unassociated Stations as well with a checkbox at the bottom of the window. Figure 73. Station RSSI ValuesBy default, the RSSI is displayed numerically. You may display the relative strength using color if you select Colorize Intensity, with the strongest signals indicated by the most intense color. (Figure 73) If you select Graph, then the RSSI

Wireless Access PointViewing Status on the Wireless AP 133is shown on a representation of the AP, either colorized or numerically based on your selection. (Figure 74) The stations are listed to the left of the AP — click on a station to show its RSSI values on the AP. Figure 74. Station RSSI Values — Colorized Graphical View In either graphical or tabular view, you may sort the rows based on any column that has an active column header, indicated when the mouse pointer changes to the hand icon . Click on the Refresh button to refresh the station list, or click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the AP to refresh this window automatically. See AlsoStation Status WindowsRF Monitor Windows

Wireless Access Point134 Viewing Status on the Wireless APSignal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR)For each station that is associated to the AP, the Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) window shows the station’s SNR value as measured by each IAP. In other words, the window shows the SNR of the station’s signal at each IAP. The signal-to-noise ratio can be very useful for determining the cause of poor performance at a station. A low value means that action may need to be taken to reduce sources of noise in the environment and/or improve the signal from the station. Figure 75. Station Signal-to-Noise Ratio Values You may choose to display Unassociated Stations as well with a checkbox at the bottom of the window. By default, the SNR is displayed numerically. (Figure 75) You may display the relative value using color if you select Colorize Intensity, with the highest SNR indicated by the most intense color. (Figure 76) If you select Graph, then the SNR is shown on a representation of the AP, either colorized or numerically based on your selection. The stations are listed to the left of the AP — click on a station to show its SNR values on the AP. Figure 76. Station SNR Values — Colorized Graphical View In either graphical or tabular view, you may sort the rows based on any column that has an active column header, indicated when the mouse pointer changes to

Wireless Access PointViewing Status on the Wireless AP 135the hand icon . Click on the Refresh button to refresh the station list, or click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the AP to refresh this window automatically. See AlsoStation Status WindowsRF Monitor WindowsNoise Floor For each station that is associated to the AP, the Noise Floor window shows the ambient noise affecting a station’s signal as measured by each IAP. The noise floor is the RSSI value when the station is not transmitting, sometimes called a Silence value. In other words, the window shows the noise floor of the station’s signal at each IAP. The noise floor value can be very useful for characterizing the environment of a station to determine the cause of poor performance. A relatively high value means that action may need to be taken to reduce sources of noise in the environment. Figure 77. Station Noise Floor ValuesYou may choose to display Unassociated Stations as well with a checkbox at the bottom of the window.By default, the noise floor is displayed numerically. (Figure 77) You may display the relative value using color if you select Colorize Intensity, with the highest noise indicated by the most intense color. If you select Graph, then the ambient noise is shown on a representation of the AP, either colorized or numerically based on your selection.(Figure 78) The stations are listed to the left of the AP — click on a station to show its values on the AP.

Wireless Access Point136 Viewing Status on the Wireless APFigure 78. Station Noise Floor Values — Colorized Graphical ViewIn either graphical or tabular view, you may sort the rows based on any column that has an active column header, indicated when the mouse pointer changes to the hand icon . Click on the Refresh button to refresh the station list, or click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the AP to refresh this window automatically. See AlsoStation Status WindowsRF Monitor Windows

Wireless Access PointViewing Status on the Wireless AP 137Max by IAPThis status-only window shows the maximum number of client stations that have historically been associated to the AP. For each IAP, the list shows the IAP’s state and channel number, the current number of stations associated, and the highest number of stations that have been associated over various periods of time: hour, day, week, month, and year. In other words, the Max Station Count shows the “high water mark” over the selected period of time — the maximum count of stations for the selected period, rather than a cumulative count of all stations that have associated. This information aids in network administration and in planning for additional capacity.Figure 79. Max by IAPYou may click an IAP to go to the IAP Settings window. Click on the Refreshbutton to refresh the station list, or click Auto Refresh to instruct the AP to refresh this window automatically. See AlsoIAPsStation Status Windows

Wireless Access Point138 Viewing Status on the Wireless APStation AssuranceStation assurance monitors the quality of the connections that users are experiencing on the wireless network. This window shows client stations that have had connectivity issues. You may enable or disable the station assurance feature and set thresholds for the problems that it checks, such as excessive packet retry or packet error rates, or stations that are unable to stay associated to the AP. Please see “Station Assurance” on page 365 for more information about these settings. When the AP detects that a station has reached the threshold value for one or more of the issues checked, it adds the station to this page. In addition, an event is triggered, a trap is generated, and a Syslog message is logged. For each station, this list shows the MAC address, its IP address, its host name, its device type, device class, and manufacturer. It also shows the values of the various statistics that were monitored for problems as described in “Station Assurance” on page 365: associated time, authentication failures, packet error rate, packet retry rate, packet data rate, RSSI, signal to noise ratio (SNR), and distance.Figure 80. Station AssuranceYou may click the Clear Inactive button to remove stations that are no longer connected to the AP from the list. Click the Clear All button to remove all entries and start fresh to add problem stations to the list as they are detected. Click on the Refresh button to refresh the station list, or click Auto Refresh to instruct the AP to refresh this window automatically. See AlsoIAPsStation Status WindowsStation Assurance

Wireless Access PointViewing Status on the Wireless AP 139Statistics WindowsThe following AP Statistics windows are available: zIAP Statistics Summary — provides an overview of the statistical data associated with all IAPs. Expands to show links for displaying detailed statistics for individual IAPs. zPer-IAP Statistics — provides detailed statistics for an individual IAP. zNetwork Statistics — displays statistical data associated with each network (Ethernet) interface.zVLAN Statistics — provides statistical data associated with your assigned VLANs.zWDS Statistics — provides statistical data for all WDS client and host links.zIDS Statistics — provides statistical data for intrusion detection. zFilter Statistics — provides statistical data for all configured filters. zStation Statistics — provides statistical data associated with each station. IAP Statistics SummaryThis is a status only window that provides an overview of the statistical data associated with all IAPs. It also shows the channel used by each IAP. For detailed statistics for a specific IAP, see “Per-IAP Statistics” on page 140. Click the Unicast Stats Only checkbox on the lower left to filter the results, or clear the checkbox to show statistics for all wireless traffic. Figure 81. IAP Statistics Summary PageYou can Refresh the data (update the window with the latest information) or Clear the data (reset all content to zero and begin counting again) at any time by

Wireless Access Point140 Viewing Status on the Wireless APclicking on the appropriate button. You can also click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the AP to refresh this window automatically. See AlsoSystem Log WindowGlobal SettingsGlobal Settings .11anGlobal Settings .11bgnIAPsPer-IAP Statistics This is a status only window that provides detailed statistics for the selected IAP. Scroll the window down to see a breakout of the statistics by connection rate. For a summary of statistics for all IAPs, see “IAP Statistics Summary” on page 139. Use the Display Percentages checkbox at the upper left to select the output format — check this option to express each statistic as a percentage of the total at the top of the column, or leave it blank to display raw numbers. Receive Error statistics include:zTotal Retries: the count of packets that were sent more than once before being received correctly.zCRC error: the count of packets that were corrupted on the air and were dropped. Some level of CRC errors are expected in wireless networks. Note that all IAPs operate in a mode where they are listening to everything all the time, which means they will see many CRC errors. zFragment Errors: the count of packets that were incomplete.zEncryption Errors: the count of packets that had encryption problems.zDuplicates: the count of packets that were received more than once. The duplicate packets are dropped. zDropped Packets: the count of packets that were dropped due to various receive errors, including being received when all receive queues were full. These packets are dropped after being received.zOverruns: indicate the number of times that First-In-First-Out (FIFO) overflow errors occur.

Wireless Access PointViewing Status on the Wireless AP 141Figure 82. Individual IAP Statistics PageYou can Refresh the data (update the window with the latest information) or Clear the data (reset all content to zero and begin counting again) at any time by clicking on the appropriate button. You can also click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the AP to refresh this window automatically.See AlsoSystem Log WindowGlobal SettingsGlobal Settings .11anGlobal Settings .11bgnIAPs

Wireless Access Point142 Viewing Status on the Wireless APNetwork Statistics This is a status only window that allows you to review statistical data associated with each network (Ethernet) interface and its activity. You can Refresh the data (update the window with the latest information) or Clear the data (reset all content to zero and begin counting again) at any time by clicking on the appropriate button. You can also click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the AP to refresh this window automatically. If you are experiencing problems on the AP, you may also want to print this window for your records.Figure 83. Network StatisticsSee AlsoDHCP ServerDNS SettingsNetworkInterfaces

Wireless Access PointViewing Status on the Wireless AP 143VLAN StatisticsThis is a status only window that allows you to review statistical data associated with your assigned VLANs. You can refresh the information that is displayed on this page at any time by clicking on the Refresh button, or select the Auto Refreshoption for this window to refresh automatically. The Clear All button at the lower left allows you to clear (zero out) all VLAN statistics. Figure 84. VLAN Statistics See AlsoVLAN ManagementVLANs

Wireless Access Point144 Viewing Status on the Wireless APWDS StatisticsThe main WDS Statistics window provides statistical data for all WDS client and host links. To access data about a specific WDS client or host link, simply click on the desired link in the left frame to access the appropriate window. You may also choose to view a sum of the statistics for all client links, all host links, or all links (both client and host links).Figure 85. WDS StatisticsSee AlsoSSID ManagementWDS

Wireless Access PointViewing Status on the Wireless AP 145IDS Statistics The Xirrus AP employs a number of IDS/IPS (Intrusion Detection System/Intrusion Prevention System) strategies to detect and prevent malicious attacks on the wireless network. This status-only window provides detailed intrusion detection statistics for the selected IAP. You must have Intrusion Detection Mode enabled to collect IDS statistics. See “Intrusion Detection” on page 373. Information about IDS events is discussed in the “IDS Event Log Window” on page 158.Figure 86. IDS Statistics PageUse the filter feature to show only information for a selected IAP or for selected event types. Select the type of Filter: IAP to select IAPs, or Packet/Event to select particular attack types. Select the type of string matching, for example, Begins with or Contains. Then enter the string to be matched and click the Filter button. For example, in Figure 87, the filter Packet/Event Contains assoc finds events that include the string assoc in any position. If you have an AP with 12 IAPs, then IAP

Wireless Access Point146 Viewing Status on the Wireless APContains 1 will show entries for iap1, iap10, iap11, and iap12. Click the Resetbutton to return to showing all entries.Figure 87. Filtered IDS StatisticsMany of the column headers may be clicked to sort the entries in ascending or descending order based on that column. You can Refresh the data (update the window with the latest information) at any time by clicking the Refresh button on the upper right. You can also click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the AP to refresh this window automatically.See AlsoIntrusion DetectionIDS Event Log Window

Wireless Access PointViewing Status on the Wireless AP 147Filter Statistics The Filter Statistics window provides statistical data for all configured filters. The name, state (enabled — on or off), and type (allow or deny) of each filter is shown. For enabled filters, this window shows the number of packets and bytes that met the filter criteria. Click on a column header to sort the rows based on that column. Click on a filter name to edit the filter settings. Figure 88. Filter StatisticsSee AlsoFiltersApplication Control WindowsStation Statistics This status-only window provides an overview of statistical data for all stations. Stations are listed by MAC address, and Receive and Transmit statistics are summarized for each. For detailed statistics for a specific station, click the desired MAC address in the Station column or click the details button in the station’s Link column, and see “Per-Station Statistics” on page 149. Figure 89. Station Statistics

Wireless Access Point148 Viewing Status on the Wireless APClick on a column header to sort the rows based on that column. You can Refreshthe data (update the window with the latest information) at any time by clicking the refresh button . You can also click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the AP to refresh this window automatically. See AlsoPer-Station StatisticsStations

Wireless Access PointViewing Status on the Wireless AP 149Per-Station Statistics This window provides detailed statistics for the selected station. This window is accessed from the Station Statistics window — click the MAC address of the desired entry in the Station column to display its Per-Station Statistics window. Receive and Transmit statistics are listed by Rate — this is the data rate in Mbps.For a summary of statistics for all stations, see “Station Statistics” on page 147. You can Refresh the data (update the window with the latest information) at any time by clicking on the appropriate button. You can also click in the Auto Refreshcheck box to instruct the AP to refresh this window automatically. Figure 90. Individual Station Statistics Page See AlsoStation Statistics

Wireless Access Point150 Viewing Status on the Wireless APApplication Control WindowsThe Application Control feature provides real-time visibility of application usage by users across the wireless network. Network usage has changed enormously in the last few years, with the increase in smart phone and tablet usage stressing networks. Increasing traffic from legitimate business needs such as cloud- and web-based applications, streaming media and VoIP must be handled with an adequate quality of experience.Application Control is discussed in the following topics:zAbout Application Control — an overview of this feature. zApplication Control — displays information about applications running on the wireless network. zStations (Application Control) — displays a list of stations. Click one to analyze application control information for only that station. About Application ControlThe AP uses Deep Packet Inspection (DPI) to determine what applications are being used and by whom, and how much bandwidth they are consuming. These applications are rated by their degree of risk and productiveness. Filters can be used to implement per-application policies that keep network usage focused on productive uses:zUsage of non-productive and risky applications like BitTorrent can be restricted using Filters.zTraffic for mission-critical applications like VoIP and WebEx may be given higher priority (QoS).zNon- critical traffic from applications like YouTube may be given lower priority (QoS). zTraffic flows for specific applications may be controlled by sending them into VLANs that are designated for that type of traffic.#This feature is only available if the AP license includes Application Control. See “About Licensing and Upgrades” on page 412.

Wireless Access PointViewing Status on the Wireless AP 151Application Control can track application usage over time to monitor trends. Usage may be tracked by AP, VLAN, or station. Many hundreds of applications are recognized and grouped into a number of categories. The distributed architecture of Xirrus APs allows Application Control to scale naturally as you grow the network. About Risk and ProductivityApplication Control ranks applications in terms of their levels of risk andproductivity.Productivity indicates how appropriate an application is for business purposes. The higher the rating number, the more business-oriented an application is.z1—Primarily recreationalz2—Mostly recreationalz3—Combination of business and recreational purposesz4—Mainly used for businessz5—Primarily used for businessRisk indicates how likely an application is to pose a threat to the security of your network. The higher the rating number, the more risky an application is.z1—No threatz2—Minimal threatz3—Some risk - may be misusedz4—High risk - may be malware or allow data leaksz5—Very high risk - threat circumvents firewalls or avoids detectionKeeping Application Control CurrentApplications are recognized using a signature file which may be updated using the System Tools page as new applications become popular (see “Application Control Signature File Management” on page 422).

Wireless Access Point152 Viewing Status on the Wireless APApplication ControlThis display-only window provides a snapshot of the application usage on your AP. In order to view the Application Control window, the AP must have a license that supports this feature, and you must have enabled the Application Controloption on the Filter Lists page (see “Filter Lists” on page 392). Figure 91. Application Control

Wireless Access PointViewing Status on the Wireless AP 153The Application Control window has three sections:zSelection Criteria allow you to choose the type of data to show, and to filter for a single VLAN or station.zPie Charts present a color coded at-a-glance view of the top ten applications being used by the network.zTraffic Tables beneath the pie charts list the applications in use along with traffic statistics. Unique Productivity and Risk ratings let you easily assess the nature of applications in use, so that you can take action using Filter Management.Selection CriteriaAt the top of the window, the options in the gray ribbon allow you to customize the display with the following choices:zDisplay for VLAN: Use the drop-down list if you wish to select just one VLAN to analyze, or leave the default value of all to see data from all VLANs. zDisplay for Station: Use the drop-down list if you wish to select just one station to analyze (stations are listed by their MAC address), or leave the default value of all to see data from all stations. You may also use the Stations window to select a station to display. See “Stations (Application Control)” on page 156. zStation Traffic: Check this box if you wish to analyze traffic from stations, listing the applications that they are using. zAP Management Traffic: Check this box if you wish to analyze management traffic on this AP, including the load due to functions such as Xirrus Roaming. Tracking traffic into the AP on the management side can alert you to nefarious activity—and even to traffic on the wired network that would best be blocked before it hits the AP. You may display both station and AP management traffic, if you wish.zBy Application: Check this box if you wish to analyze and list traffic by what specific applications are in use, such as WebEx or BitTorrent.

Wireless Access Point154 Viewing Status on the Wireless APzBy Category: Check this box if you wish to analyze and list traffic by the types of applications in use, such as Games or Collaboration. zAuto Refresh instructs the AP to periodically refresh this window automatically. Use the Refresh button to refresh the window right now. Pie ChartsFigure 92. Application Control (Pie Charts)These charts provide a quick way to determine how your wireless bandwidth is being used. There are charts for Station Traffic and/or AP Management Traffic, depending on which checkboxes you selected. Similarly, there are charts for By Application and/or By Category, depending on your selections. The top ten applications or categories are listed, by percentage of bandwidth usage.

Wireless Access PointViewing Status on the Wireless AP 155Traffic TablesFigure 93. Application Control (Station Traffic)These tables provide detailed information about how your wireless bandwidth is being used. There are tables for Station Traffic and/or AP Management Traffic, depending on which checkboxes you selected. Similarly, there are tables for By Application and/or By Category, depending on your selections. In addition to showing traffic statistics, there are two unique and highly useful columns. Risk estimates the likelihood of an application causing problems for your business, such as a file-sharing utility introducing viruses or exposing you to legal problems. Risk is rated from 1 (low risk: for example, Google) to 5 (high risk: for example, BitTorrent). Risky applications (rated at 4 or 5) are flagged for your attention by highlighting the entry in pale red. Productivity estimates the value of an activity to your business, from 1 (unproductive: for example, Y8 gaming) to 5 (productive: for example, WebEx). You may click the heading of any column to sort based on that column. Click again to sort in the reverse order. For instance, sort on Risk to find problem applications, or sort on Productivity to find applications that should be given increased or decreased handling priority.

Wireless Access Point156 Viewing Status on the Wireless APWhen you find risky or unproductive applications consuming bandwidth on the network, you can easily create Filters to control them. See “Filter Management” on page 395. You may use filters to:zBlock problematic traffic, such as BitTorrent or Y8.zPrioritize mission critical traffic—by increasing the QoS assigned to the traffic. See “Understanding QoS Priority on the Wireless AP” on page 271. zLower the priority of less productive traffic—use filters to decrease the QoS assigned to traffic for applications like YouTube and Facebook. Stations (Application Control)This status-only window shows client stations currently visible to the AP. The MAC address in the first column is a link. Click on a selected station, and the Application Control window opens with the Display for Station field set to that station, to perform a detailed analysis of its application usage.Figure 94. Stations (Application Control)The rest of the fields and display options on this window (including the Identification, Security, and Connection Info checkboxes) are as described in “Stations” on page 127.

Wireless Access PointViewing Status on the Wireless AP 157System Log WindowThis is a status only window that allows you to review the system log, where system alerts and messages are displayed. Although there are no configuration options available in this window, you do have the usual choice of deciding how the event messages are sorted by clicking in the column header for the desired field (Time Stamp, Priority, or Message).zTime Stamp — sorts the list based on the time the event occurred.zPriority — sorts the list based on the priority assigned to the message.zMessage — sorts the list based on the message categoryThe displayed messages may be filtered by using the Filter Priority option, which allows control of the minimum priority level displayed. For example, you may choose (under Services >System Log) to log messages at or above Debug level but use Filter Priority to display only those at Information level and above.Figure 95. System Log (Alert Level Highlighted)Use the Highlight Priority field if you wish to highlight messages at the selected priority level. Click on the Refresh button to refresh the message list, or click on the Clear All button at the upper left to delete all messages. You can also click in the Auto Refresh check box to instruct the AP to refresh this window automatically.

Wireless Access Point158 Viewing Status on the Wireless APIDS Event Log WindowThis status only window displays the Intrusion Detection System (IDS) Event log, listing any detected attacks on your network. For descriptions of the types of attacks detected, as well as the settings to fine-tune IDS on the AP, please see “Intrusion Detection” on page 373. The displayed messages may be filtered by using the Filter Event setting, which allows you to select just one type of intrusion to display. For example, you may choose to display only beacon flood attacks.Figure 96. IDS Event Log Use the Highlight Event field if you wish to highlight all events of one particular type in the list. Click on a column header to sort the rows based on that column. Click on the Refresh button to refresh the message list, or click the Auto Refreshcheck box to instruct the AP to refresh this window automatically. Although there are no configuration options available in this window, you do have the usual choice of deciding how the event messages are sorted by clicking in the column header for the desired field.zTime Stamp — the time that the event occurred.zIAP — the affected radio.zChannel — the affected channel.zEvent — the type of attack, as described in Intrusion Detection. zSSID — the SSID that was attacked.zMAC Address — the MAC address of the attacker.

Wireless Access PointViewing Status on the Wireless AP 159zPeriod — the length of the window used to determine whether the count of this type of event exceeded the threshold.zCurrent — the count of this type of event for the current period. zAverage — the average count per period of this type of event.zMaximum — the maximum count per period of this type of event.

Wireless Access Point160 Viewing Status on the Wireless AP

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 161Configuring the Wireless APThe following topics include procedures for configuring the AP using the product’s embedded Web Management Interface (WMI). Procedures have been organized into functional areas that reflect the flow and content of the WMI. The following WMI windows allow you to establish configuration parameters for your AP, and include: z“Express Setup” on page 163z“Network” on page 169z“Services” on page 185z“VLANs” on page 213z“Tunnels” on page 220z“Security” on page 225z“SSIDs” on page 268z“Groups” on page 304z“IAPs” on page 311z“WDS” on page 385z“Filters” on page 391z“Clusters” on page 401z“Mobile” on page 406After making changes to the configuration settings of an AP you must click the Save button at the top of the configuration window, otherwise the changes you make will not be applied the next time the AP is rebooted. #If you are a customer using XMS-9000-CL-x, then APs are managed via the Cloud, and local AP management interfaces are inaccessible. #Some pages or individual settings are only available if the AP’s license includes appropriate features. If a setting is unavailable (grayed out), then your license or your AP model does not support the feature. See “About Licensing and Upgrades” on page 412.

Wireless Access Point162 Configuring the Wireless APThis chapter only covers using the configuration windows on the AP. To view status or use system tools on the AP, please see:z“Viewing Status on the Wireless AP” on page 95z“Using Tools on the Wireless AP” on page 411#If you have added modular IAPs to your AP, note that its model number will be automatically adjusted to reflect the count and types of IAPs currently installed. See Upgrading with 802.11ac radio modules.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 163Express SetupInitial AP configuration via XMS sets items such as SSIDs and security, as described in “Zero-Touch Provisioning and Ongoing Management” on page 75. This page allows you to see many of these values, or change them locally. Figure 97. WMI: Express Setup

Wireless Access Point164 Configuring the Wireless APWhen finished, click the Save button if you wish to make your changes permanent.Procedure for Performing an Express Setup1. License Key: An unlicensed AP will automatically contact Xirrus to obtain its license, if it has Internet connectivity. If you need to enter a license manually, enter it here. The factory installed license key is listed here. See “Licensing” on page 80.2. Configure the Contact Information settings. a. Location: Enter a brief but meaningful description that accurately defines the physical location of the AP. In an environment where multiple units are installed, clear definitions for their locations are important if you want to identify a specific unit.b. Contact Name: Enter the name and contact information of the person who is responsible for administering the AP at the designated location.c. Contact Email: Enter the email address of the admin contact you entered in Step 3.d. Contact Phone: Enter the telephone number of the admin contact you entered in Step 3.3. Configure the Network settings. Please see “Interfaces” on page 170 for more information. a. Host Name: Specify a unique host name for this AP. The host name is used to identify the AP on the network. Use a name that will be meaningful within your network environment, up to 64 alphanumeric characters. The default is the AP’s serial number.b. Address Type: Choose DHCP to instruct the AP to use DHCP to assign IP addresses to the AP’s Ethernet interfaces, or choose Static if you intend to enter IP addresses manually. If you choose the Static IP option, you must enter the following IP Settings:

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 165c. IP Settings: If you choose the Static IP addressing option, enter the following:•Address: Enter a valid IP address for this AP. To use a remote connection (Web, SNMP, or SSH), a valid IP address must be used.•Subnet Mask: Enter a valid IP address for the subnet mask (the default is 255.255.255.0). The subnet mask defines the number of IP addresses that are available on the routed subnet where the AP is located.•Default Gateway: Enter a valid IP address for the default gateway. This is the IP address of the router that the AP uses to forward data to other networks.•Click the Apply button for this interface when done making IP changes.4. SSID Settings: This section specifies the wireless network name and security settings.a. SSID Name is a unique name that identifies a wireless network. The default SSID is xirrus. Entering a value in this field will replace the this default SSID with the new name.For additional information about SSIDs, go to the Multiple SSIDssection of “Frequently Asked Questions” on page 522.b. Wireless Security: Select the desired wireless security scheme (Open, WEP or WPA). Make your selection from the choices available in the pull-down list.•Open — This option offers no data encryption and is not recommended, though you might choose this option if clients are required to use a VPN connection through a secure SSH utility, like PuTTy.#For improved security, you should also take the additional steps described in “Securing Low Level Access to the AP” on page 81.

Wireless Access Point166 Configuring the Wireless AP•WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) — An optional IEEE 802.11 function that offers frame transmission privacy similar to a wired network. WEP generates secret shared encryption keys that both source and destination stations can use to alter frame bits to avoid disclosure to eavesdroppers.•WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) — A Wi-Fi Alliance standard that contains a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard, using TKIP or AES as an encryption method and 802.1x for authentication. WPA is the stronger of the two wireless security schemes.•WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2) — WPA2 is the follow-on security method to WPA for wireless networks and provides stronger data protection and network access control. It offers Enterprise and consumer Wi-Fi users with a high level of assurance that only authorized users can access their wireless networks. Like WPA, WPA2 is designed to secure all versions of 802.11 devices, including 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, and 802.11n, multi-band and multi-mode.•WPA-Both (WPA and WPA2) — This option makes use of both WPA and WPA2.For more information about security, including a full review of all security options and settings, go to “Understanding Security” on page 226. c. WEP Encryption Key/WPA Passphrase: Depending on the wireless security scheme you selected, enter a unique WEP key or WPA passphrase. This field and the one below only appear if you select a Wireless Security option other than Open.d. Confirm Encryption Key/Passphrase: If you entered a WEP key or WPA passphrase, confirm it here.e. Click Apply SSID Settings when done.f. Current SSIDs: This lists all of the currently defined SSIDs for you (regardless of whether they are enabled or not).

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 1675. Admin Settings: This section allows you to change the default admin username, password, and privileges for the AP. You may change the password and leave the user name as is, but we suggest that you change both to improve AP security. a. New Admin User (Replaces user “admin”): Enter the name of a new administrator user account. Be sure to record the new account name and password, because the default admin user will be deleted! Note that the AP also offers the option of authenticating administrators using a RADIUS server (see “Admin Management” on page 231).b. New Admin Privilege Level: By default, the new administrator will have read/write privileges on the AP (i.e., the new user will be able to change the configuration of the AP). If you wish the new account to have different privileges, select the desired level from the drop-down list. For more information about user privileges, please see “Admin Privileges” on page 233. Take care to make sure to leave yourself enough read/write privileges on at least one account to be able to administer the AP. c. New Admin Password: Enter a new administration password for managing this AP. If you forget this password, you must reset the AP to its factory defaults so that the password is reset to admin (its default setting). d. Confirm Admin Password: If you have entered a new administration password, confirm the new password here.e. Click Apply Admin Settings when done.6. Time and Date Settings: System time is synchronized using NTP (Network Time Protocol) by default. Use the drop-down list to select the Time Zone.7. Quick Configuration: This offers predefined configuration options such as Classroom and High-Density that capture best practices from years of field experience. If one of the options in the drop-down list is appropriate

Wireless Access Point168 Configuring the Wireless APto your deployment, select it and click Apply. For example, the High-Density option uses best practices to configure the AP for high density settings such as lecture halls, convention centers, stadiums, etc.8. IAP Settings:Figure 98. LEDs are Switched On Enable/Configure All IAPs: Click on the Execute button to enable and auto configure all IAPs (a message displays the countdown time — in seconds — to complete the auto-configuration task). When enabled, the IAP’s LED is switched on.9. Click the Save button at the upper right to make your changes permanent, i.e., these settings will still be in effect after a reboot.LED on

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 169NetworkThis is a status-only window that provides a snapshot of the configuration settings currently established for the Ethernet interfaces. DNS Settings and other settings are summarized as well. You must go to the appropriate configuration window to make changes to any of the settings displayed here (configuration changes cannot be made from this window). You can click on any item in the Interface column to “jump” to the associated configuration window.Figure 99. Network Interfaces WMI windows that allow you to change or view configuration settings associated with the network interfaces include:z“Interfaces” on page 170z“Bonds and Bridging” on page 173z“DNS Settings” on page 180z“Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) Settings” on page 181z“LLDP Settings” on page 182See AlsoDNS SettingsInterfaces

Wireless Access Point170 Configuring the Wireless APNetwork Status WindowsSpanning Tree StatusNetwork StatisticsInterfaces XR-500, XR-1000, and some XR-2000 Series APs have one Gigabit Ethernet interface, while XR- 600, XR-4000 and some XR-2000 Series APs have two, and XR-6000 Series models have four. This window allows you to establish configuration settings for these interfaces.Figure 100. Network Settings When finished making changes, click the Save button if you wish to make your changes permanent. When the status of a port changes, a Syslog entry is created describing the change.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 171Network Interface PortsFor the location of network interface ports on an AP, see the illustrations in “User Interfaces” on page 76.Procedure for Configuring the Network InterfacesConfigure the Gigabit network interfaces. The fields for each of these interfaces are the same, and include: 1. Enable Interface: Choose Yes to enable this network interface, or choose No to disable the interface.2. LED Indicator: Choose Enabled to allow the LED for this interface to blink with traffic on the port, or choose Disabled to turn the LED off. The LED will still light during the boot sequence, then turn off. This option is only available for the Gigabit interfaces. 3. Allow Management on Interface: Choose Yes to allow management of this AP via the selected network interface, or choose No to deny all management privileges for this interface. 4. Auto Negotiate: This feature allows the AP to negotiate the best transmission rates automatically. Choose Yes to enable this feature, or choose No to disable this feature — the default is enabled. If you disable the Auto Negotiate feature, you must define the Duplex and Speed options manually (otherwise these options are not available). Both sides of the link must have the same values for the following settings, or the connection will have errors. a. Duplex: Full-duplex mode transmits data in two directions simultaneously (for example, a telephone is a full-duplex device because both parties can talk and be heard at the same time). Half-duplex allows data transmission in one direction at a time only (for example, a walkie-talkie is a half-duplex device). If the Auto-#For improved security, you should also take the additional steps described in “Securing Low Level Access to the AP” on page 81.

Wireless Access Point172 Configuring the Wireless APNegotiate feature is disabled, you can manually choose Half or Fullduplex for your data transmission preference.b. MTU: The Maximum Transmission Unit size. This is the largest packet size (in bytes) that the interface can pass along.c. Speed: If the Auto-Negotiate feature is disabled, you must manually choose the data transmission speed from the pull-down list. For the Gigabit interfaces the options are 10 Megabit or 100 Megabit. (Note that 1000 Megabit speed can only be set by Auto-Negotiation.) 5. Configuration Server Protocol / IP Settings: Choose DHCP to instruct the AP to use DHCP when assigning IP addresses to the AP, or choose Static IP if you intend to enter IP addresses manually. If you select the Static IP option you must specify the IP address, IP subnet mask and default gateway.a. Address: If you selected the Static IP option, enter a valid IP address for the AP. To use any of the remote connections (Web, SNMP, or SSH), a valid IP address must be established.b. Subnet Mask: If you selected the Static IP option, enter a valid IP address for the subnet mask (the default for Class C is 255.255.255.0). The subnet mask defines the number of IP addresses that are available on the routed subnet where the AP is located.c. Default Gateway: If you selected the Static IP option, enter a valid IP address for the default gateway. This is the IP address of the router that the AP uses to send data to other networks. (You don’t need to enter the gateway if it is on the same subnet as the AP.) d. Click the Apply button for this interface when done making IP changes.6. When done configuring all interfaces as desired, click the Save button if you wish to make your changes permanent. See AlsoBonds and Bridging

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 173DNS SettingsNetworkNetwork StatisticsSpanning Tree StatusBonds and BridgingOn models with more than one Gigabit port these ports may be bonded, i.e. configured to work together in sets. For example, one port may provide active backup or load balancing for another, or other options as described in this section. XR-6000 Series APs have four Gigabit ports, and you may specify which ports are bonded to work together as a pair. You may also select more than two ports to work together in one group.A special option lets you configure bridging between the Gigabit ports on an AP that has two of these ports.Figure 101. Network Bonds and BridgingYou may use the mirror option to have all the traffic that is ingressing and egressing one bond be transmitted by the bond you are configuring. For example, if you configure Bond2 to mirror Bond1, then all traffic going in and out of Bond1’s Gigabit ports will be transmitted out of Bond2’s Gigabit ports. This way

Wireless Access Point174 Configuring the Wireless APof duplicating one bond’s traffic to another bond is very useful for troubleshooting with a network analyzer. Procedure for Configuring Network BondsConfigure the bonding behavior of the Gigabit network interfaces. The fields for each of these bonds are the same, and include:1. Bridge Traffic Across All Ports: Click this for Layer 2 bridging between all Gigabit ports. (Figure 102) Figure 102. Bridging Traffic#If a set of Gigabit ports have been bonded, the IP address, IP mask, IP gateway, IP DHCP, and Management settings are shared between bonded ports. Any changes you make to these settings on one member will be reflected in the settings of the other members. Other settings may be configured individually.Bridging traffic

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 175Traffic received on Gigx is transmitted by Gigy; similarly, traffic received on Gigy is transmitted by Gigx. The AP acts as a wired bridge—this allows APs to be chained and still maintain wired connectivity. When bridging is enabled, it configures the following bond settings for each bond. Do not make any manual changes to these settings afterwards if you wish to continue bridging. •Bond Mode is set to Active Backup (the default value). •Each port is in its own bond, by itself.•Bond Mirror is Off. •You will typically need to enable use of Spanning Tree manually, to prevent network loops. •Active VLANs is set to All. A bridge between ports Gig1 and Gig2 sets Bond1 to contain only Gig1. Bond2 contains only Gig2. If you are bridging a chain of more than two APs, the endpoint AP is not actually bridging. It can be left with the default settings—Bond1 is set to Active Backup, and will contain Gig1 and Gig2. Skip to Step 7 on page 179. 2. If you are not enabling bridging, configure the bonding behavior of the Gigabit network interfaces as described in the following steps. The fields for each of these bonds are the same.3. Bond Mode: Select the desired behavior for a set of bonded Gigabit Ethernet ports from the following options. The modes below describe the relationship between a set of Gigabit ports—for example, load balancing or active backup. Use the Bond Portsfield to select the ports that are bonded (set in Step 4). Two or more ports #Each AP in a chain must have power supplied to its PoE port from a compatible power injector or powered switch port. An AP does not supply power to another AP.

Wireless Access Point176 Configuring the Wireless APmay be bonded. You may also include just one single port in a bond—this is useful for mirroring one Gigabit port to another port (Step c on page 178). In APs that have four Gigabit ports, you have the option of bonding three or four ports together. In this discussion, we call two ports that are bonded Gigx and Gigy. a. Active Backup (gig ports fail over to each other) — This mode provides fault tolerance and is the default mode. Gigx acts as the primary link. Gigy is the backup link and is passive. Gigy assumes the IP properties of Gigx. If Gigx fails, the AP automatically fails over to Gigy. When a failover occurs in this mode, Gigy issues gratuitous ARPs to allow it to substitute for Gigx at Layer 3 as well as Layer 2. See Figure 103 (a). You may include more than two ports in the bond with Active Backup to provide additional fault tolerance. For example, if you have three Gigabit ports configured in a bond, if the first two ports in the bond were to go down, the AP would fail over traffic to the third Gigabit port. Figure 103. Port Modes (a, b)(a) Active backup (b) Aggregate using 802.3ad

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 177b. Aggregate Traffic from gig ports using 802.3ad — The AP sends network traffic across all member Gigabit ports to increase link speed to the network. These ports act as a single logical interface, using a load balancing algorithm to balance traffic across the ports. For non-IP traffic (such as ARP), the last byte of the destination MAC address is used to do the calculation. If the packet is a fragment or not TCP or UDP, the source and destination IP addresses are used to do the calculation. If the packet is TCP or UDP over IP then the source IP address, destination IP address, source port number and destination port number are all used to do the calculation. The network switch must also support 802.3ad. If a port fails, the connection degrades gracefully — the other port still transmits. See Figure 103 (b).c. Transmit Traffic on all gig ports — Transmits incoming traffic on all Gigabit ports. Any traffic received on Gigabit ports is sent to the onboard processor. This mode provides fault tolerance. See Figure 104 (c).Figure 104. Port Modes (c, d)(c) Transmit on all ports(d) Load balance traffic

Wireless Access Point178 Configuring the Wireless APd. Load balance traffic between gig ports — This option provides trunking, similar to option (b) — Aggregate Traffic from gig1 & gig2 using 802.3ad, but it does not use 802.3ad and it uses a different load balancing algorithm to determine the outgoing Gigabit port. The outgoing port used is based on an exclusive OR of the source and destination MAC address. Like option (b), this mode also provides load balancing and fault tolerance. See Figure 104 (d).4. Bond Ports: Select the ports to be members of this bond for the behavior specified by Bond Mode. By default, Bond1 contains Gig1 and Gig2. You may also set up a bond with a single port, for example, if you wish to mirror one Gigabit port to another. In APs that have four Gigabit ports, you also have the option of bonding three or four ports together. When you check off a port to be a member of a bond, that port is automatically removed from any other bonds that contain it.5. Active VLANs: Active VLANs shows the VLANs that you have selected to be passed through this port. Create and manage the list of VLANs that are allowed to be passed through this port. Traffic will be dropped for VLANs that are not in this list. The default setting is to pass All VLANs. a. To add a VLAN to the list of allowed VLANs, click this field and select the desired VLAN from the drop-down list. To allow all VLANs (current or future) to be passed, select All VLANs. b. To allow only the set of currently defined VLANs (see “VLANs” on page 213) to be passed, select All Current VLANs. Essentially, this “fixes” the Active VLANs list to contain the currently defined VLANs, and only this set, until you make explicit changes to the Active VLANs list. If you create new VLANs, they will not be passed unless you take action to add them to the list. c. To remove a VLAN from the list of allowed VLANs, click the X before its name. 6. Mirroring — Specify one of the active bonds (Bondx) that is to be mirrored by this bond (Bondy). (Figure 105) All wireless traffic received on the AP is transmitted out both Bondx and Bondy. All traffic received

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 179on Bondx is passed on to the onboard processor as well as out Bondy. All traffic received on Bondy is passed on to the onboard processor as well as out Bondx. This allows a network analyzer to be plugged into Bondy to capture traffic for troubleshooting, while the bonded ports provide network connectivity for data traffic. If each bond contains just one port, then you have the simple case of one port mirroring another. Figure 105. Mirroring Traffic7. When done configuring bonds and bridging as desired, click the Save button if you wish to make your changes permanent. See AlsoInterfacesDNS SettingsNetworkNetwork StatisticsSpanning Tree Status

Wireless Access Point180 Configuring the Wireless APDNS SettingsThis window allows you to establish your DNS (Domain Name System) settings. The AP uses these DNS servers to resolve host names into IP addresses. The AP also registers its own Host Name with these DNS servers, so that others may address the AP using its name rather than its IP address. An option allows you to specify that the AP’s DNS servers will be assigned via a DHCP server on the wired network. Note that the DNS servers defined here are not used by wireless clients — servers for stations associated to the AP are defined along with DHCP pools. See “DHCP Server” on page 200. At least one DNS server must be set up if you want to offer clients associating with the AP the ability to use meaningful host names instead of numerical IP addresses. When finished, click the Save button if you wish to make your changes permanent. Figure 106. DNS SettingsProcedure for Configuring DNS Servers1. DNS Host Name: Enter a valid DNS host name. 2. DNS Domain: Enter the DNS domain name.3. DNS Server 1: Enter the IP address of the primary DNS server.4. DNS Server 2 and DNS Server 3: Enter the IP address of the secondary and tertiary DNS servers (if required).5. Use DNS settings assigned by DHCP: If you are using DHCP to assign the AP’s IP address, you may turn this option On. The AP will then obtain its DNS domain and server settings from the network DHCP

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 181server that assigns an IP address to the AP, rather than using the DNS Server fields above. You may also configure that DHCP server to assign a host name to the AP. 6. Click the Save button if you wish to make your changes permanent.See AlsoDHCP ServerNetworkInterfacesNetwork StatisticsSpanning Tree StatusCisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) Settings CDP is a layer 2 network protocol used to share information (such as the device manufacturer and model, network capabilities, and IP address) with other directly connected network devices. Wireless APs can both advertise their presence by sending CDP announcements, and gather and display information sent by neighbors (see “CDP List” on page 112).This window allows you to establish your CDP settings. When finished, use the Save button if you wish to make your changes permanent.Figure 107. CDP SettingsProcedure for Configuring CDP Settings 1. Enable CDP: When CDP is enabled, the AP sends out CDP announcements of the AP’s presence, and gathers CDP data sent by neighbors. When disabled, it does neither. CDP is disabled by default.

Wireless Access Point182 Configuring the Wireless AP2. CDP Interval: The AP sends out CDP announcements advertising its presence at this interval. The default is 60 seconds.3. CDP Hold Time: CDP information received from neighbors is retained for this period of time before aging out of the AP’s neighbor list. Thus, if a neighbor stops sending announcements, it will no longer appear on the CDP List window after CDP Hold Time seconds from its last announcement. The default is 180 seconds. See Also CDP ListNetworkInterfacesNetwork StatisticsLLDP Settings Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) is a Layer 2 network protocol used to share information (such as the device manufacturer and model, network capabilities, and IP address) with other directly connected network devices. APs can both advertise their presence by sending LLDP announcements, and gather and display information sent by neighbors (see “LLDP List” on page 113).This window allows you to establish your LLDP settings. When finished, use the Save button if you wish to make your changes permanent.Figure 108. LLDP Settings

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 183Procedure for Configuring LLDP Settings 1. Enable LLDP: When LLDP is enabled, the AP sends out LLDP announcements of the AP’s presence, and gathers LLDP data sent by neighbors. When disabled, it does neither. LLDP is disabled by default. 2. LLDP Interval: The AP sends out LLDP announcements advertising its presence at this interval. The default is 30 seconds.3. LLDP Hold Time: LLDP information received from neighbors is retained for this period of time before aging out of the AP’s neighbor list. Thus, if a neighbor stops sending announcements, it will no longer appear on the LLDP List window after LLDP Hold Time seconds from its last announcement. The default is 120 seconds. 4. Request Power: You must enable LLDP before enabling this feature. If Request Power is set to Yes and LLDP discovers a device port that supplies power to this AP (on a powered switch, for example), the AP checks that the port is able to supply the peak power that is required by this AP model. The Request Power feature does this by requesting this peak power (in watts) from the PoE source, and it expects the PoE source to reply with the amount of power allocated. If the AP does not receive a response confirming that the power allocated by the PoE source is equal to or greater than the power requested, then the AP issues a Syslog message and keeps the radios down for ten minutes. The radios may be enabled manually after this—see “IAP Settings” on page 313. Using this feature provides a more graceful way of handling an underpowered situation on a Wi-Fi device. When the radios are turned off, XMS can notify you, rather than having to hunt down an intermittent problem. This feature is disabled by default. Request Power is available on XR-500/600 and XR-2000 models. It is especially useful for XR-2000 models ending in 5 or 6 (except for the XR-2435/2436), since these models draw PoE+ power levels. Some of these models use Request Power to draw higher power than the IEEE 802.3at maximum of 25.5W. Requested levels are:

Wireless Access Point184 Configuring the Wireless APXR-2225/2226 (two 2x2 radios) = 22.5W XR-2235/2236 (two 3x3 radios) = 26.1W XR-2425/2426 (four 2x2 radios) = 30WNote that Request Power is not available on the XR-2435/2436. Additionally, it is not available on certain other APs, including these XR Series models: XR-1000, XR-4000, XR-6000, XR-7000. See Also LLDP ListNetworkInterfacesNetwork Statistics

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 185ServicesThis is a status-only window that allows you to review the current settings and status for services on the AP, including DHCP, SNMP, Syslog, and Network Time Protocol (NTP) services. For example, for the DHCP server, it shows each DHCP pool name, whether the pool is enabled, the IP address range, the gateway address, lease times, and the DNS domain being used. There are no configuration options available in this window, but if you are experiencing issues with network services, you may want to print this window for your records.Figure 109. Services The following sections discuss configuring services on the AP:z“Time Settings (NTP)” on page 186z“NetFlow” on page 189z“Wi-Fi Tag” on page 190z“Location” on page 191

Wireless Access Point186 Configuring the Wireless APz“System Log” on page 193z“SNMP” on page 197z“DHCP Server” on page 200z“Proxy Services” on page 202Time Settings (NTP)This window allows you to manage the AP’s time settings, including synchronizing the AP’s clock with a universal clock from an Network Time Protocol (NTP) server. We recommend that you use NTP for proper operation of SNMP in XMS, since a lack of synchronization will cause errors to be detected. Synchronizing the AP’s clock with an NTP server also ensures that Syslog time-stamping is maintained across all units. It is possible to use authentication with NTP to ensure that you are receiving synchronization from a known source. For example, the instructions for requesting a key for the NIST Authenticated NTP server are available at http://www.nist.gov/pml/div688/grp00/upload/ntp_instructions.pdf.The AP allows you to enter optional authentication information. Figure 110. Time Settings (Manual Time) Procedure for Managing the Time Settings1. Current AP Date and Time: Shows the current time.2. Time Zone: Select the time zone you want to use (normally your local time zone) from the pull-down list.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 1873. Auto Adjust Daylight Savings: Check this box to have the system adjust for daylight savings automatically, else leave it unchecked (default).4. Use Network Time Protocol: Select whether to set time manually or use NTP to manage system time.5. Setting Time Manuallya. Adjust Time (hrs:min:sec): If you are not using NTP, use this field if you want to adjust the current system time. Enter a revised time (hours, minutes, seconds, am/pm) in the corresponding fields. Click Set Time to apply the changes.b. Adjust Date (month/day/year): If you are not using NTP, use this field if you want to adjust the current system date. Enter a revised date (month, day and year) in the corresponding fields. Click Set Date to apply the changes.6. Using an NTP Server a. NTP Primary Server: If you are using NTP, enter the IP address or domain name of the NTP server.Figure 111. Time Settings (NTP Time Enabled)

Wireless Access Point188 Configuring the Wireless APb. NTP Primary Authentication: (optional) If you are using authentication with NTP, select the type of key: MD5 or SHA1. Select None if you are not using authentication (this is the default). c. NTP Primary Authentication Key ID: Enter the key ID, which is a decimal integer.d. NTP Primary Authentication Key: Enter your key, which is a string of characters.e. NTP Secondary Server: Enter the IP address or domain name of an optional secondary NTP server to be used in case the AP is unable to contact the primary server. You may use the authentication fields as described above if you wish to set up authentication for the secondary server. See AlsoExpress SetupServicesSNMPSystem Log

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 189NetFlowThis window allows you to enable or disable the sending of NetFlow information to a designated collector. NetFlow is a proprietary but open network protocol developed by Cisco Systems for collecting IP traffic information. When NetFlow is enabled, the AP will send IP flow information (traffic statistics) to the designated collector. Figure 112. NetFlow NetFlow sends per-flow network traffic information from the AP. Network managers can use a NetFlow collector to view the statistics on a per-flow basis and use this information to make key decisions. Knowing how many packets and bytes are sent to and from certain IP addresses or across specific network interfaces allows administrators to track usage by various areas. Traffic flow information may be used to engineer networks for better performance. Procedure for Configuring NetFlow1. Enable NetFlow: Select one of the Netflow versions to enable NetFlow functionality: v5, v9, or IPFIX. Internet Protocol Flow Information Export (IPFIX) is an IETF protocol (www.ietf.org) performing many of the same functions as Netflow. Choose Disable if you wish to disable this feature.2. NetFlow Collector Host (Domain or IP): If you enabled NetFlow, enter the domain name or IP address of the collector.3. NetFlow Collector Port: If you enabled NetFlow, enter the port on the collector host to which to send data.#If you select IPFIX, 64 bit counters are supported starting with Release 7.1. IPFIX uses IF-MIB, whose ifXTables support 64 bit counters.

Wireless Access Point190 Configuring the Wireless APWi-Fi Tag This window enables or disables Wi-Fi tag capabilities. When enabled, the AP listens for and collects information about Wi-Fi RFID tags sent on the designated channel. These tags are transmitted by specialized tag devices (for example, AeroScout or Ekahau tags). A Wi-Fi tagging server then queries the AP for a report on the tags that it has received. The Wi-Fi tagging server uses proprietary algorithms to determine locations for devices sending tag signals.Figure 113. Wi-Fi TagProcedure for Configuring Wi-Fi Tag1. Enable Wi-Fi Tag: Choose Yes to enable Wi-Fi tag functionality, or choose No to disable this feature.2. Wi-Fi Tag UDP Port: If Wi-Fi tagging is enabled, enter the UDP port that the Wi-Fi tagging server will use to query the AP for data. When queried, the AP will send back information on tags it has observed. For each, the AP sends information such as the MAC address of the tag transmitting device, and the RSSI and noise floor observed.3. Wi-Fi Tag Channel BG: If you enabled Wi-Fi tagging, enter the 802.11 channel on which the AP will listen for tags. The tag devices must be set up to transmit on this channel. Only one channel may be configured, and it must be an 802.11b/g channel in the range of Channel 1 to 11.4. Ekahau Server: If you enabled Wi-Fi tagging and you are using an Ekahau server, enter its IP address or hostname. Ekahau Wi-Fi Tag packets received by the AP will be encapsulated as expected by Ekahau, and forwarded to the server.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 191Location The AP offers an integrated capability for capturing and uploading visitor analytics data, eliminating the need to install a standalone sensor network. This data can be used to characterize information such as guest or customer traffic and location, visit duration, and frequency. Use this Location window to configure the AP to send collected data to an analytics server, such as Euclid.When Location Support is enabled, the AP collects information about stations, including the station ID and manufacturer, time and length of the visit and related time interval statistics, and signal strength and its related statistics. Data collected from stations comprises only basic device information that is broadcast by Wi-Fi enabled devices. Devices that are only detected are included, as well as those that actually connect to the AP. Multiple data points may be sent for a station— data is sent for each IAP that sees a probe request from the station. The AP sending the data also sends its own ID so that the server knows where the visitors were detected. Data messages are uploaded via HTTPS, and they are encrypted if a Location Customer Key has been entered. Data is sent as JSON (JavaScript Object Notation) objects, as described in “Location Service Data Formats” on page 533. Figure 114. LocationProcedure for Configuring Location1. Enable Location Support: Choose Enabled to enable the collection and upload of visitor analytic data, or choose Disabled to disable this feature.2. Per Radio Data: Choose Enabled to enable the collection and upload of visitor analytic data on a per-radio basis, or choose Disabled to disable this feature.

Wireless Access Point192 Configuring the Wireless AP3. Location Server URL: If Location Support is enabled, enter the URL of the location/analytics server. If this URL contains the string euclid, then the AP knows that data is destined for a Euclid location server. For a Euclid analytics server, use the URL that was assigned to you as a customer by Euclid. The AP will send JSON-formatted messages in the form required by Euclid via HTTPS. For any other location analytics server, enter its URL. The AP will send JSON-formatted messages in the form described in “Location Service Data Formats” on page 533. 4. Location Customer Key: (optional) If a Location Customer Key has been entered, data is sent encrypted using AES with that key. 5. Location Period: If you enabled Location Support, specify how often data is to be sent to the server, in seconds.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 193System LogThis window allows you to enable or disable the Syslog server, define primary, secondary, and tertiary servers, set up email notification, and set the level for Syslog reporting for each server and for email notification — the Syslog service will send Syslog messages at the selected severity or above to the defined Syslog servers and email address. An option allows you to use a Splunk application to analyze AP events by sending data in key:value pairs, as described in “About Using Splunk for Xirrus APs” on page 196.Figure 115. System Log Procedure for Configuring Syslog1. Enable Syslog Server: Choose Yes to enable Syslog functionality, or choose No to disable this feature.

Wireless Access Point194 Configuring the Wireless AP2. Console Logging: If you enabled Syslog, select whether or not to echo Syslog messages to the console as they occur. If you enable console logging, be sure to set the Console Logging level (see Step 9 below). 3. Local File Size (1-2000 lines): Enter a value in this field to define how many Syslog records are retained locally on the AP’s internal Syslog file. The default is 2000.4. Primary Server Address (Hostname or IP) and Port: If you enabled Syslog, enter the hostname or IP address of the primary Syslog server. You may also change the port used on the server if you do not wish to use 514, the default port.5. Secondary/Tertiary Server Address (Hostname or IP) and Port: (Optional) If you enabled Syslog, you may enter the hostname or IP address of one or two additional Syslog servers to which messages will also be sent. You may also change the port used on each server if you do not wish to use 514, the default port. You may set one of the server addresses to the address of a server for Splunk (see “About Using Splunk for Xirrus APs” on page 196). 6. Email Notification: (Optional) The following parameters allow you to send an email to a designated address each time a Syslog message is generated. The email will include the text of the Syslog message. a. Email Syslog SMTP Server Address (Hostname or IP) and Port: The hostname or the IP address of the SMTP server to be used for sending the email. Note that this specifies the mail server, not the email recipient. You may also change the port used on the server if you do not wish to use 25, the default SMTP port.b. Email Syslog SMTP User Name: Specify a user name for logging in to an account on the mail server designated in Step a. c. Email Syslog SMTP User Password: Specify a password for logging in to an account on the mail server designated in Step a. d. Email Syslog SMTP From: Specify the “From” email address to be displayed in the email.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 195e. Email Syslog SMTP Recipient Addresses: Specify the entire email address of the recipient of the email notification. You may specify additional recipients by separating the email addresses with semicolons (;).7. Station Formatting: If you are sending event information to a Splunk server, select Key/Value to send data in Splunk’s expected format, otherwise leave this at the default value of Standard. See “About Using Splunk for Xirrus APs” on page 196. 8. Station URL Logging: When enabled, Syslog messages are sent for each URL that each station visits. Only HTTP destinations (port 80) are logged; HTTPS destinations (port 443) are not logged. All URLs in a domain are logged, so for example, if an HTTP request to yahoo.com generates requests to 57 other URLs, all are logged. Furthermore, each visit to the same URL generates an additional log message. No deep packet inspection is performed by the URL logging, so no Application Control information is included in the Syslog message. The following information is included in the syslog message: •Date / Time •Source Device MAC and IP address•Destination Port •Destination Site address (e.g., 20.20.20.1)•The specific URL (e.g., http://20.20.20.1.24/online/images/img2.jpg) Station URL Logging is disabled by default. 9. Syslog Levels: For each of the Syslog destinations, choose your preferred level of Syslog reporting from the pull-down list. Messages with criticality at the selected level and above will be shown. The default level varies depending on the destination. a. Console Logging: For messages to be echoed to the console, the default level is Critical and more serious. This prevents large numbers of non-critical messages from being displayed on the

Wireless Access Point196 Configuring the Wireless APconsole. If you set this level too low, the volume of messages may make it very difficult to work with the CLI or view other output on the console. b. Local File: For records to be stored on the AP’s internal Syslog file, choose your preferred level of Syslog reporting from the pull-down list. The default level is Debugging and more serious.c. Primary Server: Choose the preferred level of Syslog reporting for the primary server. The default level is Debugging and more serious.d. Secondary/Tertiary Server: Choose the preferred level of reporting for the secondary/tertiary server. The default level is Information and more serious. (Optional)e. Email SMTP Server: Choose the preferred level of Syslog reporting for the email notifications. The default level is Warning and more serious. This prevents your mailbox from being filled up with a large number of less severe messages such as informational messages. 10. Click the Save button if you wish to make your changes permanent.About Using Splunk for Xirrus APsSplunk may be used to provide visibility into client experience and analyze usage on APs. A Splunk application has been developed to present this operational intelligence at a glance. The app includes field extractions, event types, searches and dashboards to help shine a light on station status and activityTo use Splunk, set up your Splunk server with the Splunk application—available from apps.splunk.com at Splunk for Xirrus XR Wireless APs. Configure the AP to send data to Splunk by setting a Primary, Secondary, or Tertiary Server Address to the IP address or hostname of your Splunk server. Then set Station Formatting to Key/Value to send data in Splunk’s expected format. You may specify Server Addresses for Syslog servers and a Splunk server on the same AP. Selecting the Key/Value option will not cause any problems with Syslog.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 197See AlsoSystem LogServicesSNMPTime Settings (NTP)SNMPThis window allows you to enable or disable SNMP v2 and SNMP v3 and define the SNMP parameters. SNMP allows remote management of the AP by the XMS and other SNMP management tools. SNMP v3 was designed to offer much stronger security. You may enable either SNMP version, neither, or both. Figure 116. SNMP

Wireless Access Point198 Configuring the Wireless APComplete SNMP details for the AP, including trap descriptions, are found in the Xirrus MIB, available at support.xirrus.com, in the Downloads section (login is required to download the MIB). NOTE: If you are managing your APs with XMS (the Xirrus Management System), it is very important to make sure that your SNMP settings match those that you have configured for XMS. XMS uses both SNMP v2 and v3. Procedure for Configuring SNMPSNMPv2 Settings 1. Enable SNMPv2: Click the checkbox to the left of the Enabled label to enable or disable SNMP v2 functionality. When used in conjunction with the Xirrus Management System, SNMP v2 (not SNMP v3) must be enabled on each AP to be managed with XMS. The default for this feature is Enabled.2. SNMP Read-Write Community String: Enter the read-write community string. The default is xirrus.3. SNMP Read-Only Community String: Enter the read-only community string. The default is xirrus_read_only.SNMPv3 Settings 4. Enable SNMPv3: Click the checkbox to the left of the Enabled label to enable or disable SNMP v3 functionality. The default for this feature is Disabled. 5. Authentication: Select the desired method for authenticating SNMPv3 packets: Secure Hash Algorithm (SHA) or Message Digest Algorithm 5 (MD5).6. Privacy: Select the desired method for encrypting data: Data Encryption Standard (DES) or the stronger Advanced Encryption Standard (AES).

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 1997. Context Engine ID: The unique identifier for this SNMP server. We recommend that you do not change this value. The Context Engine ID must be set if data collection is to be done via a proxy agent. This ID helps the proxy agent to identify the target agent from which data is to be collected. 8. SNMP Read-Write Username: Enter the read-write user name. This username and password allow configuration changes to be made on the AP. The default is xirrus-rw.9. SNMP Read-Write Authentication Password: Enter the read-write password for authentication (i.e., logging in). The default is xirrus-rw. 10. SNMP Read-Write Privacy Password: Enter the read-write password for privacy (i.e., a key for encryption). The default is xirrus-rw. 11. SNMP Read-Only Username: Enter the read-only user name. This username and password do not allow configuration changes to be made on the AP. The default is xirrus-ro.12. SNMP Read-Only Authentication Password: Enter the read-only password for authentication (i.e., logging in). The default is xirrus-ro. 13. SNMP Read-Only Privacy Password: Enter the read-only password for privacy (i.e., a key for encryption). The default is xirrus-ro. SNMP Trap Settings 14. SNMP Trap Host IP Address: Enter the IP Address or hostname, as well as the Port number, of an SNMP management station that is to receive SNMP traps. You may specify up to four hosts that are to receive traps. Note that by default, Tra p Host 1 sends traps to Xirrus-XMS. Thus, the AP will automatically communicate its presence to XMS (as long as the network is configured correctly to allow this host name to be resolved — note that DNS is not normally case-sensitive). For a definition of the traps sent by Xirrus Wireless APs, you may download the Xirrus MIB from support.xirrus.com (login required). Search for the string TRAP in the MIB file.

Wireless Access Point200 Configuring the Wireless AP15. Send Auth Failure Traps: Click the checkbox to the left of the Enabledlabel to enable or disable log authentication failure traps.16. Keepalive Trap Interval (minutes): Traps are sent out at this interval to indicate the presence of the AP on the network. Keepalive traps are required for proper operation with XMS. To disable keepalive traps, set the value to 0.17. Click the Save button if you wish to make your changes permanent.See AlsoServicesSystem LogTime Settings (NTP)DHCP ServerThis window allows you to create, enable, modify and delete DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) address pools. DHCP allows the AP to provide wireless clients with IP addresses and other networking information. The DHCP server will not provide DHCP services to the wired side of the network. If you do not use the DHCP server on the AP, then your wired network must be configured to supply DHCP addresses and gateway and DNS server addresses to wireless clients.When you create a DHCP pool, you must define the DHCP lease time (default and maximum), the IP address ranges (pools) that the DHCP server can assign, and the gateway address and DNS servers to be used by clients. Figure 117. DHCP Management

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 201DHCP usage is determined in several windows — see SSID Management, Group Management, and VLAN Management. Procedure for Configuring the DHCP Server1. New Internal DHCP Pool: Enter a name for the new DHCP pool, then click on the Create button. The new pool ID is added to the list of available DHCP pools. You may create up to 16 DHCP pools (up to 8 on the XR-500 Series). 2. On: Click this checkbox to make this pool of addresses available, or clear it to disable the pool.3. Lease Time — Default: This field defines the default DHCP lease time (in seconds). The factory default is 300 seconds, but you can change the default at any time.4. Lease Time — Max: Enter a value (in seconds) to define the maximum allowable DHCP lease time. The default is 300 seconds.5. Network Address Translation (NAT): Check this box to enable the Network Address Translation feature. The NATed address uses the IP address of the AP’s outbound gigabit Ethernet interface.6. Lease IP Range — Start: Enter an IP address to define the start of the IP range that will be used by the DHCP server. The default is 192.168.1.100.7. Lease IP Range — End: Enter an IP address to define the end of the IP range that will be used by the DHCP server. The DHCP server will only use IP addresses that fall between the start and end range that you define on this page. The default is 192.168.1.200.8. Subnet Mask: Enter the subnet mask for this IP range for the DHCP server. The default is 255.255.255.0.9. Gateway: If necessary, enter the IP address of the gateway.10. Domain: Enter the DNS domain name. See “DNS Settings” on page 180.

Wireless Access Point202 Configuring the Wireless AP11. DNS Servers (1 to 3): Enter the IP address of the primary DNS server, secondary DNS server and tertiary DNS server. These DNS server addresses will be passed to stations when they associate, along with the assigned IP address. Note that if you leave these blank, no DNS information is sent to the stations. DHCP will not default to sending the DNS servers that are configured in DNS Settings. See also, “DNS Settings” on page 180.12. Click the Save button if you wish to make your changes permanent.See AlsoDHCP LeasesDNS SettingsNetwork MapProxy ServicesIf your organization uses a proxy server such as Blue Coat or Netbox Blue to control Internet access, use this page to configure proxy forwarding on the AP. Options are provided for proxying user traffic and AP management traffic. Proxy services for user traffic are discussed in the following topics:z“About Proxy Forwarding” on page 203 z“Proxy Forwarding for HTTPS” on page 204z“Summary of Proxy Forwarding Behavior on the AP” on page 205z“Configuring Proxy Forwarding on Clients for HTTPS” on page 206z“Procedure for Configuring Proxy Forwarding on the AP” on page 210Proxy services for management traffic are discussed in the following topics:z“About Using a Proxy Client for Management Traffic” on page 210 z“Procedure for Configuring Proxy Client for Management Traffic” on page 211#XR-520/XR-1000 Series APs do not support HTTP/S proxy. You will receive an error message if you attempt to configure this feature.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 203About Proxy ForwardingFigure 118. Proxy Forwarding ExampleWhen you configure proxy forwarding settings on the AP, it forwards each HTTP request to the proxy server (for example, Blue Coat) at the specified URL, whichchecks if the policies that you have set up on the server are satisfied. If so, the proxy server sends the request on to the desired web site. An example is shown in Figure 118. The user of the laptop tries to open Facebook on a browser. The APforwards this request to the proxy server that you have specified, after adding a prefix with the user’s ID and the SSID (the SSID serves as a user group; for unauthenticated clients, the MAC address serves as the user name). The proxy server checks whether its configured policies permit this access for this user and SSID. If so, the frame is forwarded to the desired web site.Proxy forwarding on the AP is designed for proxy servers such as Blue Coat and Netbox Blue whose purpose is restricting Internet access to sites, applications and content, and the monitoring and reporting of this activity. It is not used for enhanced performance utilizing content caching.#SSID and client User Name restrictions permit the following characters.— Blue Coat permits only alphanumerics and + and /.— Netbox Blue permits only alphanumerics and dot, hyphen, underscore, and space characters.

Wireless Access Point204 Configuring the Wireless APProxy forwarding on the AP is configured as described in “Procedure for Configuring Proxy Forwarding on the AP” on page 210. This proxies all HTTP traffic to the specified server. If you wish to proxy HTTPS traffic as well, you must take the additional steps described below. Proxy Forwarding for HTTPSThere are two usage scenarios for proxy forwarding:zUse proxy forwarding for HTTP traffic only: set up the AP per “Procedure for Configuring Proxy Forwarding on the AP” on page 210. HTTPS traffic is unaffected and proceeds in the usual way.zUse proxy forwarding for both HTTP and HTTPS traffic: set up the APper “Procedure for Configuring Proxy Forwarding on the AP” on page 210. Then you must set up browsers on client stations (laptops, smart phones, tablets, ...) to proxy both HTTP and HTTPS traffic to the AP. Each client must also download and install the SSL certificate from the Blue Coat or Netbox Blue proxy server. Follow the procedure below to perform these steps on each client. Note that when a proxy is set up and used for HTTPS, HTTP traffic will also use the proxy server, so configure both as instructed in “Configuring Proxy Forwarding on Clients for HTTPS” on page 206.#Blue Coat policy configuration:The AuthConnector utility is not used with the Xirrus implementation. Traffic must first be passed through the portal to dynamically add the User to Blue Coat’s list of recognized Users, based on the User header inserted in the packets. When configuring Blue Coat Content Filtering policy, you may select “Users from Reporting”. Only the User value can be used in this manner. The Group header value is not dynamically added to Blue Coat’s Group list, and it can't be added manually.Netbox Blue policy configuration:Users and Groups are manually configured on the server. Users are manually assigned to Groups, and policy is applied on a per-Group basis.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 205Summary of Proxy Forwarding Behavior on the APIf proxy forwarding is not enabled in the AP and the client browser is notconfigured to use a proxy:zHTTP traffic (port 80) and HTTPS traffic (port 443) pass transparently through the AP in the usual way.If proxy forwarding is enabled for Blue Coat or Netbox Blue and the client browser is not configured to use a proxy (i.e., you do not wish to proxy secure traffic):zThe browser still uses HTTP (port 80) and this traffic is captured and proxied by the AP.zThe browser still uses HTTPS (port 443) and this traffic is passed transparently through the AP.zIf proxy forwarding is not working correctly, HTTP traffic (port 80) is blocked.If proxy forwarding is enabled for Blue Coat or Netbox Blue and the client browser is configured to use a proxy:zThe browser is configured to proxy HTTPS to www.xirrus.com port 4388. zThe browser automatically proxies HTTP traffic to the same port that is used for HTTPS traffic—port 4388.zAll HTTP/HTTPS traffic is captured by the AP and proxied to Blue Coat or Netbox Blue per your settings.zIf AP proxy forwarding is not working correctly (for example, if the configuration is incorrect), all HTTP/HTTPS/4388 traffic is blocked.

Wireless Access Point206 Configuring the Wireless APConfiguring Proxy Forwarding on Clients for HTTPSTo set the proxy server on an Apple laptop, skip to Step 3.1. For Windows laptops, click the desktop Start button. In the Search programs and files field, enter Configure proxy server. The Internet Properties dialog is displayed. (Figure 119) Click the LAN Settingsbutton. The Local Area Network dialog displays. Figure 119. Set up a Proxy Server on each Client (Windows)2. In the Proxy Server section, click the Advanced button. The Proxy Settings dialog displays. (Figure 120) For HTTPS: Enter any valid address, such as your company’s web site in the Proxy address to use field. For example, www.xyzcorp.com as shown in Figure 116. This field is not actually used, but Windows needs it to be a

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 207valid address or domain name. You must set the Port to 4388. This is veryimportant! This is the AP port that should receive all HTTPS traffic if you are using a proxy server.For HTTP: HTTP traffic will automatically use the same port that you have configured for HTTPS: 4388. We suggest that you enter your company’s web site, Port 4388 here to make it obvious that HTTP traffic is being proxied in this way. Continue to Step 5. Figure 120. Specify Proxy Servers (Windows)

Wireless Access Point208 Configuring the Wireless AP3. For Apple laptops, open System Preferences and select Network. The Network dialog is displayed. (Figure 121) Click the Advanced button.Figure 121. Set up a Proxy Server on each Client (Apple)4. Select the Proxies tab. (Figure 122) Check Secure Web Proxy (HTTPS): Under Secure Web Proxy Server, you can enter any valid address. We suggest that you enter www.xirrus.com. (This field is not actually used, but it must be a valid address or domain name). You must set the Port to 4388. This is very important! This is the AP port that must receive all HTTPS traffic if you are using a proxy server for HTTPS.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 209Check Web Proxy (HTTP): Under Web Proxy Server, we suggest that you enter www.xirrus.com Port 4388 to make it obvious that HTTP traffic is being proxied in this way.Figure 122. Specify Proxy Servers (Apple)5. SSL Certificate: you must download and install the security certificate from your proxy server—Blue Coat or Netbox Blue. It must be installed on each of your client devices.

Wireless Access Point210 Configuring the Wireless APProcedure for Configuring Proxy Forwarding on the AP1. Enable: If you wish to use proxy forwarding, select the proxy server type—Blue Coat or Netbox Blue.Figure 123. Proxy Forwarding2. BlueCoat URL: If you selected Blue Coat above, enter the URL of the proxy server, for example, http://proxy.threatpulse.net.3. Netbox Blue URL: If you selected Netbox Blue above, enter the actual URL of the proxy server, for example, xirrus.netboxblue.com. Note that this default URL is not an actual proxy server—this prevents you fromunintentionally forwarding traffic.About Using a Proxy Client for Management Traffic Some deployments require that all Internet traffic, including management traffic, use proxy services. For instance, some school systems require all traffic to use a proxy server. The AP generates management traffic to implement essential functions such as licensing/activation, XMS-Cloud configuration, and XMS Guest Access authentication. The AP allows you to configure clients that are used to proxy such management traffic. If your deployment requires proxying the AP’s management traffic, rather than allowing that traffic to go directly out to the Internet, you will need to configure the following clients:zHTTP and HTTPS: This traffic sends traps and fetches configurations from XMS. If you are using the XMS-Cloud Guest Access service, this also uses the HTTPS proxy client. You must enter the IP address and subnet

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 211mask of the proxy server. If this server requires authentication, you may enter a user name and password as well.zSOCKS: Other management functions use this form of socket to send traffic. For example, this socket is used by the XMS-Cloud configuration service which communicates with the XMS-Cloud using web sockets.Currently, two versions of SOCKS are broadly used on the Internet – Version 4 and Version 5. The service defaults to Version 5 if no version is declared. The SOCKS proxy client requires a whitelist of networks that will not be proxied. At the least, this must include the loopback address and the subnet where the proxy server lives. Additional defined subnets should include DNS servers and authentication servers.Procedure for Configuring Proxy Client for Management Traffic1. Enable: For each proxy client, you must Enable it if you wish to use it. Figure 124. Proxy Client for Management Traffic2. IP Address/Port: For each proxy client, enter the IP Address and Port of the proxy server. For the HTTP and HTTPS proxy clients, you may specify a fully qualified domain name (FQDN) or an IP address. For

Wireless Access Point212 Configuring the Wireless APSOCKS, an FQDN is not allowed—an IP address is required. The default Port settings are standard defaults for these ports. 3. Username/Password: For each proxy client, if the proxy server requires authentication, enter the Username and Password here.4. SOCKS 4/ SOCKS 5: Select the version of SOCKS in use on your proxy server. The default is SOCKS 5. 5. Socks Network Whitelist: Enter a whitelist of subnetworks that must not be proxied. Specify each subnet by entering its Network address and its subnet Mask, then click Add. At the least, create entries for the loopback address and the subnet where the proxy server lives. You should also enter subnets that include your DNS servers and authentication servers.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 213VLANsThis is a status-only window that allows you to review the current status of configured VLANs and VLAN Pools. VLANs are virtual LANs used to create broadcast domains. VLAN pools are provided for special situations where clients are to be assigned one of a set of VLANs that are treated as a pool. See “VLAN Pools” on page 215. In addition to listing all VLANs, this window shows your settings for the Default Route VLAN and the Native (Untagged) VLAN (Step 1 page 217).Figure 125. VLANs #You should create VLAN entries on the AP for all of the VLANs in your wired network if you wish to make traffic from those VLANs available on the wireless network. Each tagged VLAN should be associated with a wireless SSID (see “VLAN Management” on page 216). The AP will discard any VLAN-tagged packets arriving on its wired ports, unless the same VLAN has been defined on the AP. See “Undefined VLANs” on page 114.

Wireless Access Point214 Configuring the Wireless APUnderstanding Virtual Tunnels Xirrus APs support Layer 2 tunneling. This allows an AP to use tunnels to transport traffic for one or more SSID-VLAN pairs onto a single destination network through the Layer 3 core network. Tunnels may be implemented with:zThe Xirrus Tunnel Server (XTS)—see the Xirrus Tunnel Server User’s Guide.zVirtual Tunnel Server (VTS)—see below.You may specify a tunnel for a VLAN as described below and in “Procedure for Managing VLANs” on page 217. These tunnels are typically set up to be encrypted. Alternatively, the GRE tunnels created in “Tunnel Management” on page 221 are not encrypted, offering much higher throughput and scaling better. If tunneled traffic is not traversing public networks, GRE is recommended. While VLAN tunnels and GRE can be used on the same AP simultaneously, more than one tunnel shouldn't be configured to tunnel the same traffic.Virtual Tunnel Server (VTS)Tunneling capability is provided by a Virtual Tunnel Server. You supply the server and deploy it in your network using open-source VTun software, available from vtun.sourceforge.net. To enable the AP to use tunneling for a VLAN, simply enter the IP address, port and secret for the tunnel server as described in Step 12 on page 219. VTun may be configured for a number of different tunnel types, protocols, and encryption types. For use with APs, we recommend the following configuration choices:zTunnel Type: Ether (Ethernet tunnel) zProtocol: UDPzEncryption Type: select one of the encryption types supported by VTun (AES and Blowfish options are available) zKeepalive: yesVTS Client-Server InteractionThe AP is a client of the Virtual Tunnel Server. When you specify a VTS for an active VLAN-SSID pair, the AP contacts the VTS. The server then creates a tunnel

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 215session to the AP. VTun encapsulated packets will cross the Layer 3 network from the AP to the VTS. When packets arrive at the VTS, they will be de-encapsulated and the resultant packets will be passed to your switch with 802.1q VLAN tags for final Layer 2 processing. The process occurs in reverse for packets traveling in the other direction. We recommend that you enable the VTun keep-alive option. This will send a keep-alive packet once per second to ensure that the tunnel remains active. Tunnels can be configured to come up on demand but this is a poor choice for wireless, since tunnel setup can take roughly 5-20 seconds and present a problem for authentication. VLAN PoolsA VLAN pool is a set of VLANs. Using a pool allows a client associating to an AP to be assigned to one of the VLANs in the pool rather than to a particular VLAN.This is useful in special networking situations. For example, a large hotel uses four Internet access gateways to capture Wi-Fi users. Each gateway uses one VLAN. On the hotel’s APs, we create a VLAN pool with the four gateway VLANs. When a client connects to an AP, it is assigned to one of the VLANs in the pool. This distributes users approximately evenly among the gateways, roughly balancing their loads. Each client device is assigned to a pool VLAN with a computation based on thelower digits of its MAC address, so that the device will always be assigned to the same VLAN. This ensures that a client roaming from one AP to the next will be handled properly. Note that the VLAN assigned is also based on the VLANs in the pool, so that if changes are made to the pool, the client device may be assigned to a different VLAN.You may specify a VLAN pool rather than a particular VLAN for SSIDs or foruser groups. See “Procedure for Managing SSIDs” on page 278 or “Procedure for Managing Groups” on page 306. You may create up to 16 VLAN pools, and each may contain up to the maximum number of VLANS that may be created on the AP. If a user has a VLAN assigned via RADIUS authentication, then this VLAN will be used rather than one from the

Wireless Access Point216 Configuring the Wireless APVLAN pool. If a user has a VLAN assigned via a Group, then this VLAN will be used rather than one from the VLAN pool.To set up a VLAN pool, see the next section.VLAN ManagementThis window allows you to set up VLANs and VLAN Pools. After creating a new VLAN (added to the list of VLANs), you can modify the configuration parameters of an existing VLAN or delete a selected VLAN. For ArrayOS 6.6 and later releases, you may create up to 64 VLANs (up to 32 on XR-520). Figure 126. VLAN Management

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 217Procedure for Managing VLANs 1. Default Route: This option sets a default route from the AP. The AP supports a default route on native and tagged interfaces. Once the default route is configured the AP will attempt to use Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) to find the default router. ARP finds the MAC address of a device with a given IP address by sending out a broadcast message requesting this information. This option allows you to choose a default VLAN route from the pull-down list. The IP Gateway must be established for this function to work. After changing the Default Route, you mustclick the Save button and then reboot. 2. Native VLAN: This option sets whether the AP management is tagged or untagged. If you select a Native VLAN, then that VLAN will use an untagged (Native) link. Otherwise, the AP will use 802.1Q tagging and a specific VLAN ID with management enabled for management of the AP.VLAN Pools3. See “VLAN Pools” on page 215 for a discussion of VLAN pools. To add a new pool, type its name in Create New Pool, and click ENTER. The new VLAN pool entry is added to the list. #The Wireless AP supports dynamic VLAN assignments specified by RADIUS policy settings. When RADIUS sends these assignments, the AP dynamically assigns wireless stations to VLANs as requested. VLAN tags on traffic are passed through the AP (i.e., VLAN tags are not stripped). Once a station has been dynamically moved to a new VLAN, it will be shown in the Stations window as a member of the new VLAN. (Figure 70 on page 127)It is critical to configure all VLANs to be used on the AP, even those that will be dynamically assigned.

Wireless Access Point218 Configuring the Wireless AP4. First, create all of the VLANs that will belong to this pool. See Step 5 below. Click in the field for the new pool to display a list of VLANs. Add the desired VLANs to this pool, one at a time. This field also provides a search feature—type in a string, and a list will display all VLANs whose names contain that string in any position (VLAN names are searched, but not VLAN numbers). Click the Apply button on the right when done adding VLANs. Note that the same VLAN can be added to more than one pool. Be sure to consider any network implications of using the same VLAN in multiple pools. Click Reset if you want to remove all of the VLANs from this pool, i.e., to empty it. Click Remove to delete this pool. You may use Reset All Poolson the bottom to delete all pools. VLANs5. Create New VLAN: Enter a name for the new VLAN in this field.ID: Enter a number for this VLAN (0-4094). Click the Create VLAN button. The new VLAN appears in the list. Entries are sorted alphabetically by VLAN name. Select the new entry to modify any of the settings below. 6. Management: Move the slider if you want to allow AP management over this VLAN.7. Fast Roaming: Move the slider if you want to allow roaming over this VLAN.8. DHCP: Move the slider if you want the DHCP server to assign the IP address, subnet mask and gateway address for this VLAN automatically, otherwise you must go to the next step and assign these parameters manually.9. IP Address: If the DHCP option is disabled, enter a valid IP address for this VLAN association.10. Subnet Mask: If the DHCP option is disabled, enter the subnet mask IP address for this VLAN association.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 21911. Gateway: If the DHCP option is disabled, enter the IP gateway address for this VLAN association.12. Tunnel Server: If this VLAN is to be tunneled, enter the IP address or host name of the tunnel server that will perform the tunneling. For more information on virtual tunnels, please see “Understanding Virtual Tunnels” on page 214. 13. Tunnel Server Port: If this VLAN is to be tunneled, enter the port number of the tunnel server. 14. New Secret: Enter the password expected by the tunnel server.15. Delete VLAN: To delete the selected VLAN, simply click the Deletebutton to remove the VLAN from the list.16. Click the Save button if you wish to make your changes permanent.See AlsoVLAN StatisticsVLANsTunnels

Wireless Access Point220 Configuring the Wireless APTunnelsThis read-only window allows you to review the tunnels that have been defined on the AP. It lists all tunnels and their settings, including the type of authentication and the local and remote endpoints for each tunnel. Tunnels are discussed in these sections:zAbout Xirrus TunnelszTunnel ManagementzSSID AssignmentszVLAN AssignmentsFigure 127. Tunnel SummaryAbout Xirrus Tunnels Xirrus APs offer GRE (Generic Routing Encapsulation) tunneling with VLAN support. This allows an AP to use tunnels to bridge Layer 2 traffic for one or more SSIDs onto a single destination network through the Layer 3 network. You may specify particular VLANs on an SSID to be tunneled, or tunnel all of the VLANs that are on this SSID. GRE tunneling is quite flexible, and can encapsulate many network layer protocols. As a result, it can support a variety of applications. For example, a Wi-Fi hotspot can allow guest logins and use the tunnel to give guests direct access to the Internet, without allowing access to the local network. In a small office, you may define a tunnel to connect users to the corporate office network. Tunnels may also used when providing cellular offload capability. For non-GRE tunnels associated with particular VLANs, see “Understanding Virtual Tunnels” on page 214.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 221Tunnels may be implemented with:zThe Xirrus Tunnel Server (XTS)—see the Xirrus Tunnel Server User’s Guide. For an additional discussion, see the Xirrus Tunnel Solutions Application Note in the Xirrus Resource Center.zVTS —see “Virtual Tunnel Server (VTS)” on page 214. To create a tunnel, you specify the Local Endpoint, which should be one of the AP’s wired ports, and the Primary Remote Endpoint. A Secondary Remote Endpoint may also be specified in case of a failure at the first endpoint. Traffic for the designated VLANs on an SSID is sent in GRE encapsulated packets across the Layer 3 network from the AP to the remote endpoint. When packets arrive, the encapsulation is stripped and the resultant packets are passed to your switch with 802.1q VLAN tags for final Layer 2 processing. The process occurs in reverse for packets traveling in the other direction. Tunnel Management This window allows you to create tunnels. Figure 128. Tunnel ManagementProcedure for Managing Tunnels 1. New Tunnel Name: Enter a name for the new tunnel in this field, then click on the Create button. The new tunnel is added to the list. You may crate up to 250 Layer 3 tunnels. 2. Enabled: The new tunnel is created in the disabled state. Click this checkbox to enable it.3. Type: Enter the type of tunnel, none or gre.

Wireless Access Point222 Configuring the Wireless AP4. Local Endpoint: Enter the IP address of the AP Gigabit or 10 Gigabit port where the tunnel is to begin.5. Primary Remote Endpoint: Enter the IP address of the remote endpoint of the tunnel.6. Secondary Remote Endpoint: This provides a failover capability. If the primary tunnel fails, traffic is switched over to the secondary tunnel. Enter the IP address of the remote endpoint of the secondary tunnel.7. DHCP Option: When this option is enabled, the AP snoops station DHCP requests and inserts relay agent information (Option 82, in the CIRCUIT-ID sub-option) into these DHCP packets. Information inserted includes AP BSSID, SSID name, and SSID encryption type. You may use this option here or on the SSID Management page, but not in both places.Information is inserted as a colon-separated text string in the CIRCUIT ID value field in this format: [AP_MAC];[SSID];[ENC][AP_MAC] length = 17 (aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff)[SSID] length = length of SSID name[ENC] length = 1 (encryption type: 'o' = open, 's' = non-open)Note that this is a different format than is used for Option 82 with SSIDs.8. MTU: Set maximum transmission unit (MTU) size. 9. Interval: The tunnel mechanism will ping the current remote endpoint periodically to ensure that it is still reachable. Enter the ping interval (in seconds).10. Failures: Enter the number of consecutive ping failures that will cause the AP to consider the tunnel to be down. tunnel to failover to the other remote endpoint.11. Click the Save button if you wish to make your changes permanent.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 22312. Proceed to SSID Assignments to define the SSIDs for which each tunnel will bridge data. You may create up to 16 tunnels. Assign one or more SSIDs to each tunnel. You may restrict the tunnel to handling traffic for particular VLANs on each SSID if you wish, as described in VLAN Assignments. SSID AssignmentsThis window allows you to select the SSIDs to be bridged by each tunnel. Station traffic for SSIDs assigned will be bridged through the tunnel, but you may restrict which VLANs are tunneled for each SSID (see VLAN Assignments, below). By default, all VLANs will be tunneled. When VLAN traffic is tunneled, it will be tagged accordingly.Figure 129. Tunnel SSID AssignmentsProcedure for Assigning SSIDs This window lists the tunnels and SSIDs that you have defined. 1. For each tunnel, select the SSIDs that are to be bridged to the remote endpoint. Clear the checkbox for any SSID that you no longer wish to include in the tunnel. You may use the ALL SSIDs checkbox to toggle between selecting all SSIDs, or none.2. Click the Save button to make your changes permanent.

Wireless Access Point224 Configuring the Wireless APVLAN AssignmentsWhen you assign an SSID to a tunnel, all VLANs on that SSID will be transported to the tunnel by default. This window allows you to select specific VLANs to be bridged by each tunnel. A VLAN’s station traffic bridged through a tunnel will be tagged accordingly. Station traffic for a VLAN that is not tunneled is forwarded to the local subnet, i.e., dropped off locally at the edge of the switch network to which the AP is connected. Figure 130. Tunnel VLAN AssignmentsProcedure for Assigning SSIDs This window lists the tunnels and VLANs that you have defined. 1. For each tunnel, select the VLANs that are to be bridged to the remote endpoint. Clear the checkbox for any VLAN that you no longer wish to include in the tunnel. You may use the ALL VLANs checkbox to toggle between selecting all VLANs, or none. Note that if you add any VLANs to this list, then they will be the only VLANs transported on this tunnel. Also note that many VLANs may be in use on an SSID if they are assigned to stations dynamically by a RADIUS server or by user groups (see “Groups” on page 304).2. Click the Save button to make your changes permanent.See AlsoTunnelsVLANsSSIDs

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 225SecurityThis status-only window allows you to review the AP’s security parameters. It includes the assigned network administration accounts, Access Control List (ACL) values, management settings, encryption and authentication protocol settings, and RADIUS configuration settings. There are no configuration options available in this window, but if you are experiencing issues with security, you may want to print this window for your records.Figure 131. Security For additional information about wireless network security, refer to:z“Security Planning” on page 56z“Understanding Security” on page 226zThe Security section of “Frequently Asked Questions” on page 522For information about secure use of the WMI, refer to:z“Certificates and Connecting Securely to the WMI” on page 229z“Using the AP’s Default Certificate” on page 230z“Using an External Certificate Authority” on page 231z“About Creating Admin Accounts on the RADIUS Server” on page 235

Wireless Access Point226 Configuring the Wireless APz“About Creating User Accounts on the RADIUS Server” on page 255Security settings are configured with the following windows:z“Admin Management” on page 231z“Admin Privileges” on page 233z“Admin RADIUS” on page 235z“Management Control” on page 238z“Access Control List” on page 248z“Global Settings” on page 250z“External Radius” on page 254z“Internal Radius” on page 258z“Active Directory” on page 260z“Rogue Control List” on page 264 z“OAuth 2.0 Management” on page 265 Understanding SecurityThe Xirrus Wireless AP incorporates many configurable security features. After initially installing an AP, always change the default administrator password (the default is admin), and choose a strong replacement password (containing letters, numbers and special characters). When appropriate, issue read-only administrator accounts.Other security considerations include:zSSH versus Telnet: Be aware that Telnet is not secure over network connections and should be used only with a direct serial port connection. When connecting to the unit’s Command Line Interface (CLI) over a network connection, you must use a Secure SHell version 2 (SSH-2) utility. SSH-2 provides stronger security than SSH-1. The most commonly used freeware providing SSH tools is PuTTY.zConfiguration auditing: The optional XMS offers powerful management features for small or large wireless deployments, and can audit your configuration settings automatically. In addition, using the XMS eliminates the need for an FTP server.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 227zChoosing an encryption method: Wireless data encryption prevents eavesdropping on data being transmitted or received over the airwaves. The AP allows you to establish the following data encryption configuration options:•Open — this option offers no data encryption and is not recommended, though you might choose this option if clients are required to use a VPN connection through a secure SSH utility, like PuTTy.•Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) — this option provides minimal protection (though much better than using an open network). An early standard for wireless data encryption and supported by all Wi-Fi certified equipment, WEP is vulnerable to hacking and is therefore not recommended for use by Enterprise networks.•Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA and WPA2) — these are much stronger encryption modes than WEP, using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) or Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) to encrypt data.WPA solves security issues with WEP. It also allows you to establish encryption keys on a per-user-basis, with key rotation for added security. In addition, TKIP provides Message Integrity Check (MIC) functionality and prevents active attacks on the wireless network.AES is the strongest encryption standard and is used by government agencies; however, old legacy hardware may not be capable of supporting the AES mode (it probably won’t work on older wireless clients). Because AES is the strongest encryption standard currently available, WPA2 with AES is highly recommended for Enterprise networks. Any of the above encryption methods can be used and an AP can support multiple encryption methods simultaneously, but only one method may be selected per SSID (except that selecting WPA-Both allows WPA and WPA2 to be used at the same time on the same SSID). Otherwise, if multiple security methods are needed, you must define multiple SSIDs.

Wireless Access Point228 Configuring the Wireless APThe encryption mode (WEP, WPA, etc.) is selected in the SSIDs >SSID Management window (see “SSID Management” on page 277). The encryption standard used with WPA or WPA2 (AES or TKIP) is selected in the Security>Global Settings window under WPA Settings(see “Global Settings” on page 250). zChoosing an authentication method: User authentication ensures that users are who they say they are. For this purpose, the AP allows you to choose between the following user authentication methods:•Pre-Shared Key — users must manually enter a key (passphrase) on the client side of the wireless network that matches the key stored by the administrator in the AP.This method should be used only for smaller networks when a RADIUS server is unavailable. If PSK must be used, choose a strong passphrase containing between 8 and 63 characters (20 is preferred). Always use a combination of letters, numbers and special characters. Never use English words separated by spaces.•RADIUS 802.1x with EAP — 802.1x uses a RADIUS server to authenticate large numbers of clients, and can handle different Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) authentication methods, including EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-PEAP, and LEAP-Passthrough. The RADIUS server can be internal (provided by the Wireless AP) or external. An external RADIUS server offers more functionality and security, and is recommended for large deployments. When using this method, user names and passwords must be entered into the RADIUS server for user authentication.•MAC Address Access Control Lists (ACLs) — MAC address ACLs provide a list of client adapter MAC addresses that are allowed or denied access to the wireless network. Access Control Lists work well when there are a limited number of users — in this case, enter the MAC address of each user in the Allow list. In the event of a lost or stolen MAC adapter, enter the affected MAC

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 229address in the Deny list. The Wireless AP will accept up to 1,000 ACL entries. zPCI DSS or FIPS 140-2 Security — to implement the requirements of these security standards on the AP, please see “Auditing PCI DSS” on page 585 or “Implementing FIPS Security” on page 591. Certificates and Connecting Securely to the WMIWhen you point your browser to the AP to connect to the WMI, the AP presents an X.509 security certificate to the browser to establish a secure channel. One significant piece of information in the certificate is the AP’s host name. This ties the certificate to a particular AP and ensures the client that it is connecting to that host.Certificate Authorities (CAs) are entities that digitally sign certificates, using their own certificates (for example, VeriSign is a well-known CA). When the AP presents its certificate to the client’s browser, the browser looks up the CA that signed the certificate to decide whether to trust it. Browsers ship with a small set of trusted CAs already installed. If the browser trusts the certificate’s CA, it checks to ensure the host name (and IP address) match those on the certificate. If any of these checks fail, you get a security warning when connecting to the WMI. The AP ships with a default certificate that is signed by the Xirrus CA. You may choose to use this certificate, or to use a certificate issued by the CA of your choice, as described in the following sections:zUsing the AP’s Default CertificatezUsing an External Certificate Authority

Wireless Access Point230 Configuring the Wireless APUsing the AP’s Default CertificateFigure 132. Import Xirrus Certificate Authority The AP’s certificate is signed by a Xirrus CA that is customized for your AP and its current host name. By default, browsers will not trust the AP’s certificate. You may import the Xirrus certificate to instruct the browser to trust the Xirrus CA on all future connections to APs. The certificate for the Xirrus CA is available on the AP, so that you can import it into your browser’s cache of trusted CAs (right alongside VeriSign, for example). On the Management Control window of the WMI you will see the xirrus-ca.crt file. (Figure 132) By clicking and opening this file, you can follow your browser’s instructions and import the Xirrus CA into your CA cache (see “HTTPS (X.509) Certificate” on page 245 for more information). This instructs your browser to trust any of the certificates signed by the Xirrus CA, so that when you connect to any of our APs you should no longer see the warning about an untrusted site. Note however, that this only works if you use the host name when connecting to the AP. If you use the IP address to connect, you get a lesser warning saying that the certificate was only meant for ‘hostname’.Since an AP’s certificate is based on the AP’s host name, any time you change the host name the AP’s CA will regenerate and sign a new certificate. This happens automatically the next time you reboot after changing the host name. If you have already installed the Xirrus CA on a browser, this new AP certificate should automatically be trusted. When you install the Xirrus CA in your browser, it will trust a certificate signed by any Xirrus AP, as long as you connect using the AP’s host name.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 231Using an External Certificate AuthorityIf you prefer, you may install a certificate on your AP signed by an outside CA. The AP’s certificate is used for security when stations attempt to associate to an SSID that has Web Page Redirect (captive portal) enabled. In this case, it is preferable for the AP to present a certificate from an external CA that is likely to be trusted by most browsers. When a WPR login page is presented, the user will not see a security error if the AP’s certificate was obtained from an external CA that is already trusted by the user’s browser. WMI provides options for creating a Certificate Signing Request that you can send to an external CA, and for uploading the signed certificate to the AP after you obtain it from the CA. This certificate will be tied to the AP’s host name and private key. See “External Certificate Authority” on page 246 for more details. Admin ManagementThis window allows you to manage network administrator accounts (create, modify and delete). It also allows you to limit account access to a read only status. When finished, click the Save button if you wish to make your changes permanent.Figure 133. Admin Management

Wireless Access Point232 Configuring the Wireless APProcedure for Creating or Modifying Network Administrator Accounts1. Admin ID: Enter the login name for a new network administrator ID. The length of the ID must be between 5 and 50 characters, inclusive. 2. Read/Write: Choose 1:read-write if you want to give this administrator ID full read/write privileges, or choose 0:read-only to restrict this user to read only status. In the read only mode, administrators cannot save changes to configurations. Or you may select one of your custom-defined privilege levels (see “Admin Privileges” on page 233). 3. New Password: Enter a password for this ID. The length of the password must be between 5 and 50 characters, inclusive. 4. Verify: Re-enter the password in this field to verify that you typed the password correctly. If you do not re-enter the correct password, an error message is displayed).5. Click on the Create button to add this administrator ID to the list.6. Click the Save button if you wish to make your changes permanent.See AlsoAdmin PrivilegesExternal RadiusGlobal SettingsInternal RadiusManagement Control

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 233Admin PrivilegesThis window provides a detailed level of control over the privileges of AP administrators. Administrators may be assigned one of eight Privilege Levels. You may define the privilege level of each major feature (Configuration Section) that may be configured on the AP. For example, say that you set the privilege level to 4 for Reboot AP, Security, Radius Server, and SNMP, and you leave all other configuration sections at the default privilege level of 1. In this case, any administrator with a privilege level of 4 or higher may perform any operation on the AP, while an administrator with a privilege level lower than 4 but at least 1 may perform any operation except those whose level was set to 4. An error message will be displayed if an operation is attempted without a sufficient privilege level. Figure 134. Admin Privileges

Wireless Access Point234 Configuring the Wireless APPrivilege level 0 is read-only. As a minimum, all administrators have permission for read access to all areas of AP configuration. Higher privilege levels may be used to define additional privileges for specific configuration sections. If you are using an Admin RADIUS server to define administrator accounts, please see “RADIUS Vendor Specific Attribute (VSA) for Xirrus” on page 532 to set the privilege level for each administrator.Procedure for Configuring Admin Privileges1. Privilege Level Names (optional): You may assign a Name to each Privilege Level. The name may be used to describe the access granted by this level. By default, levels 0 and 1 are named read-only and read-write, respectively, and levels 2 through 7 have the same name as their level number.2. Privilege Levels: Use this section to assign a Minimum Privilege Levelto selected Configuration Sections as desired. By default, all sections are assigned level 1. When you select a higher privilege level for a configuration section, then only administrators who have at least that privilege level will be able to make configuration changes to that section. 3. You may click ^ at the bottom of any row to toggle the values in the entire column to either on or off. 4. Click the Save button if you wish to make your changes permanent.See AlsoExternal RadiusGroupsAdmin ManagementAdmin RADIUSSecurity

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 235Admin RADIUSThis window allows you to set up authentication of network administrators via RADIUS. Using RADIUS to control administrator accounts for logging in to APs has these benefits: zCentralized control of administrator accounts. zLess effort — you don't have to set up user names and passwords on each AP; just enter them once on the RADIUS server and then all of the APs can pull from the RADIUS server. zEnforced policies — you may set password rules (e.g., passwords must contain at least one number and be at least 12 characters in length), and you may set expiration times for passwords. Admin RADIUS settings override any local administrator accounts configured on the Admin Management window. If you have Admin RADIUS enabled, all administrator authentication is done via the configured RADIUS servers. The only exception to this is when you are connected via the Console port (using CLI). If you are using the Console port, the AP will authenticate administrators using accounts configured on the Admin Management window first, and then use the RADIUS servers. This provides a safety net to be ensure that you are not completely locked out of an AP if the RADIUS server is down.About Creating Admin Accounts on the RADIUS Server Permissions for RADIUS administrator accounts are controlled by the RADIUS Xirrus-Admin-Role attribute. This is a Vendor Specific Attribute (VSA). To define the privileges permitted to an administrator account, set the value of its Xirrus-Admin-Role attribute to the desired Privilege Level Name string, as defined in “Admin Privileges” on page 233. For more information about the RADIUS VSAs used by Xirrus, see “RADIUS Vendor Specific Attribute (VSA) for Xirrus” on page 532. When configuring administrator accounts on the RADIUS server, you must observe the same restrictions for length and legal characters as when creating these accounts on the AP using the Admin Management window: the user name and password must be between 5 and 50 characters, inclusive.

Wireless Access Point236 Configuring the Wireless APFigure 135. Admin RADIUS Procedure for Configuring Admin RADIUS Use this window to enable/disable administrator authentication via RADIUS, and to set up primary and secondary servers to use for authentication of administrators attempting to log in to the AP. 1. Admin RADIUS Settings: a. Enable Admin RADIUS: Click Yes to enable the use of RADIUS to authenticate administrators logging in to the AP. You will need to specify the RADIUS server(s) to be used. b. Authentication Type: Select the protocol used for authentication of administrators, CHAP or PAP (the default). •Password Authentication Protocol (PAP), is a simple protocol. PAP transmits ASCII passwords over the network “in the clear” (unencrypted) and is therefore considered insecure. •Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) is a more secure protocol. The login request is sent using a one-way hash function.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 237c. Timeout (seconds): Define the maximum idle time (in seconds) before the RADIUS server’s session times out. The default is 600 seconds.2. Admin RADIUS Primary Server: This is the RADIUS server that you intend to use as your primary server.a. Host Name / IP Address: Enter the IP address or domain name of this external RADIUS server.b. Port Number: Enter the port number of this RADIUS server. The default is 1812.c. Shared Secret / Verify Secret: Enter the shared secret that this RADIUS server will be using, then re-enter the shared secret to verify that you typed it correctly.3. Admin RADIUS Secondary Server (optional): If desired, enter an alternative external RADIUS server. If the primary RADIUS server becomes unreachable, the AP will “failover” to the secondary RADIUS server (defined here).a. Host Name / IP Address: Enter the IP address or domain name of this RADIUS server.b. Port Number: Enter the port number of this RADIUS server. The default is 1812.c. Shared Secret / Verify Secret: Enter the shared secret that this RADIUS server will be using, then re-enter the shared secret to verify that you typed it correctly.#The shared secret that you define must match the secret used by the RADIUS server.

Wireless Access Point238 Configuring the Wireless APManagement ControlThis window allows you to enable or disable the AP management interfaces and set their inactivity time-outs. The range is 300 (default) to 100,000 seconds. Figure 136. Management Control Procedure for Configuring Management Control1. Management Settings:a. Maximum login attempts allowed (1-255): After this number of consecutive failing administrator login attempts via ssh or telnet, the Failed login retry period is enforced. The default is 3. b. Failed login retry period (0-65535 seconds): After the maximum number (defined above) of consecutive failing administrator login attempts via ssh or telnet, the administrator’s IP address is denied access to the AP for the specified period of time (in seconds). The default is 0. c. Pre-login Banner: Text that you enter here will be displayed below the WMI login prompt. (Figure 137) Click the Submit button when done typing. If you wish to display more than 256 characters of text (for instance, to display usage restrictions for the wireless network), you may

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 239upload a text file. Click Choose File and browse to the file. Click Upload when done. Figure 137. Pre-login Bannerd. Post-login Banner: Text that you enter here will be displayed in a message box after a user logs in to the WMI. If you wish to display more than 256 characters of text, upload a text file. Click Choose File and browse to the file, then click Upload.

Wireless Access Point240 Configuring the Wireless APFigure 138. Management Transports2. SSHa. On/Off: Choose On to enable management of the AP over a Secure Shell (SSH-2) connection, or Off to disable this feature. Be aware that only SSH-2 connections are supported by the AP. SSH clients used for connecting to the AP must be configured to use SSH-2. b. Connection Timeout 30-100000 (Seconds): Enter a value in this field to define the timeout (in seconds) before your SSH connection is disconnected. The value you enter here must be between 30 seconds and 100,000 seconds.c. Port: Enter a value in this field to define the port used by SSH. The default port is 22.3. Telnet:a. On/Off: Choose On to enable AP management over a Telnet connection, or Off to disable this feature. SSH offers a more secure connection than Telnet, and is recommended over Telnet. b. Connection Timeout 30-100000 (Seconds): Enter a value in this field to define the timeout (in seconds) before your Telnet connection is

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 241disconnected. The value you enter here must be between 30 seconds and 100,000 seconds.c. Port: Enter a value in this field to define the port used by Telnet. The default port is 23.4. XirconThe Xircon utility connects to Xirrus APs that do not have a physical console port, or whose console port is not accessible. Please see “Securing Low Level Access to the AP” on page 81 for more information about Xircon. You can enable or disable Xircon access to the AP as instructed below. a. On/Off: Choose On to enable Xircon access to the AP at the ArrayOS(CLI) and Xirrus Boot Loader (XBL) levels, or Off to disable access at both levels. Xircon access is On by default. b. ArrayOS only: Choose this radio button to enable Xircon access at the ArrayOS level only (i.e., Xircon can access CLI only). Access to the AP at the Xirrus Boot Loader (XBL) level is disabled. c. Boot only: Choose this radio button to enable Xircon access at the Xirrus Boot Loader (XBL) level only. ArrayOS level (CLI) access to the AP is disabled. d. Connection Timeout 30-100000 (Seconds): Enter a value in this field to define the timeout (in seconds) before your Xircon connection is disconnected. The value you enter here must be between 30 seconds and 100,000 seconds.e. Port: Enter a value in this field to define the port used by Xircon. The default port is 22612.!Warning: If you disable Xircon access completely on models that have no console port, you must ensure that you do not lose track of the username and password to log in to CLI/WMI! There is no way to recover from a lost password, other than returning the AP to Xirrus.

Wireless Access Point242 Configuring the Wireless AP5. Consolea. On/Off: Choose On to enable management of the AP via a serial connection, or choose Off to disable this feature.b. Connection Timeout 30-100000 (Seconds): Enter a value in this field to define the timeout (in seconds) before your serial connection is disconnected. The value you enter here must be between 30 seconds and 100,000 seconds.6. HTTPSa. Connection Timeout 30-100000 (Seconds): Enter a value in this field to define the timeout (in seconds) before your HTTPS connection is disconnected. The value you enter here must be between 30 seconds and 100,000 seconds. Management via HTTPS (i.e., the Web Management Interface) cannot be disabled on this window. To disable management over HTTPS, you must use the Command Line Interface. b. Port: Enter a value in this field to define the port used by SSH. The default port is 443.7. Management ModesFigure 139. Management Modes

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 243a. Network Assurance: Click the On button to enable this mode. Network assurance checks network connectivity to each server that you configure, such as the NTP server, RADIUS servers, SNMP trap hosts, etc. By proactively identifying network resources that are unavailable, the network manager can be alerted of problems potentially before end-users notice an issue. The distributed intelligence of APs provides this monitoring at multiple points across the network, adding to the ability to isolate the problem and expedite the resolutionConnectivity is checked when you configure a server. If a newly configured server is unreachable, you will be notified directly and a Syslog entry is created. Configured servers are checked once per Period which by default is 300 seconds (five minutes). Servers are checked regardless of whether they are configured as IP addresses or host names. If a server becomes unreachable, a Syslog message is generated. When the server again becomes reachable, another Syslog message is generated. To view the status of all configured servers checked by this feature, please see “Network Assurance” on page 113.b. PCI Audit Mode: Click the On button to enable this mode, which is provided as an aid to setting up APs to pass PCI DSS audit requirements. In PCI Audit Mode, the AP checks whether its configuration is appropriate for auditing PCI DSS wireless security. This mode does not change any other settings, but will inform you of any incorrect settings that exist. Furthermore, the AP will monitor changes that you make to its configuration in CLI or the WMI. PCI Mode will warn you (and issue a Syslog message) if the change is inappropriate for PCI DSS. A warning is issued when a non-compliant change is first applied to the AP, and also if you attempt to save a configuration that is non-compliant. Use this command in conjunction with “The Xirrus AP PCI Compliance Configuration” on page 587 to ensure that you are using the AP in accordance with the

Wireless Access Point244 Configuring the Wireless APPCI DSS requirements. For more information, see “Auditing PCI DSS” on page 585.The pci-audit command checks items such as: •Telnet is disabled.•Admin RADIUS is enabled (admin login authentication is via RADIUS server).•An external Syslog server is in use. •All SSIDs must set encryption to WPA or better (which also enforces 802.1x authentication)c. FIPS 140-2, Level 2 Security: Please see “Implementing FIPS Security” on page 591 for more information, including step-by-step instructions for proceeding to implement FIPS Level 2 Security requirements on the AP.Click the On button to enable FIPS. This will perform all of the setting changes necessary to make the AP comply with FIPS requirements. A message is displayed showing the changes that were performed. The AP continues to enforce FIPS requirements by preventing you from making non-compliant configuration changes. Click the Off button to stop enforcing FIPS requirements. Note that when you enable FIPS, the AP does not save your previous settings, and it will not restore them if you click the Off button. If you think you may wish to disable FIPS and restore your previous configuration at some later time, use Set Restore Point to save a copy of your configuration before enabling FIPS (see Step 4 on page 419 in Using Tools on the Wireless AP). d. Spanning Tree Protocol: this protocol is used in Layer 2 networks to turn off ports when necessary to prevent network loops. It is Off by default, and is turned on automatically if you are using WDS to interconnect APs using wireless links. Use the On button to enable spanning tree if your network topology requires it. See “Spanning Tree Status” on page 109.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 2458. HTTPS (X.509) Certificate,Figure 140. HTTPS (X.509) Certificatea. Import Xirrus Authority into Browser: This feature imports the Xirrus Certificate Authority (CA) into your browser (for a discussion, please see “Certificates and Connecting Securely to the WMI” on page 229). Click the link (xirrus-ca.crt), and then click Open to view or install the current Xirrus CA certificate. Click Install Certificate to start your browser’s Certificate Install Wizard. We recommend that you use this process to install Xirrus as a root authority in your browser. When you assign a Host Name to your AP using the Express Setup window, then the next time you reboot the AP (or restart the HTTPS #ArrayOS releases 6.5 and above only support 2048-bit certificates, while previous releases only support 1024-bit certificates. When ArrayOS is upgraded to 6.5 or above, a new self-signed certificate will be automatically generated. If you have imported a previous (pre-Release 6.5 version) Xirrus CA-signed certificate into your browser, the trusted Xirrus CA needs to be updated. Delete the current Xirrus CA in the browser. Upgrade the AP to release 6.5 or above and then download the new xirrus-ca.crt file and import it into the browser as a trusted CA, as explained below.If you are using a certificate signed by an external CA, its use is not impacted in any way by this change.

Wireless Access Point246 Configuring the Wireless APservice by turning it off and on again using the CLI), it automatically creates a security certificate for that host name. That certificate uses Xirrus as the signing authority. Thus, in order to avoid having certificate errors on your browser when using WMI:•You must have assigned a host name to the AP and rebooted at some time after that.•Use Import Xirrus Authority into Browser•Access WMI by using the host name of the AP rather than its IP address. b. HTTPS (X.509) Certificate Signed By: This read-only field shows the signing authority for the current certificate.9. External Certificate AuthorityFigure 141. External Certificate Authority

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 247This step and Step 10 allow you to obtain a certificate from an external authority and install it on an AP. “Using an External Certificate Authority” on page 231 discusses reasons for using an external CA. For example, to obtain and install a certificate from VeriSign on the AP, follow these steps:•If you don’t already have the certificate from the external (non-Xirrus) Certificate Authority, see Step 10 to create a request for a certificate. •Use option (a) to review the request and copy its text to send to Ver iS ign. •When you receive the new certificate from VeriSign, upload it to the AP using option (b). External Certification Authority has the following options:a. Download Certificate Signing Request: After creating a certificate signing request (.csr file — Step 10), click the View button to review it. If it is satisfactory, click the name of the .csr file to display the text of the request. You can then copy this text and use it as required by the CA. You may also click on the filename of the .csr file to download it to your local computer. b. Upload Signed Certificate: To use a custom certificate signed by an authority other than Xirrus, use the Browse button to locate the certificate file, then click Upload to copy it to the AP. The AP’s web server will be restarted and will pick up the new certificate. This will terminate any current web sessions, and you will need to reconnect and re-login to the AP. 10. To create a Certificate Signing Request a. Fill in the fields in this section: Common Name, Organization Name, Organizational Unit Name, Locality (City), State or Province, Country Name, and Email Address. Spaces may be used in any of the fields, except for Common Name, Country Name, or Email

Wireless Access Point248 Configuring the Wireless APAddress. Click the Create button to create the certificate signing request. See Step 9 above to use this request. 11. Click the Save button if you wish to make your changes permanent.See AlsoInterfaces - to enable/disable management over an Ethernet interfaceGlobal Settings - to enable/disable management over IAPs Admin ManagementExternal RadiusGlobal SettingsInternal RadiusAccess Control ListSecurityAccess Control ListThis window allows you to enable or disable the use of the global Access Control List (ACL), which controls whether a station with a particular MAC address may associate to the AP. You may create station access control list entries and delete existing entries, and control the type of list. There is only one global ACL, and you may select whether its type is an Allow List or a Deny List, or whether use of the list is disabled. Figure 142. Access Control List

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 249There is also a per-SSID ACL (see “Per-SSID Access Control List” on page 299). If the same MAC address is listed in both the global ACL and in an SSID’s ACL, and if either ACL would deny that station access to that SSID, then access will be denied.Procedure for Configuring Access Control Lists1. Access Control List Type: Select Disabled to disable use of the Access Control List, or select the ACL type — either Allow List or Deny List. •Allow List: Only allows the listed MAC addresses to associate to the AP. All others are denied.•Deny List: Denies the listed MAC addresses permission to associate to the AP. All others are allowed.2. MAC Address: If you want to add a MAC address to the ACL, enter the new MAC address here, then click on the Add button. The MAC address is added to the ACL. You may use a wildcard (*) for one or more digits to match a range of addresses. You may create up to 1000 entries. 3. Delete: You can delete selected MAC addresses from this list by clicking their Delete buttons.4. Click the Save button if you wish to make your changes permanent.See AlsoExternal RadiusGlobal SettingsInternal RadiusManagement ControlSecurityStation Status Windows (list of stations that have been detected by the AP) #In addition to these lists, other authentication methods (for example, RADIUS) are still enforced for users.

Wireless Access Point250 Configuring the Wireless APGlobal SettingsThis window allows you to establish the security parameters for your wireless network, including WEP, WPA, WPA2 and RADIUS authentication. When finished, click the Save button if you wish to make your changes permanent.For additional information about wireless network security, refer to “Security Planning” on page 56 and “Understanding Security” on page 226.Figure 143. Global Settings (Security)Procedure for Configuring Network Security1. Authentication Server Mode: Choose the type of Authentication Server that you will use for authenticating wireless users: •Internal RADIUS defines wireless user accounts locally on the AP. See “Internal Radius” on page 258.•External RADIUS defines wireless user accounts on a RADIUS server external to the AP. See “External Radius” on page 254.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 251•Active Directory defines wireless user accounts on an Active Directory server external to the AP. See “Active Directory” on page 260. WPA Settings These settings are used if the WPA or WPA2 encryption type is selected on the SSIDs >SSID Management window or the Express Setup window (on this window, encryption type is set in the SSID Settings: Wireless Security field). 2. TKIP Enabled: Choose Yes to enable TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol), or choose No to disable TKIP.3. AES Enabled: Choose Yes to enable AES (Advanced Encryption Standard), or choose No to disable AES. If both AES and TKIP are enabled, the station determines which will be used. 4. WPA Group Rekey Time (seconds): Enter a value to specify the group rekey time (in seconds). The default is Never.5. WPA Preshared Key / Verify Key: If you enabled PSK, enter a passphrase here, then re-enter the passphrase to verify that you typed it correctly.#TKIP encryption does not support high throughput rates for 802.11n, per the IEEE 802.11n specification. TKIP should never be used for WDS links on APs.

Wireless Access Point252 Configuring the Wireless APWEP SettingsThese settings are used if the WEP encryption type is selected on the SSIDs > SSID Management window or the Express Setup window (on this window, encryption type is set in the SSID Settings: Wireless Security field). Click the Show Cleartext button to make the text that you type in to the Key fields visible.6. Encryption Key 1 / Verify Key 1:Key Size: Key length is automatically computed based on the Encryption Key that you enter•5 ASCII characters (10 hex) for 40 bits (WEP-64)•13 ASCII characters for (26 hex) 104 bits (WEP-128)Encryption Key 1 / Verify Key 1: Enter an encryption key in ASCII or hexadecimal. The ASCII and translated hexadecimal values will appear to the right if you selected the Show Cleartext button. Re-enter the key to verify that you typed it correctly. You may include special ASCII characters, except for the double quote symbol (“). 7. Encryption Key 2 to 4/ Verify Key 2 to 4/ Key Mode/Length (optional): If desired, enter up to four encryption keys, in the same way that you entered the first key.8. Default Key: Choose which key you want to assign as the default key. Make your selection from the pull-down list.9. Click the Save button if you wish to make your changes permanent.#WEP encryption does not support high throughput rates or features like frame aggregation or block acknowledgments for 802.11n, per the IEEE 802.11n specification. WEP should never be used for WDS links on APs. #After configuring network security, the configuration must be applied to an SSID for the new functionality to take effect.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 253See AlsoAdmin ManagementExternal RadiusInternal RadiusAccess Control ListManagement ControlSecuritySecurity PlanningSSID Management

Wireless Access Point254 Configuring the Wireless APExternal Radius This window allows you to define the parameters of an external RADIUS server for user authentication. To set up an external RADIUS server, you must choose External Radius as the Authentication Server Mode in “Global Settings” on page 250.Figure 144. External RADIUS ServerIf you want to include user group membership in the RADIUS account information for users, see “Understanding Groups” on page 304. User groups allow you to easily apply a uniform configuration to a user on the AP.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 255About Creating User Accounts on the RADIUS Server An attribute of user (wireless client) accounts is controlled by RADIUS Vendor Specific Attributes (VSAs) defined by Xirrus. In particular, use the VSA namedXirrus-Admin-Role to set the privilege level for an account. For more information about the RADIUS VSAs used by Xirrus, see “RADIUS Vendor Specific Attribute (VSA) for Xirrus” on page 532. Procedure for Configuring an External RADIUS Server1. Primary Server: This is the external RADIUS server that you intend to use as your primary server.a. Host Name / IP Address: Enter the IP address or domain name of this external RADIUS server.b. Port Number: Enter the port number of this external RADIUS server. The default is 1812.c. Shared Secret / Verify Secret: Enter the shared secret that this external RADIUS server will be using, then re-enter the shared secret to verify that you typed it correctly.2. Secondary Server (optional): If desired, enter an alternative external RADIUS server. If the primary RADIUS server becomes unreachable, the AP will “failover” to the secondary RADIUS server (defined here).a. Host Name / IP Address: Enter the IP address or domain name of this external RADIUS server.b. Port Number: Enter the port number of this external RADIUS server. The default is 1812.c. Shared Secret / Verify Secret: Enter the shared secret that this external RADIUS server will be using, then re-enter the shared secret to verify that you typed it correctly.#The shared secret that you define must match the secret used by the external RADIUS server.

Wireless Access Point256 Configuring the Wireless AP3. Settings (RADIUS Dynamic Authorization): Some RADIUS servers have the ability to contact the AP (referred to as an NAS, see below) to terminate a user with a Disconnect Message (DM). Or RADIUS may send a Change-of-Authorization (CoA) Message to the AP to change a user’s privileges due to changing session authorizations. This implements RFC 5176—Dynamic Authorization Extensions to RADIUS. a. Timeout (seconds): Define the maximum idle time before the RADIUS server’s session times out. The default is 600 seconds.b. DAS Port: RADIUS will use the DAS port on the AP for Dynamic Authorization Extensions to RADIUS. The default port is 3799.c. DAS Event-Timestamp: The Event-Timestamp Attribute provides a form of protection against replay attacks. If you select Required, both the RADIUS server and the AP will use the Event-Timestamp Attribute and check that it is current within the DAS Time Window. If the Event-Timestamp is not current, then the DM or CoA Message will be silently discarded. d. DAS Time Window: This is the time window used with the DAS Event-Timestamp, above. e. NAS Identifier: From the point of view of a RADIUS server, the AP is a client, also called a Network Access Server (NAS). Enter the NAS Identifier (IP address) that the RADIUS servers expect the AP to use — normally the IP address of the AP’s Gigabit1 port. 4. RADIUS Attribute Formatting Settings: Some RADIUS servers, especially older versions, expect information to be sent to them in a legacy format. These settings are provided for the unusual situation that requires special formatting of specific types of information sent to the RADIUS server. Most users will not need to change these settings.a. Called-Station-Id Attribute Format: Define the format of the Called-Station-Id RADIUS attribute sent from the AP—BSSID:SSID(default) or BSSID. This identifies the AP that is attempting to authenticate a client. BSSID is the MAC address of the IAP receiving the client signal. The BSSID:SSID option additionally identifies the

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 257SSID to which the client wishes to connect. If your site is using Purple WiFi, you must use Ethernet-MAC, which identifies the AP using its wired network MAC address rather than a particular IAP. See “Web Page Redirect for Purple WiFi Venues” on page 294.b. Station MAC Format: Define the format of the Station MAC RADIUS attribute sent from the AP—lower-case or upper-case, hyphenated or not. The default is lower-case, not hyphenated. 5. Accounting Settings: Note that RADIUS accounting start packets sent by the AP will include the client station's Framed-IP-Address attribute.The RADIUS attribute Type-50 Acct-Multi-Session-Id is included in all RADIUS accounting messages generated by ArrayOS. This attribute is used, for example, by Aruba ClearPass to facilitate functions such as onboarding and guest access when stations are roaming between APs. a. Accounting Interval (seconds): Specify how often Interim records are to be sent to the server. The default is 300 seconds.b. Primary Server Host Name / IP Address: Enter the IP address or domain name of the primary RADIUS accounting server that you intend to use.c. Primary Port Number: Enter the port number of the primary RADIUS accounting server. The default is 1813.d. Primary Shared Secret / Verify Secret: Enter the shared secret that the primary RADIUS accounting server will be using, then re-enter the shared secret to verify that you typed it correctly.e. Secondary Server Host Name / IP Address (optional): If desired, enter an IP address or domain name for an alternative RADIUS accounting server. If the primary server becomes unreachable, the AP will “failover” to this secondary server (defined here).f. Secondary Port Number: If using a secondary accounting server, enter its port number. The default is 1813.

Wireless Access Point258 Configuring the Wireless APg. Secondary Shared Secret / Verify Secret: If using a secondary accounting server, enter the shared secret that it will be using, then re-enter the shared secret to verify that you typed it correctly.6. Click the Save button if you wish to make your changes permanent.See AlsoAdmin ManagementGlobal SettingsInternal RadiusAccess Control ListManagement ControlSecurityUnderstanding GroupsInternal Radius This window allows you to define the parameters for the AP’s internal RADIUS server for user authentication. However, the internal RADIUS server will only authenticate wireless clients that want to associate to the AP. This can be useful if an external RADIUS server is not available. To set up the internal RADIUS server, you must choose Internal Radius as the Authentication Server Mode in “Global Settings” on page 250.Figure 145. Internal RADIUS Server

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 259Procedure for Creating a New User1. User Name: Enter the name of the user that you want to authenticate to the internal RADIUS server. You may enter up to 1000 users (up to 256 on the XR-500 Series, or up to 480 on two-radio APs).2. SSID Restriction: (Optional) If you want to restrict this user to associating to a particular SSID, choose an SSID from the pull-down list.3. User Group: (Optional) If you want to make this user a member of a previously defined user group, choose a group from the pull-down list. This will apply all of the user group’s settings to the user. See “Understanding Groups” on page 304. 4. Password: (Optional) Enter a password for the user.5. Verify: (Optional) Retype the user password to verify that you typed it correctly.6. Click on the Create button to add the new user to the list.Procedure for Managing Existing Users1. SSID Restriction: (Optional) If you want to restrict a user to associating to a particular SSID, choose an SSID from its pull-down list.2. User Group: (Optional) If you want to change the user’s group, choose a group from the pull-down list. This will apply all of the user group’s settings to the user. See “Understanding Groups” on page 304. 3. Password: (Optional) Enter a new password for the selected user.#Clients using PEAP may have difficulty authenticating to the AP using the Internal RADIUS server due to invalid security certificate errors. To prevent this problem, the user may disable the Validate Server Certificateoption on the station. Do this by displaying the station’s wireless devices and then displaying the properties of the desired wireless interface. In the security properties, disable Validate server certificate. In some systems, this may be found by setting the authentication method to PEAP and changing the associated settings.

Wireless Access Point260 Configuring the Wireless AP4. Verify Password: (Optional) Retype the user password to verify that you typed it correctly.5. If you want to delete one or more users, click their Delete buttons.6. Click the Save button if you wish to make your changes permanent.See AlsoAdmin ManagementExternal RadiusGlobal SettingsAccess Control ListManagement ControlSecurityUnderstanding GroupsActive DirectoryThis window allows you to configure 802.1x user authentication without needing to set up and use an External Radius server. The AP performs authentication by utilizing an Active Directory server that you have deployed within your network domain. This window configures the settings required to connect to the Active Directory server. Additionally, Active Directory Test Tools are provided to ease the process of validating proper communication between the Active Directory server and the AP. To use the Active Directory settings on this page you must choose Active Directory as the Authentication Server Mode in “Global Settings” on page 250. #XR-520/XR-1000 Series APs do not support Active Directory. You will receive an error message if you attempt to configure this feature.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 261Figure 146. Active Directory Server Procedure for Use of an Active Directory Server1. Choose Active Directory as the Authentication Server Mode in “Global Settings” on page 250.2. Domain Administrator: Enter the administrator account name for access to the domain controller. The AP will use this (together with the password) to create a machine account on the domain for the AP. This can be the name of any account that can join a machine to the domain. 3. Domain Password: The password for the Domain Administrator entered above. 4. Domain Controller: Enter the hostname to access the domain controller. This cannot be entered as an IP address. The AP will check that it is able to access the controller and place a checkmark to the right of the entry to indicate that it has been validated. Note that the checkmark only appears

Wireless Access Point262 Configuring the Wireless APafter you have made a change requiring validation (i.e., entering a new hostname or changing an existing entry to a different hostname). If you return to this page at a later time, the checkmark will not be present.5. Workgroup/Domain: Enter the Pre-Windows 2000 Domain name. This can be found by opening the Active Directory Users and Computers. Right click the domain in the left hand window and select Properties. This will display the Domain name that should be entered. Figure 147. Finding the Domain Name from Active Directory6. Realm: Realm name (may be the same as the domain name). Workgroupand Realm are both required. To find the Realm, open a command window on the server and type echo %userdnsdomain% This will display the Realm.7. Click Apply Active Directory Settings to use these settings.8. You must click Join Domain to ask the domain controller to join the AP to the domain. The AP is added to the list of computers in the workgroup. The status of the request will be displayed in the area below the Test

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 263Tools. The domain controller will give the AP a secret that may be used as a key to fetch information. The secret may be checked with the Check Secret test tool, below. You may click Leave Domain to ask the domain controller to remove the AP from the domain and revoke its secret. 9. You may use the tools below to check that the AP is able to access and use the Active Directory successfully, or to troubleshoot any problems. Active Directory Test Tools10. Display Status: Displays detailed status information for the Active Directory. 11. List Groups: Shows the groups defined in the Active Directory for this Workgroup. 12. List Users: Shows the users defined in the Active Directory for this Workgroup. 13. Check Secret: The continued validity of the secret granted by Join Domain may be checked with this test tool. 14. Check Authentication: Enter a User name and Password. Select the Typeof encryption to be used (MSCHAP, NTLM, PAP, or PEAP-MSCHAPv2), to check that it will work with the Active Directory server. Then click Check Authentication to validate that the AP can authenticate the user with the selected type of encryption. See AlsoAdmin ManagementExternal RadiusInternal RadiusSecurityUnderstanding Groups

Wireless Access Point264 Configuring the Wireless APRogue Control ListThis window allows you to set up a control list for rogue APs, based on a type that you define. You may classify rogue APs as blocked, so that the AP will take steps to prevent stations from associating with the blocked AP. See “About Blocking Rogue APs” on page 376. The AP can keep up to 5000 list entries. Figure 148. Rogue Control ListProcedure for Establishing Rogue AP Control1. Rogue BSSID/SSID: Enter the BSSID, SSID, or manufacturer string to match for the new rogue control entry. The Match Only radio buttons specify what to match (e.g., the MAC address, SSID, or manufacturer). You may use the “*” character as a wildcard to match any string at this position. For example, 00:0f:7d:* matches any string that starts with 00:0f:7d:. Xirrus APs start with 00:0f:7d: or 50:60:28:00:0f:7d:*. By default, the Rogue Control List contains two entries that match 00:0f:7d:* and 50:60:28:* and apply the classification Known to all Xirrus APs.2. Rogue Control Classification: Enter the classification for the specified rogue AP(s), either Blocked, Known or Approved.#The RF Monitor > Intrusion Detection window provides an alternate method for classifying rogues. You can list all Unknown stations and select all the rogues that you’d like to set to Known or Approved, rather than entering the SSID/BSSID as described below. See “Rogues” on page 120.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 2653. Match Only: Select the match criterion to compare the Rogue BSSID/SSID string against: BSSID, Manufacturer, or SSID. The BSSID field contains the MAC address. 4. Click Create to add this rogue AP to the Rogue Control List.5. Rogue Control List: If you want to edit the control type for a rogue AP, just click the radio button for the new type for the entry: Blocked, Knownor Approved.6. To delete rogue APs from the list, click their Delete buttons.7. Click the Save button if you wish to make your changes permanent.See AlsoNetwork MapRoguesSSIDsSSID ManagementOAuth 2.0 ManagementThis window displays a list of tokens granted by the AP for access to its RESTful API (see “API Documentation” on page 428 for a description of the features available in the API). OAuth 2.0 is used to provide the tokens. The list will be blank until tokens have been issued as described below. You may revoke (delete) existing tokens from the list, if desired. Xirrus APs use the OAuth 2.0 standard’s client credential grant model. This allows you to use administrator account credentials to obtain a token to access RESTful API on an individual AP. Please note that the AP will issue only onetoken on behalf on of any administrator account at any given time. If you have a need for multiple tokens, then the AP will need multiple administrator accounts.Follow the steps below to obtain a token and use the RESTful API.

Wireless Access Point266 Configuring the Wireless APFigure 149. OAuth 2.0 Management - Token ListProcedure for Obtaining a Token and Accessing RESTful API on the AP1. Present User Credentials for a Permanent TokenA user-developed application must register by presenting the following information to the URL below:https://[AP hostname or IP address]/oauth/authorize •grant_type: password•username: username of an administrator account on the AP.•client_id: username of an administrator account on the AP(username and client_id must match).•password: password for the same administrator account on the APThe OAuth Authorization API provides a permanent token that the application may use to access the RESTful API. This token remains valid until the administrator revokes the token on the OAuth 2.0 Managementpage, unless the token file somehow becomes corrupted or is removed from the AP’s file system. The token will be removed if the original account associated with it is deleted. 2. Access the RESTful APIOnce registration is completed and a permanent token has been provided, your application may access the API using the client_id and the token at the following URL: https://[AP hostname or IP address]/api/v3/[api-name] 

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 267Please see “API Documentation” on page 428 for a description of the features available in the API.

Wireless Access Point268 Configuring the Wireless APSSIDsThis status-only window allows you to review SSID (Service Set IDentifier) assignments. It includes the SSID name, whether or not an SSID is visible on the network, any security and QoS parameters defined for each SSID, associated VLAN IDs, radio availability, and DHCP pools defined per SSID. Click on an SSID’s name to jump to the edit page for the SSID. There are no configuration options available on this page, but if you are experiencing problems or reviewing SSID management parameters, you may want to print this page for your records.Figure 150. SSIDs #For a complete discussion of implementing Voice over Wi-Fi on the AP, see the Voice over Wireless Application Note in the Xirrus Resource Center.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 269The read-only Limits section of the SSIDs window allows you to review any limitations associated with your defined SSIDs. For example, this window shows the current state of an SSID (enabled or not), how much SSID and station traffic is allowed, time on and time off, days on and off, and whether each SSID is currently active or inactive.For information to help you understand SSIDs and how multiple SSIDs are managed by the Wireless AP, go to “Understanding SSIDs” on page 269 and the Multiple SSIDs section of “Frequently Asked Questions” on page 522. For a description of how QoS operates on the AP, see “Understanding QoS Priority on the Wireless AP” on page 271.SSIDs are managed with the following windows:z“SSID Management” on page 277z“Active IAPs” on page 298 z“Per-SSID Access Control List” on page 299z“Honeypots” on page 300z“Personal Wi-Fi” on page 302 SSIDs are discussed in the following topics:z“Understanding SSIDs” on page 269z“Understanding QoS Priority on the Wireless AP” on page 271z“High Density 2.4G Enhancement—Honeypot SSID” on page 275Understanding SSIDsThe SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a unique identifier that wireless networking devices use to establish and maintain wireless connectivity. Multiple access points on a network or sub-network can use the same SSIDs. SSIDs are case-sensitive and can contain up to 32 alphanumeric characters (do not include spaces when defining SSIDs).Multiple SSIDsA BSSID (Basic SSID) refers to an individual access point radio and its associated clients. The identifier is the MAC address of the access point radio that forms the

Wireless Access Point270 Configuring the Wireless APBSS. A group of BSSs can be formed to allow stations in one BSS to communicate to stations in another BSS via a backbone that interconnects each access point.The Extended Service Set (ESS) refers to the group of BSSIDs that are grouped together to form one ESS. The ESSID (often referred to as SSID or “wireless network name”) identifies the Extended Service Set. Clients must associate to a single ESS at any given time. Clients ignore traffic from other Extended Service Sets that do not have the same SSID.Legacy access points typically support one SSID per access point. Wireless APs support the ability to define and use multiple SSIDs simultaneously.Using SSIDsThe creation of different wireless network names allows system administrators to separate types of users with different requirements. The following policies can be tied to an SSID:zThe wireless security mode needed to join this SSID.zThe wireless Quality of Service (QoS) desired for this SSID.zThe wired VLAN associated with this SSID.As an example, one SSID named accounting might require the highest level of security, while another named guests might have low security requirements.Another example may define an SSID named voice that supports voice over Wireless LAN phones with the highest Quality of Service (QoS) definition. This SSID might also forward traffic to specific VLANs on the wired network.See AlsoSSID ManagementSSIDsUnderstanding SSIDs

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 271Understanding QoS Priority on the Wireless AP Figure 151. Four Traffic ClassesThe Wireless AP’s Quality of Service Priority feature (QoS) allows traffic to be prioritized according to your requirements. For example, you typically assign the highest priority to voice traffic, since this type of traffic requires delay to be under 10 ms. The AP has four separate queues for handling wireless traffic at different priorities, and thus it supports four traffic classes (QoS levels). #For a complete discussion of implementing Voice over Wi-Fi on the AP, see the Voice over Wireless Application Note in the Xirrus Resource Center.

Wireless Access Point272 Configuring the Wireless APFigure 152. Priority Level—IEEE 802.1p (Layer 2)IEEE802.1p uses three bits in an Ethernet frame header to define eight priority levels at the MAC level (Layer 2) for wired networks. Each data packet may be tagged with a priority level, i.e., a user priority tag. Since there are eight possible user priority levels and the AP implements four wireless QoS levels, user priorities are mapped to QoS as described below. Figure 153. Priority Level—DSCP (DiffServ - Layer 3)Differentiated Services Code Point or DiffServ (DSCP) uses 6 bits in the IPv4 or IPv6 packet header, defined in RFC2474 and RFC2475. The DSCP value classifies a Layer 3 packet to determine the Quality of Service (QoS) required. DSCP replaces the outdated Type of Service (TOS) field. The description below describes how both of these priority levels are mapped to the AP’s four traffic classes.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 273End-to-End QoS HandlingWired QoS - Ethernet Port:zEgress: Outgoing wired packets are IEEE 802.1p tagged at the Ethernet port for upstream traffic, thus enabling QoS at the edge of the network. zIngress: Incoming wired packets are assigned QoS priority based on their SSID and 802.1p tag (if any), as shown in the table below. This table follows the mapping recommended by IEEE802.11e. FROMAP QoS (Wireless) TOPriority Tag 802.1p (Wired)1 (Lowest priority) 1002 (Default) 53 (Highest priority) 6FROMPriority Tag 802.1p (Wired)TOAP QoS (Wireless) Typical Use0 0 Best Effort 11 (Lowest priority) Background — explicitly designated as low-priority and non-delay sensitive21Spare 3 0 Excellent Effort42Controlled Load52Video6 3 Voice - requires delay <10ms

Wireless Access Point274 Configuring the Wireless APWireless QoS - Radios:zEach SSID can be assigned a separate QoS priority (i.e., traffic class) from 0 to 3, where 3 is highest priority and 2 is the default. See “SSID Management” on page 277. If multiple SSIDs are used, packets from the SSID with higher priority are transmitted first. zThe AP supports IEEE802.11e Wireless QoS for downstream traffic. Higher priority packets wait a shorter time before gaining access to the air and contend less with all other 802.11 devices on a channel. zHow QoS is set for a packet in case of conflicting values: a. If an SSID has a QoS setting, and an incoming wired packet’s user priority tag is mapped to a higher QoS value, then the higher QoS value is used.b. If a group or filter has a QoS setting, this overrides the QoS value above. See “Groups” on page 304, and “Filters” on page 391. c. Voice packets have the highest priority (see Voice Support, below). d. If DSCP to QoS Mapping Mode is enabled, the IP packet is mapped to QoS level 0 to 3 as specified in the DSCP Mappings table. This value overrides any of the settings in cases a to c above. In particular, by default:•DSCP 8 is set to QoS level 1.•DSCP 40 is typically used for video traffic and is set to QoS level 2.•DSCP 48 is typically used for voice traffic and is set to QoS level 3—the highest level7 (Highest priority) 3 (Highest priority) Network controlFROMPriority Tag 802.1p (Wired)TOAP QoS (Wireless) Typical Use

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 275•All other DSCP values are set to QoS level 0 (the lowest level—Best Effort).Packet Filtering QoS classification zFilter rules can be used to redefine the QoS priority level to override defaults. See “Filter Management” on page 395. This allows the QoS priority level to be assigned based on protocol, source, or destination. Voice SupportzThe QoS priority implementation on the AP gives voice packets the highest priority to support voice applications. High Density 2.4G Enhancement—Honeypot SSIDSome situations pose problems for all wireless APs. For example, iPhones will remember every SSID and flood the airwaves with probes, even when the user doesn’t request or desire this behavior. In very high density deployments, these probes can consume a significant amount of the available wireless bandwidth. The AP “honeypot” SSID targets this problem. Simply create an SSID named honeypot (lower-case) on the AP, with no encryption or authentication (select None/Open). Once this SSID is created and enabled, it will respond to any station probe looking for a named open SSID (unencrypted and unauthenticated) that is not configured on the AP. It will make the station go through its natural authentication and association process. See “Honeypots” on page 300. The following SSIDs are excluded from being honeypotted: zExplicitly whitelisted SSIDs. See “Honeypots” on page 300.zSSIDs that are encrypted and/or authenticated.zSSIDs that are configured on this AP, whether or not they are enabled.Traffic for a station connected to the honeypot SSID may be handled in various ways using other AP features:zTraffic may be directed to WPR (captive portal) to display a splash page or offer the user the opportunity to sign in to your service (see “Web Page Redirect (Captive Portal) Configuration” on page 287); zTraffic may be filtered (see “Filters” on page 391);

Wireless Access Point276 Configuring the Wireless APzor it may be dead-ended by defining a specific dead-end VLAN on the honeypot SSID to “trap” stations (see “VLANs” on page 213). Use the honeypot feature carefully as it could interfere with legitimate SSIDs and prevent clients from associating to another available network. You may define a whitelist of allowed SSIDs which are not to be honeypotted. See “Honeypots” on page 300. Th Honey pots page also allows you to change the SSID name that is broadcast for the honeypot SSID.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 277SSID ManagementThis window allows you to manage SSIDs (create, edit, schedule, rename, and delete), assign security parameters and VLANs on a per SSID basis, and configure the Web Page Redirect (WPR captive portal) functionality. Figure 154. SSID Management Create new SSID Configure parametersConfigure WPRConfigure WPASet traffic limits / usage scheduleConfigure authentication server

Wireless Access Point278 Configuring the Wireless APProcedure for Managing SSIDs 1. New SSID: To create a new SSID, enter a new SSID name. SSID names are case sensitive and may only consist of the characters A-Z, a-z, 0-9, dash, and underscore. You may create up to 16 SSIDs (up to 8 on the XR-500 Series). You may create a special SSID named honeypot (lower-case) to reduce the amount of unnecessary traffic caused by stations probing for open SSID names that they have learned in the past—see “High Density 2.4G Enhancement—Honeypot SSID” on page 275. In this case, a Honeypot Service Whitelist Configuration section will appear below (see Step 1 on page 301). To rename an SSID or schedule a range of dates during which it may be used, see “SSID Limits and Scheduling” on page 284. SSID List (top of page)2. SSID: Shows all currently assigned SSIDs. When you create a new SSID, the SSID name appears in this table. Click any SSID in this list to select it.3. Enabled: Check this box to activate this SSID or clear it to deactivate it. Once the SSID is enabled, its availability is also controlled by settings in “SSID Limits and Scheduling” on page 284. 4. Brdcast: Check this box to make the selected SSID visible to all clients on the network. Although the Wireless AP will not broadcast SSIDs that are hidden, clients can still associate to a hidden SSID if they know the SSID name to connect to it. Clear this box if you do not want this SSID to be visible on the network.5. Band: Choose which wireless band the SSID will be beaconed on. Select either 5 GHz — 802.11an, 2.4 GHz — 802.11bgn or Both.6. VLAN ID / Number: (Optional) From the pull-down list, select a VLAN or VLAN Pool that you want this traffic to be forwarded to on the wired network. Select numeric to enter the number of a previously defined VLAN in the Number field. See “VLANs” on page 213 and “VLAN Pools” on page 215.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 2797. QoS: (Optional) Select a value in this field for QoS (Quality of Service) priority filtering. The QoS value must be one of the following: •0 — The lowest QoS priority setting, where QoS makes its best effort at filtering and prioritizing data, video and voice traffic without compromising the performance of the network. Use this setting in environments where traffic prioritization is not a concern.•1 — Medium, with QoS prioritization aggregated across all traffic types.•2 — High, normally used to give priority to video traffic.•3 — The highest QoS priority setting, normally used to give priority to voice traffic.The QoS setting you define here will prioritize wireless traffic for this SSID over other SSID traffic, as described in “Understanding QoS Priority on the Wireless AP” on page 271. The default value for this field is 2. 8. DHCP Pool: If you want to associate an internal DHCP pool to this SSID, choose the pool from the pull--down list. An internal DHCP pool must be created before it can be assigned. To create an internal DHCP pool, go to “DHCP Server” on page 200.9. DHCP Option: When this option is enabled, the AP snoops station DHCP requests and inserts relay agent information into these DHCP packets (option 82, in the CIRCUIT-ID sub-option). Information inserted includes AP MAC address and SSID name. You may use this option here or on the Tunnel Management page, but not in both places. Information is inserted as a colon-separated text string in the CIRCUIT ID value field, in this format: [AP_MAC]:[SSID][AP_MAC] length = 17 (aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff)[SSID] length = length of SSID nameExample: aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff:mySSIDNote that the MAC address uses dashes as separators, and that format isdifferent than that used for Option 82 with Tunnels.

Wireless Access Point280 Configuring the Wireless AP10. Filter List: If you wish to apply a set a filters to this SSID’s traffic, select the desired Filter List. See “Filters” on page 391. 11. Authentication: The following authentication options are available (only valid encryption/authentication combinations are offered): •Open: This option provides no authentication and is not recommended. •RADIUS MAC: Uses an external RADIUS server to authenticate stations onto the wireless network, based on the user’s MAC address. Accounting for these stations is performed according to the accounting options that you have configured specifically for this SSID or globally (see Step 13 below). •802.1x: Authenticates stations onto the wireless network via a RADIUS server using 802.1x with EAP. The RADIUS server can be internal (provided by the Wireless AP) or external. 12. Encryption: Choose the encryption that will be required — specific to this SSID — either None, WEP, WPA, WPA2 or WPA-Both. The None option provides no security and is not recommended; WPA2 provides the best Wi-Fi security. Each SSID supports only one encryption type at a time (except that WPA and WPA2 are both supported on an SSID if you select WPA-Both). If you need to support other encryption types, you must define additional SSIDs. The encryption used with WPA or WPA2 is selected in “Global Settings” on page 250. For an overview of the security options, see “Security Planning” on page 56 and “Understanding Security” on page 226. 13. Global: Check this box if you want this SSID to use the security settings established at the global level (see “Global Settings” on page 250). Clear this box if you want the settings established here to take precedence. #If this SSID is on a VLAN, the VLAN must have management turned on in order to pass CHAP authentication challenges from the client station to the RADIUS server.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 281.Figure 155. SSID Management—Encryption, Authentication, Accounting Additional sections will be displayed to allow you to configure encryption, authentication server, and RADIUS accounting settings. •The WPA Configuration encryption settings have the same parameters as those described in “Procedure for Configuring Network Security” on page 250. The U-PSK (User-PSK) Authentication settings are only used in conjunction with XMS-Cloud’s EasyPass Onboarding Portals. XMS-Cloud automatically configures this setting for an SSID when you create an Onboarding portal and you assign that SSID to the portal. Thus, you should not normally change this setting manually. Note that the User-PSK settings are only available here, on the SSID Configure Radius, AccountingSet Encryption

Wireless Access Point282 Configuring the Wireless APManagement page (i.e., they are configured per SSID rather than in Global Settings). EasyPass Onboarding facilitates “Bring Your Own Device (BYOD)” usage. XMS-Cloud’s onboarding lets you create user accounts in advance, and a user can self-register a number of devices simply by connecting to the wireless network from each device. Each user account is assigned a User-Preshared Key (U-PSK) to be used for registering each device and accessing the wireless network. U-PSK should only be enabled for an SSID that is assigned to an XMS-Cloud EasyPass Onboarding portal. XMS-Cloud will also automatically generate a unique Preshared Key for each user account.U-PSK Cache Timeout (minutes)—this local cache on the AP stores the station’s preshared key that was authenticated by the cloud. The cache saves time the next time that the station associates to the AP, since there is no need to query the U-PSK cloud server again. U-PSK Cache Timeout specifies how long the cached entry is used before it must be re-validated.U-PSK Server Error specifies what to do if the U-PSK server in the cloud cannot be accessed to check station authentication status. You may Allow station traffic if the server is unavailable, or Block it. •To configure Active Directory settings, see “Active Directory” on page 260). •The External RADIUS and Accounting settings are configured in the same way as for an external RADIUS server (see “Procedure for Configuring an External RADIUS Server” on page 255). Note that external RADIUS servers may be specified using IP addresses or domain names.14. Roaming: For this SSID, select whether to enable fast roaming between IAPs or APs at L2&L3 (Layer 2 and Layer 3), at L2 (Layer 2 only), or disable roaming (Off). You may only select fast roaming at Layers 2 and 3 if this has been selected in Global Settings. See “Understanding Fast Roaming” on page 312.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 28315. WPR (Web Page Redirect, also called captive portal): Check the checkbox to enable the Web Page Redirect functionality, or clear it to disable this option. If enabled, WPR configuration fields will be displayed under the SSID Limits section. This feature may be used to provide an alternate mode of authentication, or to simply display a splash screen when a user first associates to the wireless network. After that, it can (optionally) redirect the user to an alternate URL. For example, some wireless devices and users may not have a correctly configured 802.1x (RADIUS) supplicant. Utilizing WPR’s Web-based login, users may be authenticated without using an 802.1x supplicant. See “Web Page Redirect (Captive Portal) Configuration” on page 287 for details of WPR usage and configuration. If your venue is using Purple WiFi for guest access, see also “Web Page Redirect for Purple WiFi Venues” on page 294. You may specify “Whitelist” entries—a list of web sites to which users have unrestricted access, without needing to be redirected to the WPR page first. See “Whitelist Configuration for Web Page Redirect” on page 293 for details. 16. Fallback: Network Assurance checks network connectivity for the AP. When Network Assurance detects a failure, perhaps due to a bad link or WDS failure, if Fallback is set to Disable the AP will automatically disable this SSID. This will disassociate current clients, and prevent new clients from associating. Since the AP’s network connectivity has failed, this gives clients a chance to connect to other, operational parts of the wireless network. No changes are made to WDS configuration. See Step a on page 243 for more information on Network Assurance.17. Mobile Device Management (MDM): If you are an AirWatch customer and wish to have AirWatch manage mobile device access to the wireless network on this SSID, select AirWatch from the drop-down list. Before selecting this option, you must configure your AirWatch settings. See “AirWatch” on page 406. #When using WPR, it is particularly important to adhere to the SSID naming restrictions detailed in Step 1.

Wireless Access Point284 Configuring the Wireless APThe lower part of the window contains a few sections of additional settings to configure for the currently selected SSID, depending on the values chosen for the settings described above.z“SSID Limits and Scheduling” on page 284z“Web Page Redirect (Captive Portal) Configuration” on page 287z“Whitelist Configuration for Web Page Redirect” on page 293z“WPA Configuration” on page 297z“Authentication Service Configuration” on page 297SSID Limits and SchedulingSee “Group Limits” on page 309 for a discussion of the interaction of SSID limits and group limits. To eliminate confusion, we recommend that you configure one set of limits or the other, but not both. 18. Stations: Enter the maximum number of stations allowed on this SSID. This step is optional. Note that the IAPs - Global Settings window also has a station limit option — Max Station Association per IAP, and the windows for Global Settings .11an and Global Settings .11bgn also have Max Stations settings. If multiple station limits are set, all will be enforced. As soon as any limit is reached, no new stations can associate until some other station has terminated its association. 19. Overall Traffic: Choose Unlimited if you do not want to place a restriction on the traffic for this SSID, or enter a value in the Packets/Secfield to force a traffic restriction.20. Traffic per Station: Choose Unlimited if you do not want to place a restriction on the traffic per station for this SSID, or enter a value in the Packets/Sec field or the Kbps field to force a traffic restriction. If you set both values, the AP will enforce the limit it reaches first.#Note that you cannot use MDM and WPR on the same SSID.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 28521. Rename SSID: Use this field if you wish to change the name of an SSID without changing any of its other settings. For example, a convention center might wish to change the SSID name based on the name of the current exhibition. Scheduling 22. Days Active: Choose Everyday if you want this SSID to be active every day of the week, or select only the specific days that you want this SSID to be active. Days that are not checked are considered to be the inactive days.23. Time Active: Choose Always if you want this SSID active without interruption, or enter values in the Time On and Time Off fields to limit the time that this SSID is active. 24. Date on: Use this and the following two fields for SSID Scheduling—this lets you set up an SSID in advance and specify a period of time for the SSID to be in service. For example, a convention center might wish to set up SSIDs ahead of time for exhibitions that are scheduled for the next six months, and have each SSID be used only for the specified period. The SSID must be Enabled (see Step 1 on page 278), or the scheduling settings will be ignored. Note that once the SSID has reached its scheduled time and is in service, it will then obey the settings for Days Active and Time Active above. Set Date on to none (the default) if you don’t want this SSID to be delayed until later—that is, it will be put in service starting immediately. Select Specific Date & Time to have the SSID start become active at the specified date and time. Use the format YYYY-MM-DD [HH:MM], where time (hour and minute) is optional. For example, enter 2016:09:29 08:00. Use After Duration to delay for the specified amount of time in days, hours, and minutes, before the SSID is in service (use the format DD HH:MM, including the hours and minutes). For example, to have the SSID become valid after one day, one hour and 30 minutes have passed, enter 1 01:30.

Wireless Access Point286 Configuring the Wireless AP25. Use Date off to specify a date to take the SSID out of service without deleting it. At the specified date, the AP will turn the Enabled flag off. Leave Expiration and Date off set to none (the default) if you want this SSID to remain in service indefinitely after its scheduled start. Use Specific Date & Time to take the SSID out of service at the specified date and time. Use the format YYYY-MM-DD [HH:MM], where time (hour and minute) is optional. For example, enter 2016:09:29 18:00. Use After Duration to keep the SSID in service for the specified amount of time in days, hours, and minutes (use the format DD [HH:MM], where hours and minutes are optional). 26. Use Expiration to specify a date to delete this SSID when it is taken out of service at the specified date (i.e., this option cleans up after itself when it reaches the expiration time). Leave Expiration and Date off set to none(the default) if you want this SSID to remain in service indefinitely after its scheduled start. Use Specific Date & Time to delete the SSID at the specified date and time. Use the format YYYY-MM-DD [HH:MM], where time (hour and minute) is optional. For example, enter 2016:09:29 18:00. Use After Duration to keep the SSID in service for the specified amount of time in days, hours, and minutes (use the format DD [HH:MM], where hours and minutes are optional).27. Web Page Redirect Configuration: see “Web Page Redirect (Captive Portal) Configuration” on page 287.28. To delete an SSID, click its Delete button .29. Click the Save button if you wish to make your changes permanent.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 287Web Page Redirect (Captive Portal) Configuration If you enable WPR, the SSID Management window displays additional fields that must be configured. If enabled, WPR displays a splash or login page when a client associates to the wireless network and opens a browser to any URL (provided the URL does not point to a resource directly on the client’s device). The user-requested URL is captured, the user’s browser is redirected to the splash or login page, and then the browser is redirected either to your specified landing page, if any, or else back to the captured URL. The landing page may be specified for a user group as well. See “Group Management” on page 306. Note that if you change the management HTTPS port, WPR uses that port, too. See “HTTPS” on page 242. Figure 156. WPR Internal Splash Page Fields (SSID Management) Note that when clients roam between APs, their WPR Authentication will follow them so that re-authentication is not required. You may select among several different modes for use of the Web Page Redirect feature, each displaying a different set of parameters that must be entered. For each of these modes, set Authentication Timeout to the length of time (in minutes) that an association using the captive portal will remain valid after a user is disconnected. If a user session is interrupted, say if a mobile device goes into power-save mode or a user closes a laptop lid, the user will not have to reauthenticate unless the length of the disconnection is longer than the timeout. The default is 120 minutes. The maximum timeout is 10080 minutes (seven days). Web Page Redirect offers the following modes. zInternal Login page

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 289zExternal Login pageThis option redirects the user to a login page on an external web server for authentication, instead of the first user-requested URL. Login information (user name and password) must be obtained by that page, and returned to the AP for authentication. Authentication occurs according to your configured RADIUS information. These parameters are configured as described in “Procedure for Configuring Network Security” on page 250, except that the RADIUS Authentication Type is selected here, as described below. After authentication, the browser is redirected back to the captured URL. If you want the user redirected to a specific landing page instead, enter its address in Landing Page URL. To set up external login page usage, set Server to External Login. Enter the URL of the external web server in Redirect URL, and enter that server’s shared secret in Redirect Secret. Select the RADIUS Authentication Type. This is the protocol used for authentication of users, CHAP or PAP (the default). •Password Authentication Protocol (PAP), is a simple protocol. PAP transmits ASCII passwords over the network “in the clear” (unencrypted) and is therefore considered insecure. •Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) is a more secure Protocol. The login request is sent using a one-way hash function.zExternal Splash pageThis option displays a splash page instead of the first user-requested URL. The splash page files reside on an external web server. To set up external splash page usage, set Server to External Splash. Enter the URL of the external web server in Redirect URL, and enter that server’s shared secret in Redirect Secret.

Wireless Access Point290 Configuring the Wireless APAfter the splash page, the user is redirected to the captured URL. If you want the user redirected to a specific landing page instead, enter its address in Landing Page URL. zCloud This option is only used in conjunction with the Guest Access feature in XMS-Cloud Next Generation (XMS-9500-CL-x). If enabled, Cloudredirects the user to a login page hosted in the cloud by XMS for authentication, instead of the first user-requested URL. Login information (user name and password) is obtained by that Cloud Login page, and returned to the AP for authentication. After authentication, the browser is redirected back to the captured URL. If you want the user redirected to a specific landing page instead, enter its address in Landing Page URL. Cloud Login settings on the AP are entirely managed automatically by XMS-Cloud, based on the configuration that the network administrator has selected there. You should not make any changes to the following settings configured by XMS. XMS will set Server to Cloud Login and set the values of Redirect URL and Redirect Secret. zLanding Page OnlyThis option redirects the user to a specific landing page. If you select this option, enter the desired address in Landing Page URL. zPersonal Wi-Fi This option is only used in conjunction with the EasyPass Personal portal feature in XMS-Cloud Next Generation (XMS-9500-CL-x). Personal Wi-Fi settings on the AP are entirely managed automatically by XMS-Cloud, based on the settings that have been selected there. You should not make any changes to the settings configured by XMS. When an XMS-Cloud administrator creates an EasyPass Personal portal, XMS configures the corresponding SSID on the AP to enable Personal Wi-Fi and the Cloud WPR setting. XMS-Cloud also sets the values on the Personal Wi-Fi page.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 291When users connect to the SSID that runs the EasyPass Personal portal, they are redirected to a login page hosted in the cloud by XMS. After successful authentication, a user is redirected to a Personal Wi-Fi setup page to specify necessary parameters for this feature: a personal SSID name, preshared key (PSK) and expiration date. This personal SSID is configured on APs by XMS-Cloud. Users will typically set up the same SSID name and PSK that they use at home, which their smartphones, tablets, and other personal devices are already configured to connect with automatically. For example, if a hotel offers Xirrus Personal Wi-Fi, guests will be able to set up SSIDs that mimic their home networks. Their devices will automatically connect securely for the duration of the guest’s stay (until the personal SSID expires). See “Personal Wi-Fi” on page 302 for more details. The personal SSID is created with the default values shown below.Encryption / Authentication: 8WPA2-PSK/02.1x Broadcast: onBand: both VLAN Name/Pool: noneQoS: 2 Filter list: noneRoaming: L2 WPR: offFallback: off Mobile Device Mgmt: noneACL Mode: off SSID Active: yes SSID expiration: per user setting in XMS-CDHCP Pool: uses SSID’s name, see below DHCP Opt: offA DHCP pool is created for each personal SSID using the SSID Name. NAT is enabled, and the IP subnet is 192.168.1.0/24.In IAP—Global Settings, Block Inter-Station Traffic is set to No.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 293Whitelist Configuration for Web Page Redirect On a per-SSID basis, the whitelist allows you to specify Internet destinations that stations can access without first having to pass the WPR (captive portal) login/splash page. Note that a whitelist may be specified for a user group as well. See “Group Management” on page 306. Figure 158. Whitelist Configuration for WPRTo add a web site to the whitelist for this SSID, enter it in the provided field, then click Create. You may enter an IP address or a domain name. Up to 32 entries may be created. Example whitelist entries:zHostname: www.yahoo.com (but not www.yahoo.com/abc/def.html)zWildcards are supported: *.yahoo.comzIP address: 121.122.123.124Some typical applications for this feature are:zto add allowed links to the WPR pagezto add a link to terms of use that may be hosted on another sitezto allow embedded video on WPR pageNote the following details of the operation of this feature:zThe list is configured on a per-SSID basis. You must have WPR enabled for the SSID to see this section of the SSID Management page.zWhen a station that has not yet passed the WPR login/splash page attempts to access one of the white-listed addresses, it will be allowed access to that site as many times as requested.

Wireless Access Point294 Configuring the Wireless APzThe station will still be required to pass through the configured WPR flow for all other Internet addresses. zThe whitelist will work against all traffic -- not just http or httpszIndirect access to other web sites is not permitted. For example, if you add www.yahoo.com to the whitelist, you can see that page, but not all the ads that it attempts to display. zThe whitelist feature does not cause traffic to be redirected to the whitelist addresses.Web Page Redirect for Purple WiFi Venues Figure 159. Purple WiFi Guest AccessPurple WiFi is a cloud-based solution that sets up a WiFi hotspot in a business or venue. It offers a number of features such as user analytics, filtering of inappropriate content, marketing, and social media options. Once you have signed up with Purple WiFi, set up APs as described below. For more details of operation, see “Purple WiFi Client Login Process Details” on page 296.To deploy APs in a venue that uses Purple WiFi to provide guest access, use the following WPR (captive portal) configuration.1. On the SSID Management Page, enable WPR on each SSID that is to offer Purple WiFi guest access. 2. Then set the following Web Page Redirect Configuration options:•Server: select External Login.•Landing Page URL: set this to the URL provided by Purple WiFi when you set up your account with them.•Redirect URL: set this to the URL provided by Purple WiFi when you set up your account with them. For example:

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 295http://purpleportal.net/access/•Redirect Secret: Enter the password provided to you by Purple WiFi. 3. In the next section on the same page, create WPR Whitelist Configuration entries as directed by Purple WiFi for web sites that should not be redirected. Note that if an asterisk is part of the entry, you must include this character. For example:*.purpleportal.net*.facebook.comapi.twitter.comconnect.facebook.net 4. Set the Authentication Server for client access to be the server provided to you by Purple WiFi:•If you did not select Global in Step 13 on page 280, then the Authentication Server will be specific to this SSID, rather than the server used globally on the AP. In the section labeled Authentication Service Configuration, enter the following:•Set the Authentication Server type to External RADIUS.•Enter the Host or IP Address, Port, and the Shared Secret (password) of the Primary Server provided by Purple WiFi. •If you did select Global in Step 13 on page 280, then the SSID uses the Authentication Server that you defined on the Security > External Radius Page for global use on the AP. This must be the server provided to you by Purple WiFi. It will be used for all client authentication, unless you define other SSIDs that don’t use the global server. On the Security > Global Settings Page:•Set the Authentication Server Mode to External Radius. On the Security > External Radius Page:•Enter the Host Name or IP Address, Port, and the Shared Secret (password) of the Primary Server provided by Purple WiFi.

Wireless Access Point296 Configuring the Wireless AP5. Regardless of whether you selected a global authentication server in Step 13 on page 280, you need the following setting for compatibility with Purple WiFi. On the Security > External Radius Page, in the RADIUS Attribute Formatting section:•Set Called-Station-Id Attribute Format to Ethernet MAC.Purple WiFi Client Login Process DetailsThis is an overview of the interaction between the AP and Purple WiFi when a client connects. The client is not aware of any of these details and is led through the process by Purple WiFi’s simple interface.1. A client (smartphone, iPad, etc.) connects to an SSID at a Purple WiFi customer site.2. The SSID is configured for WPR. As soon as the client opens a browser, it is redirected to the configured Purple WiFi portal page that was configured in the AP External Login page, via the Redirect URL.3. The AP contacts the Redirect URL along with the AP’s MAC address (Ethernet MAC). This is used to match the Purple WiFi customer site against a database of AP MAC addresses managed by Purple WiFi, which delivers a customized splash page.4. The Purple WiFi splash page prompts the end user to log into a social media site.5. Upon successful authorization at the social media site, a record is then created in the Purple WiFi (External RADIUS) database for the client.6. The Purple WiFi splash page then redirects the browser back to the login script on the AP along with the authentication information (username/password), and the AP then performs an external RADIUS authentication request against the Purple WiFi RADIUS servers (as configured on the AP).

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 2977. If RADIUS authenticates successfully, then the end user is given access to the full Internet, outside of your internal network. Future connections to the same Access Point are automatically authenticated with no user action required.WPA Configuration If you set Encryption for this SSID to one of the WPA selections (Step 12 on page 280) and you did not check the Global checkbox (Step 13), this section will be displayed. The WPA Configuration encryption settings have the same parameters as those described in “Procedure for Configuring Network Security” on page 250. Authentication Service Configuration The RADIUS settings section will be displayed if you set Authentication (Step 11 on page 280) to anything but OPEN, and you set Encryption (Step 12) to anything but WEP, and you did not check the Global checkbox (Step 13). This means that you wish to set up a RADIUS server or Active Directory server to be used for this particular SSID. If Global is checked, then the security settings (including the RADIUS server, if any) established at the global level are used instead (see “Global Settings” on page 250). The RADIUS and accounting settings are configured in the same way as for an external RADIUS server (see “Procedure for Configuring an External RADIUS Server” on page 255). If you select Active Directory, then the settings are configured in “Active Directory” on page 260. Note that if you select Active Directory, then you cannot use CHAP authentication.See AlsoDHCP ServerExternal RadiusGlobal SettingsInternal RadiusSecurity PlanningSSIDsUnderstanding QoS Priority on the Wireless AP

Wireless Access Point298 Configuring the Wireless APAirWatchActive IAPsBy default, when a new SSID is created, that SSID is active on all IAPs. This window allows you to specify which IAPs will offer that SSID. Put differently, you can specify which SSIDs are active on each IAP.This feature is useful in conjunction with WDS. You may use this window to configure the WDS link IAPs so that only the WDS link SSIDs are active on them. Figure 160. Setting Active IAPs per SSID Procedure for Specifying Active IAPs1. SSID: For a given SSID row, check the IAPs that should offer that SSID to clients. Uncheck any IAPs which should not offer that SSID. 2. All IAPs: This button, in the last column, may be used to allow or deny this SSID on all IAPs, i.e., switch all IAPs between allow or deny.3. All SSIDs: This button, in the bottom row, may be used to allow or deny all SSIDs on this IAP. 4. Toggle All: This button, on the lower left, may be used to allow or deny all SSIDs on all IAPs. 5. Click the Save button if you wish to make your changes permanent.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 299Per-SSID Access Control ListThis window allows you set up Access Control Lists (ACLs) on a per-SSID basis,to control whether a station with a particular MAC address may associate to a particular SSID. You may create access control list entries and delete existing entries, and control the type of list (allow or deny). There is one ACL per SSID, and you may select whether its type is an Allow listor a Deny list, or whether use of this list is Disabled. You may create up to 1000 entries per SSID.There is also a global ACL (see “Access Control List” on page 248). If the same MAC address is listed in both the global ACL and in an SSID’s ACL, and if either ACL would deny that station access to that SSID, then access will be denied.Figure 161. Per-SSID Access Control ListProcedure for Configuring Access Control Lists1. SSID: Select the line for the SSID whose ACL you wish to manage. Click the line to hide or expand (display) the list.2. Access Control List Type: Select Disabled to disable use of the Access Control List for this SSID, or select the ACL type — either Allow or Deny. •Allow: Only allows the listed MAC addresses to associate to the AP. All others are denied. The plus symbol appears before the SSID name for an allow list.

Wireless Access Point300 Configuring the Wireless AP•Deny List: Denies the listed MAC addresses permission to associate to the AP. All others are allowed. The minus symbol appears before the SSID name for a deny list.•Disabled: A red dot appears before the SSID name for a disabled list. A green dot appears before the SSID name for an allow or deny list. 3. MAC Address: If you want to add a MAC address to the ACL for the selected SSID, enter the new MAC address. You may use a wildcard (*) for one or more digits to match a range of addresses. Delete: You may delete selected MAC addresses from this list by clicking their Deletebuttons .4. Click the Save button if you wish to make your changes permanent.HoneypotsThe honeypot SSID feature prevents the airwaves from being crowded with probes for named SSIDs. These probes are automatically generated by some popular wireless devices. When you create and enable a honeypot SSID on an AP, it responds to any station probe looking for a named open SSID (unencrypted and unauthenticated) that is not configured on the AP. For more details, see “High Density 2.4G Enhancement—Honeypot SSID” on page 275. This page allows you to create a honeypot SSID, enter a whitelist of SSID names that are not to be honeypotted, and define alternate names for the SSID that will be broadcast instead of “honeypot”. #In addition to these lists, other authentication methods (for example, RADIUS) are still enforced for users.#Use the honeypot feature carefully as it could interfere with legitimate SSIDs.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 301Figure 162. Honeypot Whitelist Procedure for Configuring Honeypot Whitelists1. Create a honeypot: If you have not already created an SSID named honeypot, you will be asked whether you wish to create one. Click Yes. You must have an SSID named honeypot to use this feature. 2. Honeypot Whitelists: This section only appears if you have created an SSID named honeypot. You may define a whitelist of allowed SSIDs which are not to be honeypotted, as described in “High Density 2.4G Enhancement—Honeypot SSID” on page 275. Type in each SSID name, and click Create to add it to the whitelist. Up to 50 SSIDs may be listed. The SSID names entered in this list are not case-sensitive. You may use the “*” character as a wildcard to match any string at this position. For example, xir* matches any string that starts with XIR or xir. You may use a ? as a wildcard to match a single character by surrounding the SSID name in quotes. For example, “xirru?” will match any six-character long string that starts with xirru (again, the match is not case-sensitive). If you do not use a wildcard, then the SSID name entered must be matched exactly in order to be whitelisted (except that case is not considered).

Wireless Access Point302 Configuring the Wireless AP3. Honeypot Broadcasts: This section only appears if you have created an SSID named honeypot. You may define one or more alias names for this SSID. They will be broadcast instead of the name honeypot. Personal Wi-FiThe settings on this page will apply to all of the Personal Wi-Fi SSIDs that are created by users after they connect to an EasyPass Personal portal. See “Personal Wi-Fi” on page 290. These settings are only used in conjunction with the EasyPass Personal portal feature in XMS-Cloud Next Generation (XMS-9500-CL-x), and they are entirely managed automatically by XMS-Cloud, based on the settings that have been selected there. You should not make any changes to the settings configured by XMS. Figure 163. Personal Wi-FiSettings for Personal Wi-Fi1. Limit - All Stations (0-12): the maximum number of personal SSIDs that may exist on this AP at one time. The default value is 4.2. Limit - Per Station (0-4): the maximum simultaneous number of personal SSIDs that can be created by a single station. The default value is 1. 3. Expiration Default: the expiration time for a personal SSID—after this time, the SSID will be deleted. Note that the user may specify an expiration date for a particular personal SSID when it is set up. If expiration times are specified both on this page and for a particular personal SSID, the SSID will expire at whichever time occurs first. You may enter a Specific Date & Time for the personal SSID to expire. Use the format YYYY-MM-DD [HH:MM], where time (hour and minute)

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 303is optional. For example, enter 2016:09:29 08:00. If the hour and minute are omitted, they are assumed to be 23:59. Use After Duration to specify the length of time before the SSID expires, in days, hours, and minutes. Use the format DD [HH:MM], where hours and minutes are optional. For example, to have the SSID expire after one day, one hour and 30 minutes have passed, enter 1 01:30. Set Expiration to Never (the default) if you want this SSID to remain in service indefinitely after its scheduled start.

Wireless Access Point304 Configuring the Wireless APGroupsThis is a status-only window that allows you to review user (i.e., wireless client) Group assignments. It includes the group name, Radius ID, Device ID, VLAN IDs and QoS parameters and roaming layer defined for each group, and DHCP pools and web page redirect information defined for the group. You may click on a group’s name to jump to the edit page for the group. There are no configuration options available on this page, but if you are experiencing problems or reviewing group management parameters, you may want to print this page for your records.The Limits section of this window shows any limitations configured for your defined groups. For example, this window shows the current state of a group (enabled or disabled), how much group and per-station traffic is allowed, time on and time off, and days on and off.For information to help you understand groups, see Understanding Groupsbelow. For an in-depth discussion, please see the User Groups Application Note in the Xirrus Resource Center. Figure 164. GroupsUnderstanding GroupsUser groups allow administrators to assign specific network parameters to users (wireless clients) through RADIUS privileges rather than having to map users to an SSID tailored for that set of privileges. Groups provide flexible control over user privileges without the need to create large numbers of SSIDs.A group allows you to define a set of parameter values to be applied to selected users. For example, you might define the user group Students, and set its VLAN,

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 305security parameters, web page redirect (WPR), and traffic limits. When a new user is created, you can apply all of these settings just by making the user a member of the group. The group allows you to apply a uniform configuration to a set of users in one step. In addition, you can restrict the group so that it only applies its settings to group members who are connecting using a specific device type, such as iPad or phone. Thus, you could define a group named Student-Phone with Device ID set to Phone, and set the group’s VLAN Number to 100. This group’s settings will only be applied to group members who connect using a phone, and they will all use VLAN 100. Note that settings for the group in the RADIUS server will override any settings on this WMI page.Almost all of the parameters that can be set for a group are the same as SSID parameters. This allows you to configure features at the user group level, rather than for an entire SSID. If you set parameter values for an SSID, and then enter different values for the same parameters for a user group, the user group values have priority (i.e., group settings will override SSID settings). Group names are case-sensitive and can contain up to 32 alphanumeric characters (do not include spaces when defining Groups).Using GroupsUser accounts are used to authenticate wireless clients that want to associate to the AP. These accounts are established in one of two ways, using the Security> Internal Radius window or the Security> External Radius window. In either case, you may select a user group for the user, and that user group’s settings will apply to the user:zInternal Radius — when you add or modify a user entry, select a user group to which the user will belong.zExternal Radius — when you add or modify a user account, specify the Radius ID for the user group to which the user will belong. This must be the same Radius ID that was entered in the Group Management window. When the user is authenticated, the external Radius server will send the Radius ID to the AP. This will allow the AP to identify the group to which the user belongs.

Wireless Access Point306 Configuring the Wireless APSee Also External RadiusInternal RadiusSSIDsUnderstanding QoS Priority on the Wireless APWeb Page Redirect (Captive Portal) ConfigurationUnderstanding Fast RoamingGroup ManagementThis window allows you to manage groups (create, edit and delete), assign usage limits and other parameters on a per group basis, and configure the Web Page Redirect (captive portal) functionality. Figure 165. Group Management Procedure for Managing Groups1. New Group Name: To create a new group, enter a new group name next to the Create button, then click Create. You may create up to 16 groups(up to 8 on the XR-500 Series). To configure and enable this group, proceed with the following steps.2. Group: This column lists currently defined groups. When you create a new group, the group name appears in this list. Click on any group to select it, and then proceed to modify it as desired.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 3073. Enabled: Check this box to enable this group or leave it blank to disable it. When a group is disabled, users that are members of the group will behave as if the group did not exist. In other words, the options configured for the SSID will apply to the users, rather than the options configured for the group. 4. Fallback: Network Assurance checks network connectivity for the AP. When Network Assurance detects a failure, perhaps due to a bad link or WDS failure, if Fallback is set to Disable the AP will automatically disable users in this group. This will disassociate current clients, and prevent them from re-associating. Since the AP’s network connectivity has failed, this gives clients a chance to connect to other, operational parts of the wireless network. See Step a on page 243 for more information on Network Assurance.5. Radius ID: Enter a unique Radius ID for the group, to be used on an external Radius server. When adding a user account to the external server, this Radius ID value should be entered for the user. When the user is authenticated, Radius sends this value to the AP. This tells the AP that the user is a member of the group having this Radius ID. 6. Device ID: You may select a device type from this drop-down list, for example, Notebook, phone, iPhone, or Android. This allows you to apply the group settings only if a station authenticates as a user that is a member of the group and the station’s device type matches Device ID. Select none if you do not want to consider the device type. If you have a Radius ID you should not enter a Device ID. 7. VLAN ID: (Optional) From the pull-down list, select a VLAN or VLAN Pool for this user’s traffic to use (see “VLANs” on page 213 and “VLAN Pools” on page 215). This user group’s VLAN settings supersede Dynamic VLAN settings (which are passed to the AP by the Radius server). To avoid confusion, we recommend that you avoid specifying the VLAN for a user in two places. 8. QoS Priority: (Optional) Select a value in this field for QoS (Quality of Service) priority filtering. The QoS value must be one of the following:

Wireless Access Point308 Configuring the Wireless AP•0 — The lowest QoS priority setting, where QoS makes its best effort at filtering and prioritizing data, video and voice traffic without compromising the performance of the network. Use this setting in environments where traffic prioritization is not a concern.•1 — Medium; QoS prioritization is aggregated across all traffic types.•2 — High, normally used to give priority to video traffic.•3 — The highest QoS priority setting, normally used to give priority to voice traffic.The QoS setting you define here will prioritize wireless traffic for this group versus other traffic, as described in “Understanding QoS Priority on the Wireless AP” on page 271. The default value for this field is 2. 9. DHCP Pool: (Optional) To associate an internal DHCP pool to this group, select it from the pull--down list. Only one pool may be assigned. An internal DHCP pool must be created before it can be assigned. To create a DHCP pool, go to “DHCP Server” on page 200.10. Filter List: (Optional) If you wish to apply a set of filters to this user group’s traffic, select the desired Filter List. See “Filters” on page 391. 11. Xirrus Roaming: (Optional) For this group, select roaming behavior. Select L2&L3 to enable fast roaming between IAPs or APs at Layer 2 and Layer 3. If you select L2, then roaming uses Layer 2 only. You may only select fast roaming at Layers 2 and 3 if this has been selected in Global Settings. You may select Off to disable fast roaming. See “Understanding Fast Roaming” on page 312. 12. Web Page Redirect (WPR): (Optional) Check this box if you wish to enable the Web Page Redirect (captive portal) functionality. This will open a Web Page Redirect details section in the window, where your WPR parameters may be entered. This feature may be used to display a splash screen when a user first associates to the wireless network. After that, it can (optionally) redirect the user to an alternate URL. See “Web Page Redirect (Captive Portal) Configuration” on page 287 for details of WPR configuration. Note that the Group Management window only allows you to set up an Internal Splash page and a Landing Page URL.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 309The authentication options that are offered on the SSID Management page are not offered here. Since the group membership of a user is provided to the AP by a Radius server, this means the user has already been authenticated. You may create a WPR Whitelist on a per-group basis if you wish. See “Whitelist Configuration for Web Page Redirect” on page 293 for details of WPR Whitelist usage and configuration. Group LimitsThe Limits section allows you to limit the traffic or connection times allowed for this user group. Note that the IAPs — Global Settings window and the SSID management windows also have options to limit the number of stations, limit traffic, and/or limit connection times. If limits are set in more than one place, all limits will be enforced:zAs soon as any station limit is reached, no new stations can associate until some other station has terminated its association. zAs soon as any traffic limit is reached, it is enforced. zIf any connection date/time restriction applies, it is enforced. You can picture this as a logical AND of all restrictions. For example, suppose that a station’s SSID is available Monday - Friday between 8:00am and 5:00pm, and the User Group is available Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday between 6:00am and 8:00pm, then the station will be allowed on MWF between 8:00am and 5:00pm.To eliminate confusion, we recommend that you configure one set of limits or the other, but not both.13. Stations: Enter the maximum number of stations allowed on this group. The default is 1536. 14. Overall Traffic: Check the Unlimited checkbox if you do not want to place a restriction on the traffic for this group, or enter a value in the Packets/Sec field and make sure that the Unlimited box is unchecked to force a traffic restriction.

Wireless Access Point310 Configuring the Wireless AP15. Traffic per Station: Check the Unlimited checkbox if you do not want to place a restriction on the traffic per station for this group, or enter a value in the Packets/Sec or Kbps field and make sure that the Unlimited box is unchecked to force a traffic restriction.16. Days Active: Choose Everyday if you want this group to be active every day of the week, or select only the specific days that you want this group to be active. Days that are not checked are considered to be the inactive days. 17. Time Active: Choose Always if you want this group active without interruption, or enter values in the Time On and Time Off fields to limit the time that group members may associate. 18. To delete an entry, click its Delete button. 19. Click the Save button if you wish to make your changes permanent. See AlsoDHCP ServerExternal RadiusInternal RadiusSecurity PlanningSSIDs

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 311IAPsThis status-only window summarizes the status of the Integrated Access Points. For each IAP, it shows whether it is up or down, the channel and wireless mode, the antenna that it is currently using, its cell size and transmit and receive power, how many users (stations) are currently associated to it, whether a WDS link distance has been set for it, and its BSSID (MAC address).Figure 166. IAPsThe Channel Mode column displays some status information that is not found elsewhere: the source of a channel setting. (Figure 167) If you set a channel manually (via IAP Settings), it will be listed as manual. If an autochannel operation changed a channel, then it is labeled as auto. If the channel is set to the current factory default setting, the source will be default. This column also shows whether the channel selection is locked, or whether the IAP was automatically switched to this channel because the AP detected the signature of radar in operation on a conflicting channel (see also, Step 8 on page 321). Figure 167. Source of Channel Setting There are no configuration options in this window, but if you are experiencing problems or simply reviewing the IAP assignments, you may print this window for your records. Click any IAP name to open the associated configuration page.

Wireless Access Point312 Configuring the Wireless APAPs have a fast roaming feature, allowing them to maintain sessions for applications such as voice, even while users cross boundaries between APs. Fast roaming is set up in the Global Settings window and is discussed in:z“Understanding Fast Roaming” on page 312IAPs are configured using the following windows: z“IAP Settings” on page 313z“Global Settings” on page 319z“Global Settings .11an” on page 335z“Global Settings .11bgn” on page 341z“Global Settings .11n” on page 347z“Global Settings .11u” on page 352z“Global Settings .11ac” on page 350z“Advanced RF Settings” on page 358z“Hotspot 2.0” on page 367z“NAI Realms” on page 370z“NAI EAP” on page 371z“Intrusion Detection” on page 373z“LED Settings” on page 380z“DSCP Mappings” on page 381“Roaming Assist” on page 382See AlsoIAP Statistics SummaryUnderstanding Fast Roaming To maintain sessions for real-time data traffic, such as voice and video, users must be able to maintain the same IP address through the entire session. With traditional networks, if a user crosses VLAN or subnet boundaries (i.e., roaming between domains), a new IP address must be obtained.Mobile wireless users are likely to cross multiple roaming domains during a single session (especially wireless users of VoIP phones). Layer 3 roaming allows

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 313a user to maintain the same IP address through an entire real-time data session. The user may be associated to any of the VLANs defined on the AP. The Layer 3 session is maintained by establishing a tunnel back to the originating AP. You should decide whether or not to use Layer 3 roaming based on your wired network design. Layer 3 roaming incurs extra overhead and may result in additional traffic delays. You may configure one SSID for Layer 3 fast roaming with up to 25 APs. Fast Roaming is configured on two pages. To enable the fast roaming options that you want to make available on your AP, see Step 29 to Step 31 in “Global Settings” on page 319. To choose which of the enabled options are used by an SSID or Group, see “Procedure for Managing SSIDs” on page 278 (Step 14) or “Procedure for Managing Groups” on page 306. IAP SettingsThis window allows you to enable/disable IAPs, define the wireless mode for each IAP, specify the channel and bond width and the cell size for each IAP, lock the channel selection, establish transmit/receive parameters, and reset channels. Buttons at the top of the list allow you to Reset Channels, Enable All IAPs, or Disable All IAPs. When finished, click the Save button if you wish to make your changes permanent. Figure 168. IAP Settings

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 315One of the IAPs must be set to monitor mode if you wish to support Spectrum Analyzer, Radio Assurance (loopback testing), and Intrusion Detection features. Monitoring has a Timeshare mode option, which is especially useful for small APs with two IAPs allowing one IAP to be shared between monitoring the airwaves for problems and providing services to stations. See RF Monitor Mode in “Advanced RF Settings” on page 358 to set this option. 4. In the WiFi Mode field, select the IEEE 802.11 wireless mode (or combination) that you want to allow on this IAP. The drop-down list will only display the appropriate choices for the selected Band. For example, the 5 GHz band allows you to select ac-only, anac, an, a-only, or n-only, while 2.4GHz includes 802.11b and 802.11g choices. When you select a WiFi Mode for any IAP, your selection in the Channel column will be checked to ensure that it is a valid choice for that WiFi Mode. By selecting appropriate WiFi Modes for the radios on your APs, you can greatly improve wireless network performance. For example, if you have 802.11n and 802.11ac stations using the same IAP, throughput on that radio is reduced greatly for the 802.11ac stations. By supporting 802.11n stations only on selected radios in your network, the rest of your 802.11ac IAPs will have greatly improved performance. Take care to ensure that your network provides adequate coverage for the types of stations that you need to support. 5. In the Channel field, select the channel you want this IAP to use from the channels available in the pull-down list. The list shows the channels available for the IAP selected (depending on which band the IAP is using). Channels that are shown in gray are unavailable. They are either already in use, or not offered for the selected Band. The channels that are available for assignment to IAPs will differ, depending on the country of operation. If Country is set to United Statesin the Global Settings window, then 21 channels are available to 802.11an radios.

Wireless Access Point316 Configuring the Wireless AP 6. Set Channel Lock to Block auto-channel assignment if you want to lock in your channel selection so that an autochannel operation (see Advanced RF Settings) can’t change it. A locked padlock will be displayed for the IAP. 7. The Bond field works together with the Channel selected above. (For 802.11n IAPs, it also obeys the bonding options selected on the Global Settings .11n page.) Also see the discussion in “80 MHz and 160 MHz Channel Widths (Bonding)” on page 48. Bonding is available on all APs, including two-radio models. For 802.11n, two 20MHz channels may be bonded to create one 40 MHz channel with double the data rate. 802.11ac offers an additional option to bond four 20MHz channels to create one 80MHz channel with four times the data rate. •Channel number — If a channel number appears, then this channel is already bonded to the listed channel. •Off — Do not bond his channel to another channel. •40 MHz — Bond this channel to an adjacent channel. The bonded channel is selected automatically by the AP based on the Channel (Step 5). The choice of banded channel is static — fixed once the selection is made. •80 MHz — Bond this channel to three adjacent channels. The bonded channels are selected automatically by the AP based on the Channel (Step 5). The choice of bonded channels is static — fixed once the selection is made. The top line for the IAP will show the channels that have been assigned based on the width of the bond.#As mandated by FCC/IC law, APs continually scan for signatures of radar. If such a signature is detected, the AP will switch operation from conflicting channels to new ones. The AP will switch back to the original channel after 30 minutes if the channel is clear. If a radio was turned off because there were no available channels not affected by radar, the AP will now bring that radio back up after 30 minutes if that channel is clear. The 30 minute time frame complies with FCC/IC regulations.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 3178. In the Cell Size field, select auto to allow the optimal cell size to be automatically computed (see also, “RF Power and Sensitivity” on page 361). To set the cell size yourself, choose either small, medium, large, or max to use the desired pre-configured cell size. Alternatively, you can set the wireless cell size manually by specifying the transmit and receive power — in dB — in the Tx Power (transmit) and Rx Threshold(receive) fields. If you set manual values, the Cell Size field will display the value manual after the page is refreshed. The default for Cell Size is max. If you select a value other than auto, the cell size will not be affected by cell size auto configuration. Note that ultra low power Tx dBm settings are possible. Values from -15dB to 5dB are provided specifically to help in high density 2.4 GHz environments. When other APs are within listening range of this one, setting cell sizes to Auto allows the AP to change cell sizes so that coverage between cells is maintained. Each cell size is optimized to limit interference between sectors of other APs on the same channel. This eliminates the need for a network administrator to manually tune the size of each cell when installing multiple APs. In the event that an AP or a radio goes offline, an adjacent AP can increase its cell size to help compensate. The number of users and their applications are major drivers of bandwidth requirements. The network architect must account for the number of users within the AP’s cell diameter. In a large office, or if multiple APs are in use, you may choose Small cells to achieve a higher data rate, since walls and other objects will not define the cells naturally. For additional information about cell sizes, go to “Coverage and Capacity Planning” on page 34.9. If you are using WDS to provide backhaul over an extended distance, use WDS Distance (Miles) to prevent timeout problems associated with long transmission times. Set the approximate distance in miles between this IAP and the connected AP in this column. This increases the wait time for frame transmission accordingly.

Wireless Access Point318 Configuring the Wireless AP10. The Antenna field displays the antenna that has automatically been selected for this IAP.11. If desired, enter a description for this IAP in the Description field. 12. You may reset all of the enabled IAPs by clicking the Reset Channelsbutton at the top of the list. A message will inform you that all enabled radios have been taken down and brought back up. 13. Buttons at the top of the list allow you to Enable All IAPs or Disable All IAPs. 14. Click the Save button if you wish to make your changes permanent.See AlsoCoverage and Capacity PlanningGlobal SettingsGlobal Settings .11anGlobal Settings .11bgnGlobal Settings .11nGlobal Settings .11acAdvanced RF SettingsIAPsIAP Statistics SummaryLED Settings

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 319Global Settings Figure 169. Global Settings (IAPs) This window allows you to establish global IAP settings. Global IAP settings include enabling or disabling all IAPs (regardless of their operating mode), and changing settings for beacons, station management, and advanced traffic optimization — including multicast processing, load balancing, and roaming. Changes you make on this page are applied to all IAPs, without exception.

Wireless Access Point320 Configuring the Wireless APProcedure for Configuring Global IAP Settings1. Country: This is a display-only value. Once a country has been set, it maynot be changed.The channels that are available for assignment to IAPs will differ,depending on the country of operation. If Country is set to United States,then 2 channels are available for 802.11a/n.If no country is displayed, the channel set defaults to channels and powerlevels that are legal worldwide — this set only includes the lower eight5 GHz channels.2. IAP Control: Click on the Enable All IAPs button to enable all IAPs forthis AP, or click on the Disable All IAPs button to disable all IAPs.3. Short Retries: This sets the maximum number of transmission attemptsfor a frame, the length of which is less than or equal to the RTS Threshold,before a failure condition is indicated. The default value is 7. Enter a newvalue (1 to 128) in the Short Retry Limit field if you want to increase ordecrease this attribute.4. Long Retries: This sets the maximum number of transmission attemptsfor a frame, the length of which is greater than the RTS Threshold, beforea failure condition is indicated. The default value is 4. Enter a new value(1 to 128) in the Long Retry Limit field if you want to increase or decreasethis attribute.5. Wi-Fi Alliance Mode: Set this On if you need AP behavior to conformcompletely to Wi-Fi Alliance standards. This mode is normally set to Off.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 321Beacon Configuration6. Beacon Interval: When the AP sends a beacon, it includes with it a beacon interval, which specifies the period of time before it will send the beacon again. Enter the desired value in the Beacon Interval field, between 20 and 1000 Kusecs. A Kusec is 1000 microseconds = 1 millisecond. The value you enter here is applied to all IAPs.7. DTIM Period: A Delivery Traffic Indication Message (DTIM) is a signal sent as part of a beacon by the AP to a client device in sleep mode, alerting the device to broadcast traffic awaiting delivery. The DTIM Period is a multiple of the Beacon Interval, and it determines how often DTIMs are sent out. By default, the DTIM period is 1, which means that it is the same as the beacon interval. Enter the desired multiple, between 1 and 255. The value you enter here is applied to all IAPs.8. 802.11h Beacon Support: This option enables beacons on all of the AP’s radios to conform to 802.11h requirements, supporting dynamic frequency selection (DFS) and transmit power control (TPC) to satisfy regulatory requirements for operation in Europe. 9. 802.11k Beacon Support: 802.11k offers faster and more efficient roaming. When enabled, each beacon lists the channels that nearby APs offer. This supports improved channel scanning, resulting in faster roam times and increased battery life due to shorter scan times since the station knows where to look for nearby APs. The AP will also respond to requests from stations for an 802.11K Neighbor Report with additional information about nearby APs. This setting is enabled by default. 10. 802.11w Protected Management Support: This option protects thewireless network infrastructure against spoofing by outside APs.Authenticate, De-authenticate, Associate, and Dis-associate management frames are sent in a secured manner when this option is enabled.

Wireless Access Point322 Configuring the Wireless AP11. WMM Power Save: Click On to enable Wireless Multimedia Power Save support, as defined in IEEE802.11e. This option saves power and increases battery life by allowing the client device to doze between packets to save power, while the AP buffers downlink frames. The default setting is On. 12. WMM ACM Video: Click On to enable Wireless Multimedia Admission Control for video traffic. When admission control for video is enabled, the AP evaluates a video request from a client device against the network load and channel conditions. If the network is not congested, it accepts the request and grants the client the medium time for its traffic stream. Otherwise, it rejects the request. This enables the AP to maintain QoS when the WLAN becomes congested after a connection has already been established. Some clients contain sufficient intelligence to decide to either delay the traffic stream, associate with a different AP, or establish a best-effort traffic stream outside the operation of WMM-Admission Control. The default setting is Off. Note that the QoS priority of traffic queues is voice, video, best effort, background—this gives the highest priority to voice transmissions. 13. WMM ACM Voice: Click On to enable Wireless Multimedia Admission Control for voice calls. As for WMM ACM Video above, when admission control for voice is enabled, the AP evaluates a voice request from a client device against the network load and channel conditions. If the network is not congested, it accepts the request and grants the client the medium time for its call. Otherwise, it rejects the request. Some clients contain sufficient intelligence to decide to either delay the traffic stream, associate with a different AP, or establish a best-effort traffic stream outside the operation of WMM-Admission Control. The default setting is Off. Station Management14. Station Re-Authentication Period: This specifies an interval (in seconds) for station reauthentications. This is the minimum time period between station authentication attempts, enforced by the AP. This feature is part of the Xirrus Advanced RF Security Manager (RSM).

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 32315. Station Timeout Period: Specify a time (in seconds) in this field to define the timeout period for station associations.16. Max Station Association per Access Point: This option allows you to define how many station associations are allowed per AP, or enter unlimited. Note that the Max Station Association per IAP limit (below) may not be exceeded, so entering unlimited, in practice, will stop at the per-IAP limit. 17. Max Station Association per IAP: This defines how many station associations are allowed per IAP. Note that the SSIDs > SSID Management window also has a station limit option — Station Limit, and the windows for Global Settings .11an and Global Settings .11bgn also have Max Stations settings. If multiple station limits are set, all will be enforced. As soon as any limit is reached, no new stations can associate until some other station has terminated its association. 18. Block Inter-Station Traffic: This option allows you to block or allow traffic between wireless clients that are associated to the AP. Choose either Yes (to block traffic) or No (to allow traffic).19. Allow Over Air Management: Choose Yes to enable management of the AP via the IAPs, or choose No (recommended) to disable this feature.

Wireless Access Point324 Configuring the Wireless APAdvanced Traffic OptimizationFigure 170. Multicast Processing20. Multicast Processing: This sets how multicast traffic is handled. Multicast traffic can be received by a number of subscribing stations at the same time, thus saving a great deal of bandwidth. In some of the options below, the AP uses IGMP snooping to determine the stations that are subscribed to the multicast traffic. IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) is used to establish and manage the membership of multicast groups. Multicast handling options are only applicable to traffic transmitted from the AP to wireless stations. Select one of the following options:•Send multicasts unmodified. This is useful when multicast is not needed because no video or audio streaming is required or when it is used only for discovering services in the network. Some situations where you might use this option are:

Wireless Access Point326 Configuring the Wireless AP(mDNS) are in use. For example, Apple Bonjour finds local network devices such as printers or other computers using mDNS. By default, the list contains the IPv4 multicast address for Apple Bonjour mDNS: 224.0.0.251. For an additional discussion of optimizing Apple Bonjour handling, see the Bonjour Director Application Note in the Xirrus Resource Center.To add a new IP address to the list, type it in the top field and click the Add button to its right. You may only enter IP addresses—host names are not allowed. This is because mDNS is a link local multicast address, and does not require IGMP to the gateway. To remove an entry, select it in the list and click Delete. To remove allentries from the list, click Reset. 22. Multicast Forwarding Multicast Forwarding is a Xirrus feature that forwards selected multicast traffic between wired VLANs and wireless SSIDs. For example, Apple devices use mDNS to advertise and find services, using local network multicasts that are not routed. This creates an issue when you are using Apple devices on the Wireless LAN, and have other devices that provide services connected on the wired infrastructure in a different VLAN, for example, printers and AppleTV devices. One way to address this issue is to set up multicast forwarding between the wireless SSID and the wired VLAN. This requires the wired VLAN to be trunked to the AP. Once configured correctly, mDNS traffic will be forwarded from the specified wireless network(s) to the specified wired VLANs and vice-versa, subject to any mDNS service filtering defined (Step 24). Use multicast forwarding together with multicast VLAN forwarding (Step 23) and mDNS filtering (Step 24) to make services available across VLANs as follows:•In Multicast Forwarding Addresses, enter a list of multicast addresses that you want forwarded, for example, 224.0.0.251 (the multicast address for Bonjour).

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 327•In Multicast VLAN Forwarding, enter a list of VLANs that participate in the multicast forwarding.•In MDNS Filter, specify the mDNS service types that are allowed to be forwarded. •If you leave this field blank, then there is no filter, and mDNS packets for all service types are passed. •If you enter service types, then this acts as an allow filter, and mDNS packets are passed only for the listed service types. Note that mDNS filtering may be used to filter the mDNS packet types that are forwarded within the same VLAN. Also, in conjunction with multicast forwarding, it may be used to filter the mDNS packet types that are forwarded across configured VLANs.After you have entered these settings, when multicast packets arrive from the wired network from one of the Multicast Forwarding Addresses on any VLAN specified in Multicast VLAN Forwarding, they are forwarded to the corresponding wireless SSID for that VLAN.Multicast packets coming in from the wireless network on an SSID tied to one of the specified VLANs and matching one of the Multicast Forwarding Addresses are forwarded to the specified VLANs on the wired network. No modifications are made to the forwarded packets – they are just forwarded between specified VLANs and associated SSIDs.To specify Multicast Forwarding Addresses: enter each IP address in the top field and click the Add button to its right. You may only enter IPv4 #Xirrus strongly recommends the use of MDNS Filters (Step 24) when using multicast forwarding. Only allow required services to be forwarded.Carefully monitor results, as forwarding may flood your network with multicast traffic. Experience has shown Bonjour devices to be very chatty. Also note that since this is link local multicast traffic, it will be sent to every wired port in the VLAN, as IGMP snooping does not work with link local multicast addresses.

Wireless Access Point328 Configuring the Wireless APmulticast addresses - host names are not allowed. To remove an entry, select it in the list and click Delete. To remove all entries from the list, click Reset. 23. Multicast VLAN Forwarding: This is a list of VLANs that participate in the multicast forwarding. Please see the description of multicast forwarding in Step 22 above.Multicast VLAN Forwarding operates as follows:•If you leave this field blank, then there is no filter, and Multicast Forwarding traffic is passed across all VLANs.•If you enter VLANs, then this acts as an allow filter, and Multicast Forwarding traffic is passed only to the listed VLANS.To add a new VLAN to the list, enter its number or name in the top field and click the Add button to its right. You may enter multiple VLANs at once, separated by a space. To remove an entry, select it in the list and click Delete. To remove all entries from the list, click Reset. These VLANs must be trunked to the AP from the LAN switch, and be defined on the AP. See “VLAN Management” on page 216 and “SSID Management” on page 277. #The VLANs you enter must be explicitly defined (see “VLANs” on page 213) in order to participate in multicast forwarding. In fact, the APdiscards packets from undefined VLANs.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 32924. MDNS Filter: There are many different types of services that may be specified in multicast query and response packets. The mDNS filters let you restrict forwarding, so that multicast packets are forwarded only for the services that you explicitly specify. This list may be used to restrict the amount of Apple Bonjour multicast traffic forwarding. For example, you may restrict forwarding to just AppleTV and printing services. Please see the description of multicast forwarding in Step 22 above. The MDNS Filter operates as follows: •If you leave this field blank, then there is no filter, and mDNS packets for all service types are passed. •If you enter service types, then this acts as an allow filter, and mDNS packets are passed only for the listed service types. To add an mDNS packet type to the list of packets that may be forwarded, select it from the drop-down list in the top field and click the Add button to its right. The drop-down list offers packet types such as AirTunes, #Note that Multicast Forwarding and mDNS Filtering capabilities also work if both devices are wireless. For example, let’s say that AppleTV is using wireless to connect to an SSID that is associated with VLAN 56, and the wireless client is on an SSID that is associated with VLAN 58. Normally the wireless client would not be able to use Bonjour to discover the AppleTV because they are on separate VLANs. But if you add 224.0.0.251 to the Multicast Forwarding Addresses, then add VLANs 56 and 58 to the Multicast VLAN Forwarding list, then the wireless client will be able to discover the AppleTV. In this same scenario you could add AppleTV to the MDNS Filter list so that only MDNS packets for the AppleTV service type would be forwarded between VLANs 56 and 58.Note that all the VLANs that you add to this list do not have to be associated with SSIDs. As an example, say that AppleTV is on the wired network on VLAN 56, while the wireless device is connected to an SSID that is associated to VLAN 58. In this case, VLAN 56 and 58 need to be defined on the AP but only VLAN 58 needs to be associated to a SSID.

Wireless Access Point330 Configuring the Wireless APApple-TV, iChat, iPhoto, iTunes, iTunes-Home-Sharing, Internet-Printing, Mobile-Device-Sync, and Secure-Telnet. For example, to allow mirroring of an iPad on an Apple-TV, select Apple-TV.You may define your own type if you do not see the service you want in the drop-down list. Simply enter the mDNS service name that you would like to allow through. Custom mDNS packet types must be prefixed with an underscore, e.g., _airvideoserver. To remove an entry, select it in the list and click Delete. To remove allentries from the list, click Reset. Figure 171. Additional Optimization Settings25. Broadcast Rates: This changes the rates of broadcast traffic sent by the AP (including beacons). When set to Optimized, each broadcast or multicast packet that is transmitted on each radio is sent at the lowest transmit rate used by any client associated to that radio at that time. This results in each IAP broadcasting at the highest AP TX data rate that can be heard by all associated stations, improving system performance. The rate is determined dynamically to ensure the best broadcast/multicast performance possible. The benefit is dramatic. Consider a properly

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 331designed network (having -70db or better everywhere), where virtually every client should have a 54Mbps connection. In this case, broadcasts and multicasts will all go out at 54Mbps vs. the standard rate. Thus, with broadcast rate optimization on, broadcasts and multicasts use between 2% and 10% of the bandwidth that they would in Standard mode.When set to Standard (the default), broadcasts are sent out at the lowest basic rate only — 6 Mbps for 5GHz clients, or 1 Mbps for 2.4GHz clients. The option you select here is applied to all IAPs.26. Load Balancing (ACExpress™): Wi-Fi is a shared medium and only one device can transmit data at any time. Faster devices supporting 802.11ac standards have to wait until the slower devices finish transmitting data. This brings down the overall throughput of the network. For example, an 802.11n client operates more than four times slower than an 802.11ac client, and thus will take four times more air time to communicate a given amount of data. This starves the available bandwidth from faster clients, reducing performance significantly. Xirrus solves this issue with ACExpress that automatically separates devices onto different IAPs by their speeds and capability. ACExpress identifies station capabilities based on fingerprinting and automatically groups devices by performance. It works on all modes (802.11a/b/g/n/ac) and bands (2.4GHz and 5GHz). This results in improved performance for every WLAN client and optimized use of wireless radio resources. Factors including wireless band, number of spatial streams, 802.11ac and 802.11n capability, and signal to noise ratio are considered. This feature also provides automatic load balancing designed to distribute wireless stations across multiple radios rather than having stations associate to the closest radios with the strongest signal strength, as they normally would. In wireless networks, the station selects the radio to which it will associate. The AP cannot actually force load balancing, however it can “encourage” stations to associate in a more optimal fashion to underused radios of the most advantageous type. This option enables or disables active load balancing between the AP IAPs.

Wireless Access Point332 Configuring the Wireless APIf you select On and an IAP is not the best choice for network performance, that IAP will send an “AP Full” message in response to Probe, Association, or Authentication requests. This deters persistent clients from forcing their way onto overloaded IAPs. Note that ACExpress load balancing is not used if:•A station is re-associating—if it was already associated to this IAP, it is allowed back on this IAP immediately. This prevents the station from being bounced between different IAPs.•The IAP’s Band, WiFi Mode, and Channel settings are not at their default values. For example, if the IAP’s WiFi mode is set to 11n-only, load balancing will not be used. See “IAP Settings” on page 313. •If station counts (specified at the IAP, SSID, or band level) are already exceeded.•If a station has already been turned down a number of times when attempting to associate, i.e., the station will eventually be allowed onto the IAP after a number of attempts have failed.Choose Off to disable load balancing. 27. ARP Filtering: Address Resolution Protocol finds the MAC address of a device with a given IP address by sending out a broadcast message requesting this information. ARP filtering allows you to reduce the proliferation of ARP messages by restricting how they are forwarded across the network. You may select from the following options for handling ARP requests:•Off: ARP filtering is disabled. ARP requests are broadcast to radios that have stations associated to them. •Pass-thru: The AP forwards the ARP request. It passes along only ARP messages that target the stations that are associated to it. This is the default value. •Proxy: The AP replies on behalf of the stations that are associated to it. The ARP request is not broadcast to the stations.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 333Note that the AP has a broadcast optimization feature that is always on (it is not configurable). Broadcast optimization restricts all broadcast packets (not just ARP broadcasts) to only those radios that need to forward them. For instance, if a broadcast comes in from VLAN 10, and there are no VLAN 10 users on a radio, then that radio will not send out that broadcast. This increases available air time for other traffic.28. IPv6 Filtering: this setting allows blocking of IPv6 traffic which may be a concern for IT managers. The Xirrus AP currently bridges IPv6 traffic. Set IPv6 filtering On if you wish to prevent the forwarding of IPv6 packets through the AP in both directions—wired network to wireless and wireless network to wired. The default is Off. 29. Xirrus Roaming Layer: Select whether to enable roaming capabilities between IAPs or APs at Layer 2 and 3, or at Layer 2 only. Depending on your wired network, you may wish to allow fast roaming at Layer 3. This may result in delayed traffic. 30. Xirrus Roaming Mode: This feature utilizes the Xirrus Roaming Protocol (RP) ensuring fast and seamless roaming capabilities between IAPs or APs at Layer 2 and Layer 3 (as specified in Step 31), while maintaining security. Fast roaming eliminates long delays for re-authentication, thus supporting time-sensitive applications such as Voice over Wi-Fi (see “Understanding Fast Roaming” on page 312 for a discussion of this feature). RP uses a discovery process to identify other Xirrus APs as fast roaming targets. This process has two modes:•Broadcast — the AP uses a broadcast technique to discover other APs that may be targets for fast roaming. •Tunneled — in this Layer 3 technique, fast roaming target APs must be explicitly specified. To enable fast roaming, choose Broadcast or Tu n n e le d , and set additional fast roaming attributes (Step 31). To disable fast roaming, choose Off. If you enable Fast Roaming, the following ports cannot be blocked:•Port 22610 — reserved for Layer 2 roaming using UDP to share PMK information between APs.

Wireless Access Point334 Configuring the Wireless AP•Ports 15000 to 17999 — reserved for Layer 3 roaming (tunneling between subnets).31. Share Roaming Info With: Three options allow your AP to share roaming information with all APs; just with those that are within range; or with specifically targeted APs. Choose either All, In Range or Tar get Only, respectively.a. Xirrus Roaming Targets: If you chose Ta rge t Onl y, use this option to add target MAC addresses. Enter the MAC address of each target AP, then click on Add (add as many targets as you like). To find a target’s MAC address, open the AP Info window on the target AP and look for IAP MAC Range, then use the starting address of this range. To delete a target, select it from the list, then click Delete.See AlsoCoverage and Capacity PlanningGlobal Settings .11acGlobal Settings .11anGlobal Settings .11bgnGlobal Settings .11nAdvanced RF SettingsIAPsIAP Statistics SummaryLED SettingsIAP Settings

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 335Global Settings .11anThis window allows you to establish global 802.11a IAP settings. These settings include defining which 802.11a data rates are supported, enabling or disabling all 802.11an IAPs, auto-configuration of channel allocations for all 802.11an IAPs, and specifying the fragmentation and RTS thresholds for all 802.11an IAPs.Figure 172. Global Settings .11anProcedure for Configuring Global 802.11an IAP Settings1. 802.11a Data Rates: The AP allows you to define which data rates are supported for all 802.11an radios. Select (or deselect) data rates by clicking in the corresponding Supported and Basic data rate check boxes. •Basic Rate — a wireless station (client) must support this rate in order to associate.•Supported Rate — data rates that can be used to transmit to clients.

Wireless Access Point336 Configuring the Wireless AP2. Data Rate Presets: The Wireless AP can optimize your 802.11a data rates automatically, based on range or throughput. Click Optimize Range to optimize data rates based on range, or click Optimize Throughput to optimize data rates based on throughput. The Restore Defaults button will take you back to the factory default rate settings.3. 802.11a IAP Control: Click Enable 802.11a IAPs to enable all 802.11an IAPs for this AP, or click Disable 802.11a IAPs to disable all 802.11an IAPs.4. Channel Configuration: Click Auto Configure to instruct the AP to determine the best channel allocation settings for each 802.11an IAP and select the channel automatically, based on changes in the environment. This is the recommended method for 802.11a channel allocation (see “RF Spectrum Management” on page 362). Click Factory Defaults if you wish to instruct the AP to return all IAPs to their factory preset channels. As of release 6.3, APs no longer all use the same factory preset values for channel assignments. Instead, if the AP has been deployed for a while and already has data from the spectrum analyzer and Xirrus Roaming Protocol about channel usage on neighboring APs, it performs a quick auto channel using that information (without doing a full RF scan) to make an intelligent choice of channel assignments. If the AP has been rebooted and has no saved configuration or is just being deployed for the first time, it has no prior data about its RF environment. In this case, it will pick a set of compatible channel assignments at random. The following options may be selected for auto configuration: #On the XR-500/600 and XR-1000 Series models, the Factory Defaultsbutton will not restore iap1 to monitor mode. You will need to restore this setting manually. Also, you may need to set Timeshare Mode again - see “RF Monitor” on page 359.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 337•Non-Radar: give preference to channels that are not required to usedynamic frequency selection (DFS) to avoid communicating in thesame frequency range as some radar (also see Step 8 on page 321).•Negotiate: negotiate air-time with other APs before performing a fullscan.Channels Required to Use DFS Radar Avoidance in USA36+40 Non-radar 116 DFS required 44+48 Non-radar 132+136 DFS required52+56 DFS required 140+144 DFS required60+64 DFS required 149+153 Non-radar100+104 DFS required 157+161 Non-radar108+112 DFS required 165 Non-radarChannels Required to Use DFS Radar Avoidance in Europe36+40 Non-radar 116+120* DFS required 44+48 Non-radar 124*+128* DFS required 52+56 DFS required 132+136 DFS required60+64 DFS required 140+144 DFS required100+104 DFS required 149+153 Non-radar108+112 DFS required 157+161 Non-radar* Channels 120, 124, 128 use a10 minute Channel Availability Check (CAC) time in Europe 165 Non-radar

Wireless Access Point338 Configuring the Wireless AP•Full Scan: perform a full traffic scan on all channels on all IAPs to determine the best channel allocation.•Include WDS: automatically assign 5GHz to WDS client links.5. Set Cell Size: Cell Size may be set globally for all 802.11an IAPs to Auto, Large, Medium, Small, or Max using the buttons. For an overview of RF power and cell size settings, please see “RF Power and Sensitivity” on page 361, “Capacity and Cell Sizes” on page 36, and “Fine Tuning Cell Sizes” on page 37. 6. Auto Cell By Channel: By default, this feature is On, and auto cell will adjust the cell size for a radio when nearby APs have radios on the same channel within earshot of each other, so that the two radios minimize interference with each other. If this option is unchecked, then auto cell will adjust the cell size for a radio when nearby APs have radios on the same band, even if they are using different channels (called Auto Cell by Band, or Multichannel Auto Cell). This will result in smaller cell sizes. See “Fine Tuning Cell Sizes” on page 37. 7. Auto Cell Period (seconds): You may set up auto-configuration to run periodically, readjusting optimal cell sizes for the current conditions. Enter a number of seconds to specify how often auto-configuration will run. If you select None, then auto-configuration of cell sizing will not be run periodically. You do not need to run Auto Cell often unless there are a lot of changes in the environment. If the RF environment is changing often, running Auto Cell every twenty-four hours (86400 seconds) should be sufficient). The default value is None.#To use the Auto Cell Size feature, any IAPs that will use Auto Cell must have Cell Size set to auto. For Auto Cell by Channel, it is not necessary for RF Monitor Mode to be turned on, or for there to be a radio set to monitor mode. For Auto Cell by Band, RF Monitor Mode must be set to Dedicated or Timeshare mode, and there must be a radio set to monitor mode. See “RF Monitor” on page 359.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 3398. Auto Cell Size Overlap (%): Enter the percentage of cell overlap that will be allowed when the AP is determining automatic cell sizes. For 100% overlap, the power is adjusted such that neighboring APs that hear each other best will hear each other at -70dB. For 0% overlap, that number is -90dB. The default value is 50%.9. Auto Cell Min Cell Size: Use this setting if you wish to set the minimum cell size that Auto Cell may assign. The values are Default, Large, Medium, or Small.10. Auto Cell Min Tx Power (dBm): Enter the minimum transmit power that the AP can assign to a radio when adjusting automatic cell sizes. The default value is 10. 11. Auto Cell Max Rx Threshold (dBm): Enter the maximum receive threshold that the AP can assign to a radio when adjusting automatic cell sizes. The default value is -80. 12. Auto Cell Configuration: Click this button to instruct the AP to determine and set the best cell size for each 802.11an IAP whose Cell Sizeis auto on the IAP Settings window, based on changes in the environment. This is the recommended method for setting cell size. You may look at the Tx and Rx values on the IAP Settings window to view the cell size settings that were applied. 13. Fragmentation Threshold: This is the maximum size for directed data packets transmitted over the 802.11an radio. Larger frames fragment into several packets, their maximum size defined by the value you enter here. Smaller fragmentation numbers can help to “squeeze” packets through in noisy environments. Enter the desired Fragmentation Threshold value in this field, between 256 and 2346.14. RTS Threshold: The Request To Send (RTS) Threshold specifies the packet size. Packets larger than the RTS threshold will use CTS/RTS prior to transmitting the packet — useful for larger packets to help ensure the success of their transmission. Enter a value between 1 and 2347.15. Max Stations: This defines how many station associations are allowed per 802.11an IAP. Note that the IAPs > Global Settings window and

Wireless Access Point340 Configuring the Wireless APSSIDs — SSID Management window also have station limit settings — Max Station Association per IAP (page 323) and Station Limit(page 284), respectively. If multiple station limits are set, all will be enforced. As soon as any limit is reached, no new stations can associate until some other station has terminated its association. See AlsoCoverage and Capacity PlanningGlobal SettingsGlobal Settings .11bgnGlobal Settings .11nIAPsIAP Statistics SummaryAdvanced RF SettingsIAP Settings

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 341Global Settings .11bgnThis window allows you to establish global 802.11b/g IAP settings. These settings include defining which 802.11b and 802.11g data rates are supported, enabling or disabling all 802.11b/g IAPs, auto-configuring 802.11b/g IAP channel allocations, and specifying the fragmentation and RTS thresholds for all 802.11b/g IAPs.Figure 173. Global Settings .11bgn

Wireless Access Point342 Configuring the Wireless APProcedure for Configuring Global 802.11b/g IAP Settings1. 802.11g Data Rates: The AP allows you to define which data rates are supported for all 802.11g radios. Select (or deselect) 11g data rates by clicking in the corresponding Supported and Basic data rate check boxes.•Basic Rate — a wireless station (client) must support this rate in order to associate.•Supported Rate — data rates that can be used to transmit to clients. 2. 802.11b Data Rates: This task is similar to Step 1, but these data rates apply only to 802.11b IAPs.3. Data Rate Presets: The Wireless AP can optimize your 802.11b/g data rates automatically, based on range or throughput. Click Optimize Rangebutton to optimize data rates based on range, or click on the Optimize Throughput to optimize data rates based on throughput. Restore Defaults will take you back to the factory default rate settings.4. 802.11b/g IAP Control: Click Enable All 802.11b/g IAPs to enable all 802.11b/g IAPs for this AP, or click Disable All 802.11b/g IAPs to disable them. 5. Channel Configuration: Click Auto Configure to instruct the AP to determine the best channel allocation settings for each 802.11b/g IAP and select the channel automatically, based on changes in the environment. This is the recommended method for channel allocation (see “RF Spectrum Management” on page 362). Click Factory Defaults if you wish to instruct the AP to return all IAPs to their factory preset channels. As of release 6.3, APs no longer all use the same factory preset values for channel assignments. Instead, if the AP has been deployed for a while and already has data from the spectrum analyzer and Xirrus Roaming Protocol about channel usage on neighboring APs, it performs a quick auto channel using that information (without doing a full RF scan) to make an intelligent choice of channel assignments. If the AP has been rebooted and has no saved configuration or is just being deployed for the first time, it has no prior data about its RF

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 343environment. In this case, it will pick a set of compatible channel assignments at random. The following options may be selected for auto configuration: •Negotiate: negotiate air-time with other APs before performing a full scan.•Full Scan: perform a full traffic scan on all channels on all IAPs to determine the best channel allocation.•Non-Radar: give preference to channels without radar-detect. See table in “Procedure for Configuring Global 802.11an IAP Settings” on page 335.•Include WDS: automatically assign 5GHz to WDS client links.6. Set Cell Size/ Autoconfigure: Cell Size may be set globally for all 802.11b/g IAPs to auto, large, medium, small, or max using the drop down menu. For an overview of RF power and cell size settings, please see “RF Power and Sensitivity” on page 361, “Capacity and Cell Sizes” on page 36, and “Fine Tuning Cell Sizes” on page 37. 7. Auto Cell By Channel: By default, this feature is On, and auto cell will adjust the cell size for a radio when nearby APs have radios on the same channel within earshot of each other, so that the two radios minimize interference with each other. If this option is unchecked, then auto cell will adjust the cell size for a radio when nearby APs have radios on the same band, even if they are using different channels (called Auto Cell by Band, or Multichannel Auto Cell). This will result in smaller cell sizes. See “Fine Tuning Cell Sizes” on page 37. #On the XR-500/600 and XR-1000 Series, the Factory Defaults button will not restore iap1 to monitor mode. You will need to restore this setting manually. Also, you may need to set Timeshare Mode again - see “RF Monitor” on page 359.

Wireless Access Point344 Configuring the Wireless AP8. Auto Cell Period (seconds): You may set up auto-configuration to run periodically, readjusting optimal cell sizes for the current conditions. Enter a number of seconds to specify how often auto-configuration will run. If you select None, then auto-configuration of cell sizing will not be run periodically. You do not need to run Auto Cell often unless there are a lot of changes in the environment. If the RF environment is changing often, running Auto Cell every twenty-four hours (86400 seconds) should be sufficient). The default value is None.9. Auto Cell Size Overlap (%): Enter the percentage of cell overlap that will be allowed when the AP is determining automatic cell sizes. For 100% overlap, the power is adjusted such that neighboring APs that hear each other best will hear each other at -70dB. For 0% overlap, that number is -90dB. The default value is 50%.10. Auto Cell Min Cell Size: Use this setting if you wish to set the minimum cell size that Auto Cell may assign. The values are Default, Large, Medium, or Small.11. Auto Cell Min Tx Power (dBm): Enter the minimum transmit power that the AP can assign to a radio when adjusting automatic cell sizes. The default value is 10.12. Auto Cell Max Rx Threshold (dBm): Enter the maximum receive threshold that the AP can assign to a radio when adjusting automatic cell sizes. The default value is -80. #To use the Auto Cell Size feature, any IAPs that will use Auto Cell must have Cell Size set to auto. For Auto Cell by Channel, it is not necessary for RF Monitor Mode to be turned on, or for there to be a radio set to monitor mode. For Auto Cell by Band, RF Monitor Mode must be set to Dedicated or Timeshare mode, and there must be a radio set to monitor mode. See “RF Monitor” on page 359.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 34513. Auto Cell Configuration: Click Auto Configure to instruct the AP to determine and set the best cell size for each enabled 802.11b/g IAP whose Cell Size is auto on the IAP Settings window, based on changes in the environment. This is the recommended method for setting cell size. You may look at the Tx and Rx values on the IAP Settings window to view the cell size settings that were applied. 14. 802.11g Only: Choose On to restrict use to 802.11g mode only. In this mode, no 802.11b rates are transmitted. Stations that only support 802.11b will not be able to associate.15. 802.11g Protection: You should select Auto CTS or Auto RTS to provide automatic protection for all 802.11g radios in mixed networks (802.11 b and g). You may select Off to disable this feature, but this is not recommended. Protection allows 802.11g stations to share the IAP with older, slower 802.11b stations. Protection avoids collisions by preventing 802.11b and 802.11g stations from transmitting simultaneously. When Auto CTS or Auto RTS is enabled and any 802.11b station is associated to the IAP, additional frames are sent to gain access to the wireless network. •Auto CTS requires 802.11g stations to send a slow Clear To Send frame that locks out other stations. Automatic protection reduces 802.11g throughput when 802.11b stations are present — Auto CTS adds less overhead than Auto RTS. The default value is Auto CTS. •With Auto RTS, 802.11g stations reserve the wireless media using a Request To Send/Clear To Send cycle. This mode is useful when you have dispersed nodes. It was originally used in 802.11b only networks to avoid collisions from “hidden nodes” — nodes that are so widely dispersed that they can hear the AP, but not each other. When there are no 11b stations associated and an auto-protection mode is enabled, the AP will not send the extra frames, thus avoiding unnecessary overhead. 16. 802.11g Slot: Choose Auto to instruct the AP to manage the 802.11g slot times automatically, or choose Short Only. Xirrus recommends using Auto for this setting, especially if 802.11b devices are present.

Wireless Access Point346 Configuring the Wireless AP17. 802.11b Preamble: The preamble contains information that the AP and client devices need when sending and receiving packets. All compliant 802.11b systems have to support the long preamble. A short preamble improves the efficiency of a network's throughput when transmitting special data, such as voice, VoIP (Voice-over IP) and streaming video. Select Auto to instruct the AP to manage the preamble (long and short) automatically, or choose Long Only.18. Fragmentation Threshold: This is the maximum size for directed data packets transmitted over the 802.11b/g IAP. Larger frames fragment into several packets, their maximum size defined by the value you enter here. Enter the desired Fragmentation Threshold value, between 256 and 2346.19. RTS Threshold: The RTS (Request To Send) Threshold specifies the packet size. Packets larger than the RTS threshold will use CTS/RTS prior to transmitting the packet — useful for larger packets to help ensure the success of their transmission. Enter a value between 1 and 2347.20. Max Stations: This defines how many station associations are allowed per 802.11bgn IAP. Note that the IAPs > Global Settings window and SSIDs > SSID Management window also have station limit settings — Max Station Association per IAP (page 323) and Station Limit(page 284), respectively. If multiple station limits are set, all will be enforced. As soon as any limit is reached, no new stations can associate until some other station has terminated its association. See AlsoCoverage and Capacity PlanningGlobal SettingsGlobal Settings .11anGlobal Settings .11nAdvanced RF SettingsLED SettingsIAP SettingsIAP Statistics Summary

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 347Global Settings .11nThis window allows you to establish global 802.11n IAP settings. These settings include enabling or disabling 802.11n mode for the entire AP, specifying the number of transmit and receive chains (data stream) used for spatial multiplexing, setting a short or standard guard interval, auto-configuring channel bonding, and specifying whether auto-configured channel bonding will be static or dynamic.Before changing your settings for 802.11n, please read the discussion in “About IEEE 802.11ac” on page 42. Figure 174. Global Settings .11n

Wireless Access Point348 Configuring the Wireless APProcedure for Configuring Global 802.11n IAP Settings1. 802.11n Data Rates: The AP allows you to define which data rates are supported for all 802.11n radios. Select (or deselect) 11n data rates by clicking in the corresponding Supported and Basic data rate check boxes.•Basic Rate — a wireless station (client) must support this rate in order to associate.•Supported Rate — data rates that can be used to transmit to clients.2. 802.11n Mode: Select Enabled to allow the AP to operate in 802.11n mode. If you select Disabled, then 802.11n operation is disabled on the AP. 3. TX Chains: Select the number of separate data streams transmitted by the antennas of each IAP. The maximum number of chains is determined by whether the AP has 2x2 or 3x3 radios. The default value is always the maximum supported by the radio type. See “Up to Eight Simultaneous Data Streams — Spatial Multiplexing” on page 44.4. RX Chains: Select the number of separate data streams received by the antennas of each IAP. This number should be greater than or equal to TX Chains. The maximum number of chains is determined by whether the AP has 2x2 or 3x3 radios. The default value is always the maximum supported by the radio type. See “Up to Eight Simultaneous Data Streams — Spatial Multiplexing” on page 44.5. Guard interval: Select Short to increase the data transmission rate by decreasing wait intervals in signal transmission. Select Long to use the standard interval. The default is Short. 6. Auto bond 5 GHz channels: Select Enabled to use Channel Bonding on 5 GHz channels and automatically select the best channels for bonding. The default is Enabled. See “80 MHz and 160 MHz Channel Widths (Bonding)” on page 48.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 3497. 5 GHz Channel Bonding: Select Dynamic to have auto-configuration for bonded 5 GHz channels be automatically updated as conditions change. For example, if there are too many clients to be supported by a bonded channel, dynamic mode will automatically break the bonded channel into two channels. Select Static to have the bonded channels remain the same once they are selected. The Dynamic option is only available when Auto bond 5 GHz channels is enabled. The default is Dynamic. See “80 MHz and 160 MHz Channel Widths (Bonding)” on page 48.8. 2.4 GHz Channel Bonding: Select Dynamic to have auto-configuration for bonded 2.4 GHz channels be automatically updated as conditions change. Select Static to have the bonded channels remain the same once they are selected. The default is Dynamic. See “80 MHz and 160 MHz Channel Widths (Bonding)” on page 48.9. Global channel bonding: These buttons allow you to turn channel bonding on or off for all IAPs in one step. The effect of using one of these buttons will be shown if you go to the IAP Settings window and look at the Bond column. Clicking Enable bonding on all IAPs causes all IAPs to be bonded to their auto-bonding channel immediately, if appropriate. For example, the IAP will not be bonded if it is set to monitor mode, and 2.4 GHz radios will not be bonded. Click Disable bonding on all IAPs to turn off bonding on all IAPs immediately. See “80 MHz and 160 MHz Channel Widths (Bonding)” on page 48. Settings in Step 7 and Step 8 are independent of global channel bonding.

Wireless Access Point350 Configuring the Wireless APGlobal Settings .11acThis window allows you to establish global 802.11ac IAP settings. These settings include enabling or disabling 802.11ac mode for the entire AP, specifying the number of data streams used in spatial multiplexing, and setting a short or long guard interval.Before changing your settings for 802.11ac, please read the discussion in “About IEEE 802.11ac” on page 42. Figure 175. Global Settings .11ac

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 351Procedure for Configuring Global 802.11ac IAP Settings1. 802.11ac Mode: Select Enabled to allow the AP to operate in 802.11ac mode. If you select Disabled, then 802.11ac operation is disabled on the AP. 2. 80 MHz Guard interval: This is the length of the interval between transmission of symbols (the smallest unit of data transfer) when you are using 80MHz bonded channels. (See “80 MHz and 160 MHz Channel Widths (Bonding)” on page 48.) Select Short to increase the data transmission rate by decreasing wait intervals in signal transmission. Select Long to use the standard interval. The default is Short. 3. Max MCS: Select the highest Modulation and Coding Scheme level that may be used with 1 or 2 Spatial Streams. For models with 3x3 radios, there is also a setting for 3 Spatial Streams. This setting may be used to limit the highest level of modulation to 64-QAM, or allow 256-QAM with its higher data rate. It also determines the coding scheme used for error correction. Higher MCS levels allocate fewer bits to error correction, and thus a higher proportion is used for data transfer. The default Max MCSvalue is MCS9. The higher the MCS values, the higher the data rate, as shown in 802.11ac Supported Rates, below. Higher MCS levels require higher signal-to-noise ratios (i.e., a less noisy environment) and shorter transmission distances. See “Higher Precision in the Physical Layer” on page 47.The maximum number of separate data streams that may be transmitted by the antennas of each IAP is determined by whether the AP has 2x2 or 3x3 radios. For a device that has 2x2 radios, such as the XR-620, the settings for three spatial streams are not shown. See “Up to Eight Simultaneous Data Streams — Spatial Multiplexing” on page 44.4. 802.11ac Supported Rates: This list shows the optimum data rates that can be expected, based on the number of spatial streams that a station can handle, and on your settings for Max MCS, Guard Interval, and the use of bonded channels, up to 80MHz wide.

Wireless Access Point352 Configuring the Wireless APGlobal Settings .11uUnderstanding 802.11uAs the number of access points available in public venues increases, mobile devices users have a harder time distinguishing usable SSIDs from the tens, if not hundreds of access points visible. Using the 802.11u protocol, access points may broadcast information about the services and access that they offer and to respond to queries for additional information related to the facilities that the downstream service network provides.The type of information broadcast or available from 802.11u-compliant access points includes:zAccess Network Type. Indicates the type of network available. For example: public or private, free or charged, etc.zInternet Connectivity. Indicates whether the network provides Internet connectivity.zAuthentication. Indicates whether additional authentication steps will be required to use the network as well as the network authentication types that are in use.zVenue Information. The type and name of the location where the access point is found.zIdentification. A globally unique identification for the access point.zIPv4/IPv6 Addressing. Indicate the type of IP addressing (IPv4 and/or IPv6) and NATing that is performed by the network.zRoaming Consortium. The service network may be connected to one or more roaming providers, called consortia, that allow access points from multiple service providers to be used transparently through a single paid service. The access point may advertise multiple consortia to mobile devices.zDomain Names. A list of domain names to which the mobile user may end up belonging based on authentication credentials used.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 353zCellular Networks. The service network may have arrangements with one or more cellular service providers who can transparently provide wireless and Internet connectivity.Figure 176. 802.11u Global Settings

Wireless Access Point354 Configuring the Wireless APProcedure for Configuring 802.11u SettingsUse this window to establish the 802.11u configuration. 1. 802.11u Internetworking. Click On to enable 802.11u protocol operation.2. Access Network Type: This indicates the type of network supported by the access point. The choices are:a. Chargeable public networkb. Emergency services only networkc. Free public networkd. Personal device networke. Private network with guest accessf. Test or experimental networkg. Wildcard—all of the networks above are supported. 3. Internet Connectivity. Click Provided if Internet connectivity is available through the access point from the back end provider to which the mobile user ends up belonging. Click Unspecified otherwise—for example, depending on the SLAs (service level agreements) of the mobile user, Internet access may or may not be provided. 4. Additional Step Required for Access. Click Disabled if no additional authentication steps will be required to complete the connection and Enabled otherwise. The available authentication techniques are described in the Network Authentication Types field (Step 13).5. Venue Group. Select the general type of venue that the access point is located in. Various choices are available, including Business, Residential, and Outdoor. For each Venu e Gr oup , a further set of sub-choices are available in the Venue Type field below. The particular name of the venue is specified in the Venue Names field (Step 14).6. Venue Type. For each of the Venue Group choices, a further set of sub-choices are available. For example, if you set Venue Group to Assembly, the choices include Amphitheater, Area, Library, and Theatre.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 3557. HESSID. Enter the globally unique homogeneous ESS ID. This SSID is marked as being HotSpot 2.0 capable. This SSID attribute is global—if 802.11u is enabled and HotSpot 2.0 is enabled, then all SSIDs will have HotSpot 2.0 capability. 8. IPv4 Availability. Select the type of IPv4 addressing that will be assigned by the network upon connection. NATed addresses are IP addresses that have been changed by mapping the IP address and port number to IP addresses and new port numbers routable by other networks. Double NATed addresses go through two levels of NATing. Port restricted IPv4 addresses refer to specific UDP and TCP port numbers associated with standard Internet services; for example, port 80 for web pages. The choices for this field are:a. Double NATed private IPv4 address availableb. IPv4 address not availablec. IPv4 address availability not knownd. Port-restricted IPv4 address availablee. Port-restricted IPv4 address and double NATed IPv4 address availablef. Port-restricted IPv4 address and single NATed IPv4 address availableg. Public IPv4 address availableh. Single NATed private IPv4 address available9. IPv6 Availability. Select the type of IPv6 addressing that is available from the network upon connection.a. IPv6 address not availableb. IPv6 address availability not knownc. IPv6 address available

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 357When Add is clicked the authentication type and optional URL will appear in the list. An authentication type may be deleted by selecting it in the list and clicking Delete. All authentication types may be deleted by clicking Reset.14. Venue Names. The list of names associated with the venue are specified here. A venue name may be added to the list in English or Chinese. Enter the name in the appropriate field and click Add. The name will appear in the list. A name may be deleted by selecting it in the list and clicking Delete. All names may be deleted by clicking Reset.

Wireless Access Point358 Configuring the Wireless APAdvanced RF SettingsThis window allows you to establish RF settings, including automatically configuring channel allocation and cell size, and configuring radio assurance and standby modes. Changes you make on this page are applied to all IAPs, without exception. Figure 177. Advanced RF Settings About Standby ModeStandby Mode supports the AP-to-AP fail-over capability. When you enable Standby Mode, the AP functions as a backup unit, and it enables its radios if it detects that its designated target AP has failed. The use of redundant APs to provide this fail-over capability allows APs to be used in mission-critical

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 359applications. In Standby Mode, an AP monitors beacons from the target AP. When the target has not been heard from for 40 seconds, the standby AP enables its radios until it detects that the target AP has come back online. Standby Mode is off by default. Note that you must ensure that the configuration of the standby AP is correct. This window allows you to enable or disable Standby Mode and specify the primary AP that is the target of the backup unit. See also, “Failover Planning” on page 52. Procedure for Configuring Advanced RF SettingsRF Monitor1. RF Monitor Mode: RF monitoring permits the operation of features like intrusion detection. The monitor may operate in Dedicated mode, or in Timeshare mode which allows the radio to divide its time between monitoring and acting as a standard radio that allows stations to associate to it. Timeshare mode is especially useful for small APs with two IAPs, such as the XR-500/600 and XR-1000 Series, allowing one IAP to be shared between monitoring the airwaves for problems and providing services to stations. Settings allow you to give priority to monitoring or wireless services, depending on your needs. The default Monitor Mode is Off for the XR-500/600 Series, Timeshare mode for XR-1000 Series, and Dedicated for higher models. If Timeshare mode is selected, you may adjust the following settings:•Timeshare Scanning Interval (6-600): number of seconds between monitor (off-channel) scans.•Timeshare Station Threshold (0-240): when the number of stations associated to the monitor radio exceeds this threshold, scanning is halted. •Timeshare Traffic Threshold (0-50000): when the number of packets per second handled by the monitor radio exceeds this threshold, scanning is halted.

Wireless Access Point360 Configuring the Wireless APRF Resilience2. Radio Assurance Mode: When this mode is enabled, the monitor radio performs loopback tests on the AP. This mode requires RF Monitor Mode to be enabled (Dedicated or Timeshare mode, see Step 1) to support self-monitoring functions. It also requires a radio to be set to monitoring mode (see “Enabling Monitoring on the AP” on page 529). Operation of Radio Assurance mode is described in detail in “AP Monitor and Radio Assurance Capabilities” on page 529. The Radio Assurance mode scans and sends out probe requests on each channel, in turn. It listens for all probe responses and beacons. These tests are performed continuously (24/7). If no beacons or probe responses are observed from a radio for a predetermined period, Radio Assurance mode will take action according to the preference that you have specified: •Failure alerts only — The AP will issue alerts in the Syslog, but will not initiate repairs or reboots.•Failure alerts & repairs, but no reboots — The AP will issue alerts and perform resets of one or all of the radios if needed. •Failure alerts & repairs & reboots if needed — The AP will issue alerts, perform resets, and schedule reboots if needed. •Disabled — Disable radio assurance tests (no self-monitoring occurs). Loopback tests are disabled by default.3. Enable Standby Mode: Choose Yes to enable this AP to function as a backup unit for the target AP, or choose No to disable this feature. See “About Standby Mode” on page 358. 4. Standby Target Address: If you enabled the Standby Mode, enter the MAC address of the target AP (i.e., the address of the primary AP that is being monitored and backed up by this AP). To find this MAC address, open the AP Info window on the target AP, and use the Gigabit1 MAC Address.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 361RF Power and Sensitivity For an overview of RF power and cell size settings, please see “Capacity and Cell Sizes” on page 36 and “Fine Tuning Cell Sizes” on page 37. 5. Set Cell Size: Cell Size may be set globally for all enabled IAPs to Auto, Large, Medium, Small, or Max using the buttons. 6. Auto Cell Period (seconds): You may set up auto-configuration to run periodically, readjusting optimal cell sizes for the current conditions. Enter a number of seconds to specify how often auto-configuration will run. If you select None, then auto-configuration of cell sizing will not be run periodically. You do not need to run Auto Cell often unless there are a lot of changes in the environment. If the RF environment is changing often, running Auto Cell every twenty-four hours (86400 seconds) should be sufficient). The default value is None.7. Auto Cell Size Overlap (%): Enter the percentage of cell overlap that will be allowed when the AP is determining automatic cell sizes. For 100% overlap, the power is adjusted such that neighboring APs that hear each other best will hear each other at -70dB. For 0% overlap, that number is -90dB. The default value is 50%.8. Auto Cell Min Cell Size: Use this setting if you wish to set the minimum cell size that Auto Cell may assign. The values are Default, Large, Medium, or Small.9. Auto Cell Min Tx Power (dBm): Enter the minimum transmit power that the AP can assign to a radio when adjusting automatic cell sizes. The default value is 10.#To use the Auto Cell Size feature, the following additional settings are required: all IAPs that will use Auto Cell must have Cell Size set to auto. See “Procedure for Manually Configuring IAPs” on page 314. It is not necessary for RF Monitor Mode to be turned on, and you don’t need to have any radio set to monitor mode. See “RF Monitor” on page 359.

Wireless Access Point362 Configuring the Wireless AP10. Auto Cell Configuration: Click this button to instruct the AP to determine and set the best cell size for each enabled IAP whose Cell Sizeis auto on the IAP Settings window, based on changes in the environment. This is the recommended method for setting cell size. You may look at the Tx and Rx values on the IAP Settings window to view the cell size settings that were applied. 11. Sharp Cell: This feature reduces interference between neighboring APs or other Access Points by limiting to a defined boundary (cell size) the trailing edge bleed of RF energy. Choose On to enable the Sharp Cell functionality, or choose Off to disable this feature. See also, “Fine Tuning Cell Sizes” on page 37. This feature is available on 802.11n radios on APs, but not on 802.11ac radios.The Sharp Cell feature only works when the cell size is Small, Medium, or Large (or Auto) — but not Max. If IAP cell size is set to Max, the Sharp Cell feature will be disabled for that radio. RF Spectrum Management12. Configuration Status: Shows the status of auto channel configuration. If an operation is in progress, the approximate time remaining until completion is displayed; otherwise Idle is displayed. 13. Band Configuration: Automatic band configuration is the recommended method for assigning bands to the abgn IAPs. It runs only on command, assigning IAPs to the 2.4GHz or 5GHz band when you click the Auto Configure button. The AP uses its radios to listen for other APs on the same channel, and it assigns bands based on where it finds the least interference. Auto band assigns as many IAPs to the 5 GHz band as possible when there are other APs within earshot. It does this by determining how many APs are in range and then picking the number of radios to place in the 2.4 GHz band. Note that for another AP to be considered to be in range, the other AP must be visible via both the wireless and wired networks—the AP must be listed in the Network Map table, its entry must have In

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 363Range set to Yes, and it must have at least one active IAP with an SSID that has broadcast enabled.Auto band runs separately from auto channel configuration. If a radio’s band is changed, associated stations will be disconnected and will then reconnect. 14. Channel Configuration: Automatic channel configuration is a method for channel allocation. When the AP performs auto channel configuration, you may optionally instruct it to first negotiate with any other nearby APs that have been detected, to determine whether to stagger the start time for the procedure slightly. Thus, nearby APs will not run auto channel at the same time. This prevents APs from interfering with each other’s channel assignments. The Configuration Status field displays whether an Auto Configure cycle is currently running on this AP or not. Click Auto Configure to instruct the AP to determine the best channel allocation settings for each enabled IAP and select the channel automatically, based on changes in the environment. This is the recommended method for channel allocation (see “RF Spectrum Management” on page 362). The following options may be selected for auto configuration: •Negotiate: negotiate air-time with other APs before performing a full scan. Negotiating is slower, but if multiple APs are configuring channels at the same time the Negotiate option ensures that multiple APs don't select the same channels. Turning off the Negotiate option allows the Auto Configure button to manually perform auto channel without waiting, and may be used when you know that no other nearby APs are configuring their channels. #Note that Auto Channel normally assigns individual channels. However, if you select Auto bond 5GHz channels on the Global Settings .11n page, and have 40MHz channels set up prior to running Auto Channel, those bonds will be preserved. 80MHz bonds will not be preserved.

Wireless Access Point364 Configuring the Wireless AP•Full Scan: perform a full traffic scan on all channels on all IAPs to determine the best channel allocation.•Non-Radar: give preference to channels without radar-detect. See table in “Procedure for Configuring Global 802.11an IAP Settings” on page 335. •Include WDS: automatically assign 5GHz to WDS client links.Click Factory Defaults if you wish to instruct the AP to return all IAPs to their factory preset channels. APs do not use the same factory preset values for channel assignments. Instead, if the AP has been deployed for a while and already has data from the spectrum analyzer and Xirrus Roaming Protocol about channel usage on neighboring APs, it performs a quick auto channel using that information (without doing a full RF scan) to make an intelligent choice of channel assignments. If the AP has been rebooted and has no saved configuration or is just being deployed for the first time, it has no prior data about its RF environment. In this case, it will pick a set of compatible channel assignments at random. 15. Auto Channel Configuration Mode: This option allows you to instruct the AP to auto-configure channel selection for each enabled IAP when the AP is powered up. Choose On AP PowerUp to enable this feature, or choose Disabled to disable this feature.16. Auto Channel Configure on Time: This option allows you to instruct the AP to auto-configure channel selection for each enabled IAP at a time you specify here. Leave this field blank unless you want to specify a time at which the auto-configuration utility is initiated. Time is specified in hours and minutes, using the format: [day]hh:mm [am|pm]. If you omit the optional day specification, channel configuration will run daily at the #On XR-500/600 and XR-1000 Series models, the Factory Defaults button will not restore iap1 to monitor mode. You will need to restore this setting manually. Also, you may need to set RF Monitor Mode to Timeshare Mode again - see “RF Monitor” on page 359.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 365specified time. If you do not specify am or pm, time is interpreted in 24-hour military time. For example, Sat 11:00 pm and Saturday 23:00 are both acceptable and specify the same time. 17. Channel List Selection: This list selects which channels are available to the auto channel algorithm. Channels that are not checked are left out of the auto channel selection process. Note that channels that have been locked by the user are also not available to the auto channel algorithm.18. Auto Channel List: Use All Channels selects all available channels (this does not include locked channels). Use Defaults sets the auto channel list back to the defaults. This omits newer channels (100-140) — many wireless NICs don’t support these channels. Station AssuranceStation assurance monitors the quality of the connections that users are experiencing on the wireless network. You can quickly detect stations that are having problems and take steps to correct them. Use these settings to establish threshold values for errors and other problems. Station assurance is enabled by default, with a set of useful default thresholds that you may adjust as desired.When a connection is experiencing problems and reaches one of these thresholds in the specified period of time, the AP responds with several actions: an event is triggered, a trap is generated, and a Syslog message is logged. For example, if a client falls below the threshold for Min Average Associated Time, this “bouncing” behavior might indicate roaming problems with the network’s RF design, causing the client to bounce between multiple APs and not stay connected longer than the time to re-associate and then jump again. This can be corrected with RF adjustments. Station assurance alerts you to the fact that this station is encountering problems.

Wireless Access Point366 Configuring the Wireless APFigure 178. Station Assurance (Advanced RF Settings)19. Enable Station Assurance: This is enabled by default. Click No if you wish to disable it, and click Yes to re-enable it. When station assurance is enabled, the AP will monitor connection quality indicators listed below and will display associated information on the Station Assurance Status page. When a threshold is reached, an event is triggered, a trap is generated, and a Syslog message is logged. 20. Period: In seconds, the period of time for a threshold to be reached. For example, the AP will check whether Max Authentication Failures has been reached in this number of seconds. 21. Min Average Associated Time: (seconds) Station assurance detects whether the average length of station associations falls below this threshold during a period. 22. Max Authentication Failures: Station assurance detects whether the number of failed login attempts reaches this threshold during a period. 23. Max Packet Error Rate: (%) Station assurance detects whether the packet error rate percentage reaches this threshold during a period. 24. Max Packet Retry Rate: (%) Station assurance detects whether the packet retry rate percentage reaches this threshold during a period. 25. Min Packet Data Rate: (Mbps) Station assurance detects whether the packet data rate falls below this threshold during a period.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 36726. Min Received Signal Strength: (dB) Station assurance detects whether the strength of the signal received from the station falls below this threshold during a period. 27. Min Signal to Noise Ratio: (dB) Station assurance detects whether the ratio of signal to noise received from the station falls below this threshold during a period. 28. Max Distance from AP: Min Received Signal Strength: (feet) Station assurance detects whether the distance of the station from the AP reaches this threshold during a period. See AlsoCoverage and Capacity PlanningGlobal Settings .11anGlobal Settings .11bgnGlobal Settings .11nIAPsIAP SettingsRadio AssuranceHotspot 2.0 Understanding Hotspot 2.0Hotspot 2.0 is a part of the Wi-Fi Alliance’s Passpoint certification program. It specifies additional information above and beyond that found in 802.11u, which allows mobile clients to automatically discover, select, and connect to networks based on preferences and network optimization. Mobile clients that support Hotspot 2.0 are informed of an access point’s support via its beacon message.Hotspot 2.0 messages forward several types of information to clients, including:zUplink and Downlink SpeedszLink StatuszFriendly NamezConnection Capabilities The access point will restrict the protocols that can be used by a specification of protocol and port numbers.

Wireless Access Point368 Configuring the Wireless APProcedure for Hotspot 2.0 SettingsUse this window to establish the Hotspot 2.0 configuration. 1. Hotspot 2.0. Click Enabled to enable Hotspot 2.0 operation.2. Downstream Group-addressed Forwarding. Click Enabled to allow the access point to forward group-addressed traffic (broadcast and multicast) to all connected devices. Click Disabled to cause the access point to convert group-addressed traffic to unicast messages.3. WAN Downlink Speed. Enter the WAN downlink speed in kbps into the field.4. WAN Uplink Speed. Enter the WAN uplink speed in kbps into the field.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 369Figure 179. Hotspot 2.0 Settings5. English/Chinese Operator Friendly Name. Enter an English or Chinese name into one of the fields. An incorrectly entered name can be deleted by clicking the corresponding Delete.6. Connection Capabilities. A Hotspot 2.0 access point limits the particular protocols that clients may use. The set of default protocols is shown initially. This table specifies the protocols in terms of:a. A common Name, such as FTP or HTTP.

Wireless Access Point370 Configuring the Wireless APb. A Protocol number. For example 1 for ICMP, 6 for TCP, 17 for UDP, and 50 for Encapsulated Security Protocol in IPsec VPN connections.c. Port number for UDP/TCP connection.d. Status: one of open, closed or unknown.Any of the entries may be deleted by clicking the corresponding Deletebutton. New entries may be created by entering the name of the protocol in the box beside the Create button, and then clicking Create. The new protocol will be added to the list with zeros in the protocol fields and unknown for the status. Enter the appropriate Protocol and Port values before setting the Status field to open.NAI RealmsUnderstanding NAI Realm AuthenticationA network access identifier (NAI) is a specification of a particular user. A NAI takes the general form of an e-mail address. Examples of NAIs are: joe@example.comfred@foo-9.example.comjack@3rd.depts.example.comfred.smith@example.comFigure 180. NAI Realms The NAI Realm is the part of the NAI following the @ sign. For example, you might enter: example.com, 3rd.depts.example.com, and foo-9.example.com. Use the NAI Realms page, in conjunction with the NAI EAP page, to specify the authentication techniques to be used to access that realm with appropriate parameters.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 371Procedure for NAI Realms SettingsUse this window to establish the names of the supported realms. 1. Enter the realm name. Enter the name of a realm in the box to the left of the Create button and click Create. The realm will be added to the NAI Realms list. Any of the realms may be deleted by clicking the corresponding Delete button.2. Enter Authentication Information. The NAI EAP page is used to specify authentication for a realm. Click on the name of a realm to go to the NAI EAP page for that realm. See “NAI EAP” on page 371. NAI EAPThis window allows specification of the authentication techniques for a realm. Figure 181. NAI EAPProcedure for NAI Realms Settings1. Select the realm to be configured in the NAI Realm drop down. 2. Select EAP Methods. Each realm may support up to five EAP authentication methods. Beside each of the five numbers (1, 2, 3, 4, 5) select the method from the drop down. The choices are:

Wireless Access Point372 Configuring the Wireless AP•EAP-AKA•EAP-AKA’ (EAP-AKA prime)•EAP-FAST•EAP-MSCHAP-V2•EAP-SIM•EAP-TLS•EAP-TTLS•GTC•MD5-Challenge•None•PEAP3. Specify Authentication Parameters. Each of the authentication methods may specify up to five authentication parameters. To specify the parameters click on the number corresponding to the authentication method; i.e. 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5. This displays the EAP n Auth Parameter Configuration below the list of EAP Methods. For up to five of the parameters, select the Type and Value or Vendor ID / Type. The choices for the Type are:•Credential Type•Expanded EAP Method•Expanded Inner EAP Method•Inner Authentication EAP Method Type•Non-EAP Inner Authentication Type•None•Tunneled EAP Method Credential TypeFor each type, a value or a vendor ID and type must be specified, as applicable.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 373Intrusion Detection The Xirrus AP employs a number of IDS/IPS (Intrusion Detection System/ Intrusion Prevention System) strategies to detect and prevent malicious attacks on the wireless network. Use this window to adjust intrusion detection settings. Figure 182. Intrusion Detection Settings

Wireless Access Point374 Configuring the Wireless APThe AP provides a suite of intrusion detection and prevention options to improve network security. You can separately enable detection of the following types of problems:zRogue Access Point Detection and BlockingUnknown APs are detected, and may be automatically blocked based on a number of criteria. See “About Blocking Rogue APs” on page 376. zDenial of Service (DoS) or Availability Attack Detection A DoS attack attempts to flood an AP with communications requests so that it cannot respond to legitimate traffic, or responds so slowly that it becomes effectively unavailable. The AP can detect a number of types of DoS attacks, as described in the table below. When an attack is detected, the AP logs a Syslog message at the Alert level.zImpersonation DetectionThese malicious attacks use various techniques to impersonate a legitimate AP or station, often in order to eavesdrop on wireless communications. The AP detects a number of types of impersonation attacks, as described in the table below. When an attack is detected, the AP logs a Syslog message at the Alert level.Type of Attack DescriptionDoS AttacksBeacon Flood Generating thousands of counterfeit 802.11 beacons to make it hard for stations to find a legitimate AP.Probe Request Flood Generating thousands of counterfeit 802.11 probe requests to overburden the AP.Authentication Flood Sending forged Authenticates from random MAC addresses to fill the AP's association table.Association Flood Sending forged Associates from random MAC addresses to fill the AP's association table.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 375Disassociation Flood Flooding the AP with forged Disassociation packets.Deauthentication Flood Flooding the AP with forged Deauthenticates.EAP Handshake Flood Flooding an AP with EAP-Start messages to consume resources or crash the target.Null Probe Response Answering a station probe-request frame with a null SSID. Many types of popular NIC cards cannot handle this situation, and will freeze up.MIC Error Attack Generating invalid TKIP data to exceed the AP's MIC error threshold, suspending WLAN service.Disassociation Attack (Omerta) Sending forged disassociation frames to all stations on a channel in response to data frames. Deauthentication Attack Sending forged deauthentication frames to all stations on a channel in response to data frames. Duration Attack (Duration Field Spoofing)Injecting packets into the WLAN with huge duration values. This forces the other nodes in the WLAN to keep quiet, since they cannot send any packet until this value counts down to zero. If the attacker sends such frames continuously it silences other nodes in the WLAN for long periods, thereby disrupting the entire wireless service. Impersonation AttacksAP impersonation Reconfiguring an attacker's MAC address to pose as an authorized AP. Administrators should take immediate steps to prevent the attacker from entering the WLAN. Station impersonation Reconfiguring an attacker's MAC address to pose as an authorized station. Administrators should take immediate steps to prevent the attacker from entering the WLAN. Evil twin attack Masquerading as an authorized AP by beaconing the WLAN's service set identifier (SSID) to lure users.Type of Attack Description

Wireless Access Point376 Configuring the Wireless APAbout Blocking Rogue APsIf you classify a rogue AP as blocked (see “Rogue Control List” on page 264), then the AP will take measures to prevent stations from staying associated to the rogue. When the monitor radio is scanning, any time it hears a beacon from a blocked rogue it sends out a broadcast “deauth” signal using the rogue's BSSID and source address. This has the effect of disconnecting all of a rogue AP’s clients approximately every 5 to 10 seconds, which is enough to make the rogue unusable.The Intrusion Detection window allows you to set up Auto Block parameters so that unknown APs get the same treatment as explicitly blocked APs. This may result in many APs being blocked so use caution with auto block, and be sure to abide by applicable regulations. See the Caution on page 377. By default, auto blocking is turned off. Auto blocking provides two parameters for qualifying blocking so that APs must meet certain criteria before being blocked. This keeps the AP from blocking every AP that it detects. You may:zSet a minimum RSSI value for the AP — for example, if an AP has an RSSI value of -90, it is probably a harmless AP belonging to a neighbor and not in your building.zBlock based on encryption level.zBlock based on whether the AP is part of an ad hoc network or infrastructure network. zSpecify channels to be whitelisted. Rogues discovered on these channels are excluded from auto blocking. This allows specified channels to be freely used by customer or guests for their APs.Sequence number anomaly A sender may use an Add Block Address request (ADDBA - part of the Block ACK mechanism) to specify a sequence number range for packets that the receiver can accept. An attacker spoofs an ADDBA request, asking the receiver to reset its sequence number window to a new range. This causes the receiver to drop legitimate frames, since their sequence numbers will not fall in that range. Type of Attack Description

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 377RF Intrusion Detection and Auto Block ModeProcedure for Configuring Intrusion Detection 1. Intrusion Detection Mode: This option allows you to choose the Standard intrusion detection method, or you can choose Off to disable this feature. See “AP Monitor and Radio Assurance Capabilities” on page 529 for more information. •Standard — enables the monitor radio to collect Rogue AP information. •Off — intrusion detection is disabled. 2. Auto Block Unknown Rogue APs: Enable or disable auto blocking (see “About Blocking Rogue APs” on page 376). You will be shown a Caution statement (below) and the WMI will ask whether you wish to proceed. !CAUTION: Selecting and engaging Auto Block may result in many APs being blocked. User caution in configuring and operating any form of Auto Block is highly recommended, as auto-blocking may be subject to significant statutory and U.S. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) regulatory controls, restrictions, enforcement actions and penalties. User is solely responsible for making sure that all uses of any auto-blocking feature(s) of this product are fully compliant with all applicable statutes, regulations, FCC enforcement actions and rules, etc. regarding Wi-Fi blocking. See for example FCC Enforcement Advisory No. 2015-01 dated January 27, 2015. All uses of any auto-blocking feature(s) in this product are solely at User's discretion and individual choice. User assumes all liability and responsibility for all such uses. Xirrus assumes no liability or responsibility for any discretionary decision by User to configure, engage and to use any auto-blocking feature(s) of this product.

Wireless Access Point378 Configuring the Wireless APNote that in order to set Auto Block RSSI and Auto Block Level, you must set Auto Block Unknown Rogue APs to On. Then the remaining Auto Block fields will be active.3. Auto Block RSSI: Set the minimum RSSI for rogue APs to be blocked. APs with lower RSSI values will not be blocked. They are assumed to be farther away, and probably belonging to neighbors and posing a minimal threat. 4. Auto Block Level: Select rogue APs to block based on the level of encryption that they are using. The choices are: •Automatically block unknown rogue APs regardless of encryption.•Automatically block unknown rogue APs with no encryption.•Automatically block unknown rogue APs with WEP or no encryption.5. Auto Block Network Types: Select rogues to automatically block by applying the criteria above only to networks of the type specified below. The choices are: •All — the unknown rogues may be part of any wireless network.•IBSS/AD Hoc only — only consider auto blocking rogues if they belong to an ad hoc wireless network (a network of client devices without a controlling Access Point, also called an Independent Basic Service Set — IBSS).•ESS/Infrastructure only — only consider auto blocking rogue APs if they are in infrastructure mode rather than ad hoc mode.6. Auto Block Whitelist: Use this list to specify channels to be excluded from automatic blocking. If you have enabled Auto Block, it will not be applied to rogues detected on the whitelisted channels. Use the Add Channel drop-down to add entries to the Channels list, one at a time. You can delete entries from the list by selecting them from the Remove Channel drop-down list.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 379DoS Attack Detection Settings7. Attack/Event: The types of DoS attack that you may detect are described in the Type of Attack Table page 374. Detection of each attack type may be separately enabled or disabled. For each attack, a default Threshold and Period (seconds) are specified. If the number of occurrences of the type of packet being detected exceeds the threshold in the specified number of seconds, then the AP declares that an attack has been detected. You may modify the Threshold and Period. For the Flood attack settings, you also have a choice of Auto or Manual. •Manual mode — threshold and period settings are used to detect a flood. Packets received are simply counted for the specified time period and compared against the flood threshold. The default for all of the floods is Manual mode. •Auto mode — the AP analyzes current traffic for packets of a given type versus traffic over the past hour to determine whether a packet flood should be detected. In this mode, threshold and period settings are ignored. This mode is useful for floods like beacon or probe floods, where the numbers of such packets detected in the air can vary greatly from installation to installation. 8. Duration Attack NAV (ms): For the duration attack, you may also modify the default duration value that is used to determine whether a packet may be part of an attack. If the number of packets having at least this duration value exceeds the Threshold number in the specified Period, an attack is detected. Impersonation Detection Settings9. Attack/Event: The types of impersonation attack that you may detect are described in Impersonation Attacks page 375. Detection of each attack type may be turned On or Off separately. For AP or Station Impersonation attacks, a default Threshold and Period (seconds) are specified. If the number of occurrences of the type of packet being detected exceeds the threshold in the specified number of seconds, then

Wireless Access Point380 Configuring the Wireless APthe AP declares that an attack has been detected. You may modify the Threshold and Period. 10. Sequence number anomaly: You may specify whether to detect this type of attack in Data traffic or in Management traffic, or turn Off this type of detection. LED Settings This window assigns behavior preferences for the AP’s IAP LEDs.Figure 183. LED SettingsProcedure for Configuring the IAP LEDs1. LED State: This option determines which event triggers the LEDs, either when the IAP is enabled or when a station associates with the IAP. Choose On Radio Enabled or On First Association, as desired. You may also choose Disabled to keep the LEDs from being lit. The LEDs will still light during the boot sequence, then turn off. 2. LED Blink Behavior: This option allows you to select when the IAP LEDs blink, based on the activities you check here. From the choices available, select one or more activities to trigger when the LEDs blink. For default behavior, see “AP LED Operating Sequences” on page 73.3. Click the Save button if you wish to make your changes permanent.See AlsoGlobal SettingsGlobal Settings .11an

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 381Global Settings .11bgnIAPsLED Boot SequenceDSCP MappingsDSCP is the 6-bit Differentiated Services Code Point (DiffServ) field in the IPv4 or IPv6 packet header, defined in RFC2474 and RFC2475. The DSCP value classifies the packet to determine the Quality of Service (QoS) required. DSCP replaces the outdated Type of Service (TOS) field. Figure 184. DSCP MappingsThe DSCP Mappings page shows the default mapping of each of the 64 DSCP values to one of the AP’s four QoS levels, and allows you to change these mappings.For a detailed discussion of the operation of QoS and DSCP mappings on the AP, please see “Understanding QoS Priority on the Wireless AP” on page 271. Procedure for Configuring DSCP Mappings 1. DSCP to QoS Mapping Mode: Use the On and Off buttons to enable or disable the use of the DSCP mapping table to determine the QoS level applied to each packet.

Wireless Access Point382 Configuring the Wireless AP2. DSCP to QoS Mapping: The radio buttons in this table show all DSCP values (0 to 63), and the QoS level to which each is mapped. To change the QoS level applied to a DSCP value, click the desired QoS level (0 to 3) underneath it.Roaming AssistRoaming assist is a Xirrus feature that helps clients roam to APs that will give them high quality connections. Some smart phones and tablets will stay connected to a radio with poor signal quality, even when there’s a radio with better signal strength within range. When roaming assist is triggered, the AP “assists” the device by deauthenticating it when certain parameters are met. This encourages a client with a high roaming threshold (i.e., a device that may not roam until signal quality has seriously dropped) to move to an AP that gives it a better signal. The deauthentication is meant to cause the client to choose a different radio. You can specify the device types that will be assisted in roaming. The roaming threshold is the difference in signal strength between radios that will trigger a deauthentication. If the client’s signal is lower than the sum of the threshold and the stronger neighbor radio’s RSSI, then we “assist” the client. For example:Threshold = -5RSSI of neighbor AP = -65RSSI of client = -75-75 < (-5 + -65) : Therefore client will roamAnother example:Threshold = -15RSSI of neighbor AP = -60RSSI of station = -70-70 > (-15 + -60) : Client will not roam

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 383Figure 185. Roaming Assist Procedure for Configuring Roaming Assist1. Enable Roaming Assist: Use the Yes and No buttons to enable or disable this feature.2. Backoff Period: After deauthenticating a station, it may re-associate to the same radio. To prevent the AP from repeatedly deauthenticating the station when it comes back, there is a backoff period. This is the number of seconds the station is allowed to stay connected before another deauthentication.3. Roaming Threshold: This is the difference in signal strength between radios that will trigger a deauthentication, as described in the discussion above. In most cases, this will be a negative number. Triggering occurs regardless of whether the data rate falls below the Minimum Data Rate.4. Minimum Data Rate: Roaming assist will be triggered if the station’s packet data rate is below this value (1-99 Mbps), regardless of whether the Roaming Threshold has been reached.

Wireless Access Point384 Configuring the Wireless AP5. Device Classes: If you select any classes of device, such as Phone and Notebook, then roaming assist will only be applied to those kinds of stations. Many small, embedded devices (such as phones, tablets, and music players) are sticky—they have high roaming thresholds that tend to keep them attached to the same radio despite the presence of radios with better signal strength. You may check off one or more entries, but use care since roaming assist may cause poor results in some cases.If no Device Classes or Device Types are selected, then all devices are included in roaming assist. If you select entries in both Device Classes and Device Types, then stations matching any of your selected types/classes will be assisted when the Roaming Threshold or Minimum Data Rate trigger is satisfied.6. Device Types: If you select any types of device, such as iPhone and Samsung, then roaming assist will only be applied to those types of stations and to your selected Device Types as well, when the Roaming Threshold or Minimum Data Rate trigger is satisfied. If no Device Classes or Device Types are selected, then all devices are considered for roaming assist.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 385WDS This is a status-only window that provides an overview of all WDS links that have been defined. Wireless Distribution System (WDS) is a system that enables the interconnection of access points wirelessly, allowing your wireless network to be expanded using multiple access points without the need for a wired backbone to link them. The Summary of WDS Client Links shows the WDS links that you have defined on this AP and identifies the target AP for each by its base MAC address. The Summary of WDS Host Links shows the WDS links that have been established on this AP as a result of client APs associating to this AP (i.e., the client APs have this AP as their target). The summary identifies the source (client) AP for each link. Both summaries identify the IAPs that are part of the link and whether the connection for each is up or down. See “WDS Planning” on page 63 for an overview. Figure 186. WDS About Configuring WDS LinksA WDS link connects a client AP and a host AP (see Figure 187 on page 386). The host must be the AP that has a wired connection to the LAN. Client links from one or more APs may be connected to the host, and the host may also have client links. See “WDS Planning” on page 63 for more illustrations. The configuration for WDS is performed on the client AP only, as described in “WDS Client Links” on page 387. No WDS configuration is performed on the host AP. First you will set up a client link, defining the target (host) AP and SSID, and the maximum number of IAPs in the link. Then you will select the IAPs to be used

Wireless Access Point386 Configuring the Wireless APin the link. When the client link is created, each member IAP will associate to aradio on the host AP. You may wish to consider configuring the WDS link IAPs so that only the WDS link SSIDs are active on them. See “Active IAPs” on page 298. Figure 187. Configuring a WDS Link #Once some IAP has been selected to act as a WDS client link, you will not be allowed to use auto-configured cell sizing on that IAP (since the cell must extend all the way to the other AP). #When configuring WDS, if you use WPA-PSK (Pre-Shared Key) as a security mechanism, ensure that EAP is disabled. Communication between two APs in WDS mode will not succeed if the client AP has both PSK and EAP enabled on the SSID used by WDS. See SSID Management. #TKIP encryption does not support high throughput rates, per IEEE 802.11n. TKIP should never be used for WDS links on APs. #WDS is available on most Xirrus APs, including models with two radios (WDS will operate on either of the radios). If WDS is not available, the settings are grayed out or not shown.a2(52)a3(149)a4(40)a10(52)a9(149)a8(40)CLIENT HOSTWired LANClient Link

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 387Long Distance LinksIf you are using WDS to provide backhaul over an extended distance, use the WDS Dist. (Miles) setting to prevent timeout problems associated with long transmission times. (See “IAP Settings” on page 313) Set the approximate distance in miles between this IAP and the connected AP in the WDS Dist. (Miles) column. This will increase the wait time for frame transmission accordingly. See AlsoSSID ManagementActive IAPsWDS Client LinksWDS StatisticsWDS Client Links This window allows you to set up a maximum of four WDS client links.Figure 188. WDS Client Links

Wireless Access Point388 Configuring the Wireless APProcedure for Setting Up WDS Client Links1. Host Link Stations: Check the Allow checkbox to instruct the AP to allow stations to associate to IAPs on a host AP that participates in a WDS link. The WDS host IAP will send beacons announcing its availability to wireless clients. This is disabled by default. 2. Roaming RSSI Threshold: If an AP is deployed on a mobile site (on a train, for example), you can use WDS to implement a wireless backhaul that will roam between APs at fixed locations. When another candidate AP for WDS host target is found, the client link will roam to the new AP if its RSSI is stronger than the RSSI of the current host connection by at least the Roaming RSSI Threshold. The default is 6 dB. 3. Roaming RSSI Averaging Weight: This weight changes how much the latest RSSI reading influences the cumulative weighted RSSI value utilized in checking the threshold (above) to make a roaming decision. The higher the weight, the lower the influence of a new RSSI reading. This is not exactly a percentage, but a factor in the formula for computing the current RSSI value based on new readings: #Once some IAP has been selected to act as a WDS client link, no other association will be allowed on that IAP. However, wireless associations will be allowed on the WDS host side of the WDS session.#In situations like the one in the next step, where WDS is used by an APmounted on a high speed train, STP can add significant delay (often on the order of 30 to 60 seconds) while initially analyzing network topology. In such a situation, it may be desirable to disable STP. See “Management Control” on page 238. #Caution: If Spanning Tree Protocol (“Management Control” on page 238) is disabled and a network connection is made on the WDS Client AP’s Gigabit link that can reach the WDS Host AP, broadcast and multicast packets will not be blocked. A broadcast storm may cause a network outage.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 389StoredRSSI = (StoredRSSI * RoamingAvgWeight+ NewRSSIReading * (100 - RoamingAvgWeight)) / 100This prevents erroneous or out-of-line RSSI readings from causing the WDS link to jump to a new AP. Such readings can result from temporary obstructions, external interference, etc. 4. Click the Save button after you are finished making changes on this page if you wish to make your changes permanent.WDS Client Link Setting: 5. Enable/Disable/Reset All Links: Click the appropriate button to:•Enable All Links—this command activates all WDS links configured on the AP.•Disable All Links—this command deactivates all WDS links configured on the AP. It leaves all your settings unchanged, ready to re-enable.•Reset All Links—this command tears down all links configured on the AP and sets them back to their factory defaults, effective immediately.6. Client Link: Shows the ID (1 to 4) of each of the four possible WDS links. 7. Enabled: Check this box if you want to enable this WDS link, or uncheck the box to disable the link. 8. Max IAPs Allowed (1-3): Enter the maximum number of IAPs for this link, between 1 and 3.9. Target AP Base MAC Address: Enter the base MAC address of the target AP (the host AP at the other side of this link). To find this MAC address, open the WDS window on the target AP, and use This AP Addresslocated on the right under the Summary of WDS Host Links. To allow any Xirrus AP to be accepted as a WDS target, enter the Xirrus OUI: 00:0f:7d:00:00:00 or 50:60:28:00:00:00 (this is useful for roaming in a mobile deployment, as described in Step 2 on page 388). 10. Target SSID: Enter the SSID that the target AP is using.

Wireless Access Point390 Configuring the Wireless AP11. Username: Enter a username for this WDS link. A username and password is required if the SSID is using PEAP for WDS authentication from the internal RADIUS server.12. Password: Enter a password for this WDS link.13. Clear Settings: Click on the Clear button to reset all of the fields on this line. WDS Client Link IAP Assignments: 14. For each desired client link, select the IAPs that are part of that link. The IAP channel assignments are shown in the column headers.15. IAP Channel Assignment: Click Auto Configure to instruct the AP to automatically determine the best channel allocation settings for each IAP that participates in a WDS link, based on changes in the environment. These changes are executed immediately, and are automatically applied. See AlsoSSID ManagementWDS PlanningWDSWDS Statistics

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 391FiltersThe Wireless AP’s integrated firewall uses stateful inspection to speed the decision of whether to allow or deny traffic. Filters are used to define the rules used for blocking or passing traffic. Filters can also set the VLAN and QoS level for selected traffic. Filters may be used based on your experience with Application Control Windows to eliminate or cap the amount of traffic allowed for less desirable applications. Figure 189. Filters User connections managed by the firewall are maintained statefully — once a user flow is established through the AP, it is recognized and passed through without application of all defined filtering rules. Stateful inspection runs automatically on the AP. The rest of this section describes how to view and manage filters.Filters are organized in groups, called Filter Lists. A filter list allows you to apply a uniform set of filters to SSIDs or Groups very easily. Similarly, you can use a custom Application Control list to create a set of applications that are handled as a group for convenience when creating filters. The read-only Filters window provides you with an overview of all filter lists and Application Control lists that have been defined for this AP, and the filters that have been created in each list. Filters are listed in the left side column by name #The air cleaner feature offers a number of predetermined filter rules that eliminate a great deal of unnecessary wireless traffic. See “Air Cleaner” on page 468.

Wireless Access Point392 Configuring the Wireless APunder the filter list to which they belong. Each filter entry is a link that takes you to its Filter Management entry, and the list includes information about the type of filter, the protocol it is filtering, which port it applies to, source and destination addresses, and QoS and VLAN assignments.Filter Lists This window allows you to create filter lists and custom Application Control lists. These lists offer you ease of management of groups of filters and applications. The AP comes with one predefined filter list, named Global, which cannot be deleted. Filter lists (including Global) may be applied to SSIDs or to Groups. Only one filter list at a time may be applied to a group or SSID (although the filter list may contain a number of filters). All filters are created within filter lists. Use a custom Application Control list to create a set of applications that may then be handled as a group when creating filters. Thus, one filter can apply to an entire group of applications. This keeps the number of filters down and makes them much easier to manage. For example, you can include BitTorrent, Netflix, and Fox Sports in an Application Control list, and then create a single filter to block all three during business hours.Figure 190. Filter Lists

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 393Procedure for Managing Filter Lists1. Stateful Filtering: Stateful operation of the integrated firewall can be Enabled or Disabled. If you have a large number of filters and you don’t want to apply them in a stateful manner, you may use this option to turn the firewall off.2. Application Control: Operation of the Application Control feature may be Enabled or Disabled. See “Application Control Windows” on page 150.Filter Lists3. New Filter List Name: Enter a name for the new filter list in this field, then click on the Create button to create the list. All new filters are disabled when they are created. The new filter list is added to the Filter List table in the window. Click on the filter list name, and you will be taken to the Filter Management window for that filter list. You may create up to 16 filter lists (up to 8 on the XR-500 Series). 4. On: Check this box to enable this filter list, or leave it blank to disable the list. If the list is disabled, you may still add filters to it or modify it, but none of the filters will be applied to data traffic. 5. Filters: This read-only field displays the number of filters that belong to this filter list.6. SSIDs: This read-only field lists the SSIDs that use this filter list.7. User Groups: This read-only field lists the Groups that use this filter list.8. Delete: Click this button to delete this filter list. The Global filter list may not be deleted.#The Application Control feature is only available if the AP license includes Application Control. If a setting is unavailable (grayed out), then your license does not support the feature. See “About Licensing and Upgrades” on page 412.

Wireless Access Point394 Configuring the Wireless APCustom Application Control List9. Create New List: Enter a name for the new Application Control list in this field, followed by the ENTER key. The new list is added to the Application Control Lists table, and this list may be used to create filters. You may create up to 15 lists (on the XR-520, the limits are reduced to 8 lists and 125 applications per list). Click in the field for the new Application Control list to display a list of applications. Add the desired applications to this list, one at a time. Up to 250 applications may be added. This field also provides a search feature—type in a string, and the list will display only the choices whose names contain that string in any position. Click the Apply button on the right when done adding applications to this list. Click Reset if you want to remove all of the entries from this field, i.e., to empty it. Click Remove to delete this Application Control list. You may use Reset All Lists on the bottom to delete all lists. 10. Click the Save button if you wish to make your changes permanent.11. Click a filter list to go to the Filter Management window to create and manage the filters that belong to this list.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 395Filter Management This window allows you to create and manage filters that belong to a selected filter list, based on the filter criteria you specify. Filters are an especially powerful feature when combined with the intelligence provided by the “Application Control Windows” on page 150. Figure 191. Filter Management Based on Application Control’s analysis of your wireless traffic, you can create filters to enhance wireless usage for your business needs:zUsage of non-productive and risky applications like BitTorrent can be restricted.zTraffic for mission-critical applications like VoIP and WebEx may be given higher priority (QoS).Filters are applied in order, from top to bottom. Click here to change the order.

Wireless Access Point396 Configuring the Wireless APzNon- critical traffic from applications like YouTube may be given lower priority (QoS) or bandwidth allowed may be capped per station or for all stations. zTraffic flows for specific applications may be controlled by sending them into VLANs that are designated for that type of traffic.zFilters may be applied at specified times—for example, no games allowed from 8 AM to 6 PM.Note that filtering is secondary to the stateful inspection performed by the integrated firewall. Traffic for established connections is passed through without the application of these filtering rules.Procedure for Managing Filters1. Insert Filter Presets: A number of predefined “Air Cleaner” filters are available using these buttons. You can use these rules to eliminate a great deal of unnecessary wireless traffic, resulting in improved performance. Web Access Only may be selected to allow only web access protocols to be used. For more information, please see “Air Cleaner” on page 468. When you select one of the filter presets, the appropriate filters will be added to the list, so that you can see exactly what settings have been used.2. Filter List: Select the filter list to display and manage on this window. All of the filters already defined for this list are shown, and you may create additional filters for this list. You may create up to 50 filters per list (up to 25 per list on the XR-500 Series).3. Add a New Filter: To add a new filter, enter its name in the field next to the Create button at the bottom of the filter list, then click Create. All new filters are added to the table of filters in the window. The filter name must be unique within the list, but it may have the same name as a filter in a different filter list. Two filters with the same name in different filter lists will be completely unrelated to each other — they may be defined with different parameter values.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 397Viewing or modifying existing filter entries:4. Filter: Select a filter entry if you wish to modify it. Source and destination details are displayed below the bottom of the list. 5. On: Use this field to enable or disable this filter.6. Log: Log usage of this filter to Syslog.7. Type: Choose whether this filter will be an Allow filter or a Deny filter. If you define the filter as an Allow filter, then any traffic that meets the filter criteria will be allowed. If you define the filter as a Deny filter, any traffic that meets the filter criteria will be denied.8. Layer: Select network layer 2 or 3 for operation of this filter.9. Protocol/Number: Choose a specific filter protocol from the pull-down list, or choose numeric and enter a Number, or choose any to instruct the AP to use the best filter. This is a match criterion.10. Application: Shows an application to filter, based on settings from Step 22 and Step 23. If an application has been selected, you should not enterProtocol or Port—application filters have intelligence built into them, and perform filtering that you cannot accomplish with just port and protocol. See “Application Control Windows” on page 150. 11. Port/Number: This is a match criterion. From the pull-down list, choose the target port type for this filter. Choose any to instruct the AP to apply the filter to any port, or choose 1-65534 and enter a Number. To enter a Range of port numbers, separate the start and end numbers with a colon as shown: Start # : End #.12. DSCP: Differentiated Services Code Point or DiffServ (DSCP) —Optional. Set packets ingressing from the wireless network that match the filter criteria to this DSCP level (0 to 63) before sending them out on the wired network. Select the level from the pull-down list. Level 0 has the lowest priority; level 63 has the highest priority. By default, this field is blank and the filter does not modify DSCP level. See “Understanding QoS Priority on the Wireless AP” on page 271.

Wireless Access Point398 Configuring the Wireless AP13. QoS: (Optional) Set packets ingressing from the wired network that match the filter criteria to this QoS level (0 to 3) before sending them out on the wireless network. Select the level from the pull-down list. Level 0 has the lowest priority; level 3 has the highest priority. By default, this field is blank and the filter does not modify QoS level. See “Understanding QoS Priority on the Wireless AP” on page 271.14. VLAN/Number: (Optional) Set packets that match the filter criteria to this VLAN. Select a VLAN from the pull-down list, or select numeric and enter the number of a previously defined VLAN (see “VLANs” on page 213). 15. Traffic Limit: Instead of simply allowing the specified traffic type, you may cap the amount of traffic allowed that matches this filter. First choose the units for the limit: kbps for all stations in total or per station, or packets per second (pps) for all stations in total or per station. Then enter the numeric limit in the field to the left.16. Scheduled Time: shows the times at which this filter is active, if you have established a schedule in Step 19. 17. Move Up/Down: The filters are applied in the order in which they are displayed in the list, with filters on the top applied first. To change an entry’s position in the list, just click its Up or Down button. 18. To delete a filter, click its Delete button. Select an existing filter entry in the list to view or modify Scheduling or Address Configuration, shown below the list of filters:19. Scheduling: Use these fields if you wish to specify a scheduled time for this filter to be active. Check the checkboxes for the days that the filter is to be active. By default, the filter is active all day on each selected day. You may also specify a time of day for the filter to be active by entering a Start and Stop time in 24:00 hour format (i.e., 6:30 PM is 18:30). To use this feature, you must enter both a Start and a Stop time.You cannot apply one filter for two or more scheduled periods, but you can create two filters to achieve that. For example, one filter could deny

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 399the category Games from 9:00 to 12:00, and another could deny them from 13:00 to 18:00. Similarly, you might create two rules for different days—one to deny Games Mon-Fri 8:00 to 18:00, and another to deny them on Sat. from 8:00 to 12:00. 20. Source Address: Define a source address to match as a filter criterion. Click the radio button for the desired type of address (or other attribute) to match. Then specify the value to match in the field to the right of the button. Choose Any to use any source address. Check Not to match any address except for the specified address.21. Destination Address: Define a destination address to match as a filter criterion. Click the radio button for the desired type of address (or other attribute) to match. Then specify the value to match in the field to the right of the button. Choose any to use any destination address. Check Not to match any address except for the specified address.Below the Source and Destination Addresses, you may enter a Category or an Application or an Application List to be matched by the filter:22. Category: If you wish this filter to apply to a particular category of application, such as File-Transfer or Database, select it from the listed options. Figure 192. Filter Category or Application23. Applications: If you wish this filter to apply to a specific application, such as WebEx, click the letter or number that it starts with. Then select the desired application. You may select a Category or an Application, but not both.

Wireless Access Point400 Configuring the Wireless AP24. Application Lists: If you wish this filter to apply to a previously configured Custom Application Control List, select the desired list. You may not select a Category or an Application in addition to the list.25. Click the Save button if you wish to make your changes permanent.See AlsoFiltersFilter StatisticsUnderstanding QoS Priority on the Wireless APVLANs

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 401Clusters Clusters allow you to configure multiple APs at the same time. Using WMI (or CLI), you may define a set of APs that are members of the cluster. Then you may enter Cluster mode for a selected cluster, which sends all successive configuration commands issued via CLI or WMI to all of the member APs. When you exit cluster mode, configuration commands revert to applying only to the AP to which you are connected.The Clusters window displays a summary of defined clusters and members.Figure 193. ClustersClusters are discussed in the following topics:zCluster ManagementCluster Management Clusters are displayed and managed in the single Cluster Management window. This window allows new clusters to be created and APs to be added or removed from clusters.The Clusters window provides you with an overview of all clusters that have been defined for this AP, and the APs that have been added to each. Clusters are listed and cluster members may be displayed by expanding a cluster entry. Each AP entry displays its IP Address, Username, and Password. All existing clusters #An XR-500 or XR-1000 Series AP cannot act as the Cluster controller. It will operate correctly as a member of a cluster. #An XR-500 or XR-1000 Series AP cannot act as the Cluster controller. It will operate correctly as a member of a cluster.

Wireless Access Point402 Configuring the Wireless APare shown, along with the number of APs currently in each. Up to 16 clusters may be created, with up to 50 APs in each.Figure 194. Cluster ManagementProcedure for Managing Cluster Definition1. New Cluster Name: Enter a name for the new cluster in the field to the left of the Create button, then click Create to add this entry. The new cluster is added to the list in the window.2. Delete: To delete a cluster, expand the entry for the cluster and click its Remove Cluster button.3. Click the Save button if you wish to make your changes permanent.4. Expand the entry for a cluster to add or remove APs in the cluster.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 403Note that the AP on which you are currently running WMI is not automatically a member of the cluster. If you would like it to be a member, you must add it explicitly. Procedure for Managing Clusters1. Edit Cluster: Expand the entry for the cluster to be managed. All of the APs already defined for this cluster are shown, and you may add additional APs to this list.2. Add New Member: Select a new cluster member from the Select New Member drop-down list. This list shows Arrays/APs that are accessible to this AP for management purposes. 3. User/Password: In these columns, enter the administrator name and password for access to the AP. 4. Click the +Add button to enter the AP. 5. To delete an AP, click its button. 6. Click the Save button if you wish to make your changes permanent.In Cluster Mode, all configuration operations that you execute in WMI or CLI are performed on the members of the cluster. They are not performed on the AP where you are running WMI, unless it is a member of the cluster. You must use the Save button at the top of configuration windows to permanently save your changes in Cluster Mode, just as you would in normal operation. When you are done configuring APs in the cluster, return to this window and click the button to leave Cluster Mode. Procedure for Operating in Cluster Mode1. Operate: Select a defined cluster from the menu to the left of the Operate Cluster button and then click on the Operate Cluster button.2. Select a WMI page for settings that you wish to configure for the cluster, and proceed to make the desired changes. 3. Proceed to any additional pages where you wish to make changes.

Wireless Access Point404 Configuring the Wireless AP4. Some Status and Statistics windows will present information for all APs in the cluster. 5. Click the Save button when done if you wish to save changes on the cluster member APs.6. Exit: Click the button to the right of the operating cluster to terminate Cluster Mode. The WMI returns to normal operation — managing only the AP to which it is connected. Status and Statistics Windows in Cluster ModeIn Cluster Mode, many of the Status and Statistics windows will display information for all of the members of the cluster. You can tell whether a window displays cluster information — if so, it will display the Cluster Name near the top, as shown in Figure 195. Figure 195. Viewing Statistics in Cluster ModeYou have the option to show aggregate information for the cluster members, or click the Group by AP check box to separate it out for each AP.Cluster Name Exit Cluster Mode

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 405You may terminate cluster mode operation by clicking the button to the right of the row.

Wireless Access Point406 Configuring the Wireless APMobileMobile Device Management (MDM) servers enable you to manage large-scale deployments of mobile devices. They may include capabilities to handle tasks such as enrolling devices in your environment, configuring and updating device settings over-the-air, enforcing security policies and compliance, securing mobile access to your resources, and remotely locking and wiping managed devices. Xirrus APs support the AirWatch MDM, using an AirWatch API call to determine the status of a user’s device and allow access to the wireless network only if the device is enrolled and compliant with the policies of the service. AirWatchIndividual SSIDs may be configured to require AirWatch enrollment and compliance before a mobile device such as a smartphone or tablet is admitted to the wireless network. The AP uses the AirWatch API with the settings below to request that AirWatch check whether the mobile device is enrolled and compliant with your wireless policies.Figure 196. AirWatch SettingsBefore configuring AirWatch settings on the AP, you must have an AirWatch account, already set up with your organization’s compliance policies and other configuration as required by AirWatch.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 407The AP settings entered on this page are mostly taken from AirWatch. Once you have entered these settings, your users will be constrained to follow a set of steps to access the wireless network, as described in “User Procedure for Wireless Access” on page 408.Procedure for Managing AirWatch If you have configured the Mobile Device Management setting on one or more SSIDs to use AirWatch, then the API specified below will be used to determine the admissibility of a mobile device requesting a connection to the wireless network.1. API URL: Obtain this from your AirWatch server’s System / Advanced / Site URLs page. Copy the REST API URL string into this field. This specifies the AirWatch API that the AP will call to determine the enrollment and compliance status of a mobile device attempting to connect to the AP. The steps that the user will need to take are described in “User Procedure for Wireless Access” on page 408.2. API Key: Obtain this from your AirWatch server. Go to the System / Advanced / API / REST page, General tab, and copy the API Key string into this field. The key is required for access to the API. 3. API Username: Enter the user name for your account on the AirWatch server. 4. API Password: Enter the password for your account on the AirWatch server. 5. API Timeout: (seconds) If AirWatch does not respond within this many seconds, the request fails.6. API Polling Period: (seconds) Mobile device enrollment and compliance status will be checked via polling at this interval. Note that there may thus be a delay before the mobile device will be admitted. 7. API Access Error: Specify whether or not to allow access if AirWatch fails to respond. The default is to Block access.

Wireless Access Point408 Configuring the Wireless AP8. Redirect URL: Obtain this from your AirWatch server. Go to the System / Advanced / Site URLs page, and copy the Enrollment URL string into this field. When a mobile device that is not currently enrolled with AirWatch attempts to connect to the AP, the device displays a page directing the user to install the AirWatch agent and go to the AirWatch enrollment page. Note that Android devices will need another form of network access (i.e. cellular) to download the agent, since un-enrolled devices will not have access to download it via the AP. See “User Procedure for Wireless Access” on page 408 for more details.9. You must configure the Mobile Device Management setting on one or more SSIDs to use AirWatch, as described in Procedure for Managing SSIDs (see Step 17 on page 283). User Procedure for Wireless Access1. A user attempts to connect a mobile device to an SSID that uses AirWatch.2. The device will authenticate according to the SSID’s authentication settings (Open, Radius MAC, 802.1x).3. The user browses to any destination on the Internet.The AP asks the user to wait while it checks device enrollment and compliance status by querying the AirWatch API with the device MAC address. 4. If AirWatch responds that the device is enrolled and compliant, the device will be allowed into the network. The device will be considered compliant if AirWatch finds that the device does not violate any applicable policies for that device. (If no policies are assigned to the device in AirWatch, then the device is compliant by default.)#Device enrollment and compliance status will be checked via polling so there may be a delay before the device will be allowed in. That delay will depend on the API Polling Period setting.

Wireless Access PointConfiguring the Wireless AP 4095. If the device is not enrolled, all user traffic will be blocked, except that HTTP traffic is redirected to an intermediate page on the AP that tells the user to download and install the AirWatch agent. The page displays a link to the AirWatch-provided device enrollment URL. This link is a pass-though that allows the user to go through the enrollment process. The user will need to enter your organization’s AirWatch Group ID and individual account credentials when requested.Once the agent is installed, the user must start again at Step 1.6. If the device is enrolled with AirWatch but not compliant with applicable policies, all traffic will be blocked as in Step 5 above, and the HTTP traffic will be redirected to an intermediate page on the AP that tells the user which policies are out of compliance.This page contains a button for the user to click when the compliance issues have been corrected. This button causes AirWatch to again check device compliance. The user's browser is redirected to a “wait” page until the AP has confirmed compliance with AirWatch. The user’s browser is then redirected to a page announcing that the device is now allowed network access.If the AP is unable to access AirWatch to obtain enrollment and compliance status (for example, due to bad credentials, timeout, etc.), device access to the network will be granted according to the API Access Error setting (Allow or Block). If this field is set to Block, traffic will be blocked as in Step 5 above and HTTP traffic will be redirected to an informational page that informs the user that AirWatch cannot be contacted at this time and advises the user to contact the network administrator. If this field is set to Allow, then the device will be allowed network access.#Android devices must go to the PlayStore to install the agent BEFORE they can go through the enrollment process. This means un-enrolled devices need another form of network access (i.e., cellular or an unrestricted SSID) to download this agent, as they are not permitted access to the PlayStore.Once the agent is installed, the user must start again at Step 1.

Wireless Access Point410 Configuring the Wireless AP

Wireless Access PointUsing Tools on the Wireless AP 411Using Tools on the Wireless APThese WMI windows allow you to perform administrative tasks on your AP, such as upgrading software, rebooting, uploading and downloading configuration files, and other utility tasks. Tools are described in the following sections: z“System Tools” on page 412z“CLI” on page 426z“API Documentation” on page 428z“Options” on page 433 z“Logout” on page 434This section does not discuss using status or configuration windows. For information on those windows, please see: z“Viewing Status on the Wireless AP” on page 95z“Configuring the Wireless AP” on page 161#If you have added modular IAPs to your AP, note that its model number will be automatically adjusted to reflect the count and types of IAPs currently installed. See Upgrading with 802.11ac radio modules.

Wireless Access Point412 Using Tools on the Wireless APSystem ToolsFigure 197. System ToolsThis window allows you to manage files for software images, configuration, and Web Page Redirect (WPR), manage the system’s configuration parameters, reboot the system, and use diagnostic tools. The page contains a number of sections that you may expand.About Licensing and UpgradesIf you are a customer using XMS, when you upgrade an AP using XMS, your license will automatically be updated for you first.The AP’s license determines some of the features that are available on the AP. For example, the Application Control feature is an option that must be separately licensed. To check the features supported by your license, see “Access Point Information” on page 102. Status is shown here

Wireless Access PointUsing Tools on the Wireless AP 413When upgrading the AP for a new major release, the AP needs the new license key that enables the operation of that release before upgrading. If you do not obtain the new license first, the AP will display a message and revert to the previous software image, rather than trying to run new software for which it is not licensed. Major releases will need a new license key, but minor releases will not. For example, to upgrade from ArrayOS Release 7.0.5 to Release 7.1, you must enter a new license key. To upgrade from ArrayOS Release 7.0.1 to Release 7.0.3, use your existing license key.If you are not using XMS to perform a software upgrade, you may use the Auto-provisioning Start button to get an updated license from Xirrus before performing an upgrade. See “Configuration Management” on page 417. If you will be entering license keys and performing upgrades on many APs, the effort will be streamlined by using the Xirrus Management System (XMS), especially if you are using XMS Cloud.Procedure for Configuring System ToolsThese tools are broken down into the following sections:zSystemzRemote Boot ServiceszConfiguration ManagementzDiagnosticszApplication Control Signature File ManagementzWeb Page Redirect (Captive Portal)zNetwork ToolszProgress Bar and Status Frame

Wireless Access Point416 Using Tools on the Wireless APbutton to discard any configuration changes which have not been saved since the last reboot. You may specify an optional Delay period in seconds to wait before the reboot starts. Remote Boot Services(Automatic updates from remote image or configuration file)Figure 198. Remote Boot ServicesThe AP software image or configuration file can be downloaded from an external server. In large deployments, all APs can be pointed to one TFTP server instead of explicitly initiating software image uploads to all APs. When the AP boots, the APwill download the software image from the specified TFTP server. Similarly, if you decide to change a setting in the APs, you can simply modify a single configuration file. After the APs are rebooted, they will automatically download the new configuration file from a single location on the specified TFTP server. 1. Remote TFTP Server: This field defines the path to a TFTP server to be used for automated remote update of software image and configuration files when rebooting. You may specify the server using an IP address or host name. 2. Remote Boot Image: When the AP boots up, it fetches the software image file specified here from the TFTP server defined above, and upgrades to this image before booting. This must be an AP image file with a .binextension. Make sure to place the file on the TFTP server. If you disable the remote boot image (by blanking out this field) or if the image can't be transferred, the AP will fall back to booting whatever image is on the compact flash.

Wireless Access PointUsing Tools on the Wireless AP 417 3. Remote Configuration: When the AP boots up, it fetches the specified configuration file from the TFTP server defined above, and applies this configuration after the local configuration is applied. The remote configuration must be an AP configuration file with a .conf extension. Make sure to place the file on the TFTP server. A partial configuration file may be used. For instance, if you wish to use a single configuration file for all of your APs but don't want to have the same IP address for each AP, you may remove the ipaddr line from the file. You can then load the file on each AP and the local IP addresses will not change.A remote configuration is never saved to the compact flash unless you issue a Save command.Configuration ManagementFigure 199. Configuration Management1. If you need an updated license (for example, if you are upgrading an AP to a new major release—say, from 7.0 to 7.1, and you are not using XMS to #The Remote Boot Image or Remote Configuration update happens every time that the AP reboots. If you only want to fetch the remote image or configuration file one time, be sure to turn off the remote option (blank out the field on the System Tools page) after the initial download. When a remote boot image is used, the image is transferred directly into memory and is never written to the compact flash.

Wireless Access Point418 Using Tools on the Wireless APperform network-wide updates), you may obtain one through Auto-provisioning. Click the Start button, and the AP will contact the Xirrus server with its serial number and MAC address to obtain and install its latest license. If the AP is unable to access the activation server, it will continue to attempt to contact the server at intervals specified by the Polling Interval (the default value is one minute). Click the Stop button if you wish to stop contacting the server.2. Update from Remote File: This field allows you to define the path to a configuration file (one that you previously saved — see Step 4 and Step 6 below). Click on the Browse button if you need to browse for the location of the file, then click Update to update your configuration settings.3. Update from Local File: This field updates AP settings from a local configuration file on the AP. Select one of the following files from the drop-down list: •factory.conf: The factory default settings.•lastboot.conf: The setting values from just before the last reboot.•saved.conf: The last settings that were explicitly saved using the Save button at the top of each window.•history/saved-yyyymmdd-pre-update.conf:history/saved-yyyymmdd-post-update.conf:Two files are automatically saved for a software upgrade or for a license change (including the setting values from just before the upgrade/change was performed, and the initial values afterward. The filename includes the date.•history/saved-yyyymmdd-auto.conf: Each time you use the Save button, an “auto” file is saved with the settings current at that time. •history/saved-yyyymmdd-pre-reset.conf: history/saved-yyyymmdd-post-reset.conf:Each time you use one of the Reset to Factory Default buttons, two files are saved: the setting values from just before the reset, and the initial values afterward. The filename includes the reset date.

Wireless Access PointUsing Tools on the Wireless AP 419•history/saved-yyyymmdd-hhmm.conf: The setting values that were explicitly saved using the Set Restore Point button (see Step 4below).Click Update to update your configuration settings by appending to the current AP configuration. Click Restore to replace the AP configuration with the configuration file selected.Note that the History folder allows a maximum of 16 files. The oldest file is automatically deleted to make room for each new file.4. Save to Local File: There are a few options for explicitly requesting the AP to save your current configuration to a file on the AP:•To view the list of configuration files currently on the AP, click the down arrow to the right of this field. If you wish to replace one of these files (i.e., save the current configuration under an existing file name), select the file, then click Save. Note that you cannot save to the file names factory.conf, lastboot.conf, and saved.conf - these files are write-protected.•You may enter the desired file name, then click Save.•Click Set Restore Point to save a copy of the current configuration, basing the file name on the current date and time. For example: history/saved-20100318-1842.confNote that the configuration is automatically saved to a file in a few situations, as described in Step 3 above. 5. Apply Quick Configuration Template: This offers predefined configuration options such as Classroom and High-Density that capture best practices from years of field experience. If one of the options in the drop-down list is appropriate to your deployment, select it and click #Important! When you have initially configured your AP, or have made significant changes to its configuration, we strongly recommend that you save the configuration to a file in order to have a safe backup of your working configuration.

Wireless Access Point420 Using Tools on the Wireless APApply. For example, the High-Density option uses best practices to configure the AP for high density settings such as lecture halls, convention centers, stadiums, etc.6. Download Current Configuration: Click on the link titled xs_current.conf to download the AP’s current configuration settings to a file (that you can upload back to the AP at a later date). The system will prompt you for a destination for the file. The file will contain the AP’s current configuration values.7. Reset to Factory Defaults: Click on the Reset/Preserve IP Settings button to reset the system’s current configuration settings to the factory default values, except for the AP’s management IP address which is left unchanged. This function allows you to maintain management connectivity to the APeven after the reset. This will retain the Gigabit Ethernet port’s IP address (see “Interfaces” on page 170), or if you have configured management over a VLAN it will maintain the management VLAN’s IP address (see “VLAN Management” on page 216). All other previous configuration settings will be lost.Click Reset to reset all of the system’s current configuration settings to the factory default values, including the management IP address — all previous configuration settings will be lost. The AP’s Gigabit Ethernet ports default to using DHCP to obtain an IP address. #If the IP settings change, the connection to the WMI may be lost.

$Wireless Access PointUsing Tools on the Wireless AP 421Diagnostics8. Diagnostic Log: Click the Create button to update the AP information for use by Xirrus Customer Support personnel. The name of the log file ends with diagnostic.log, and may have an additional prefix. (Figure 200) Figure 200. Saving the Diagnostic LogThis feature is only used at the request of Customer Support. It saves all of the information regarding your AP, including status, configuration, statistics, log files, and recently performed actions. The diagnostic log is always saved on your C:\ drive, so you should immediately rename the file to save it. This way, it will not be lost the next time you save a diagnostic log. Often, Customer Support will instruct you to save two diagnostic logs about ten minutes apart so that they can examine the difference in statistics between the two snapshots (for example, to see traffic and error statistics for the interval). Thus, you must rename the first diagnostic log file. 9. Health Log: This file is created automatically, but only if the APencounters unexpected and serious problems. Normally this file will not exist. The Diagnostic Log Update button has no effect on this file whatsoever. When a health log exists, the filename xs_health.log.bz2 is displayed in blue and provides a link to the log file. Click the link to download this file or to open it with your choice of application. This file is normally only used at the request of Customer Support. #All passwords are stored on the AP in an encrypted form and will not be exposed in the diagnostic log. Click Create to update log$

Wireless Access Point422 Using Tools on the Wireless AP10. Archiving Log: This log saves internal status information that may be needed by Xirrus Customer Support personnel. Click the Start button to start accumulating this information. The size of the file is self-limiting so that you do not need to be concerned about it consuming too much storage space. Click the Stop button to stop accumulating data and make it available in a tar file, named engineeringlogs_<hostname>.tar. A link to this tar file appears. Click it to download the file. If you wish to click the Start button again to accumulate data for a later time interval, you should first download and rename the current file before it gets overwritten.You may use the Clear button to remove the tar file and all temporary data from the AP’s memory. This feature should only used at the request of Customer Support. Application Control Signature File ManagementApplication Control recognizes applications using a file containing the signatures of hundreds of applications. This file may be updated regularly to keep up as Internet usage evolves over time. The latest signature file is available from the same location that you use to download the latest ArrayOS release: ArrayOS - XR Platform Latest Release. Note that new ArrayOS releases will automatically contain the latest signature file available at the time of the build. See “Application Control Windows” on page 150 for more information about using Application Control.Figure 201. Managing Application Control Signature files

Wireless Access PointUsing Tools on the Wireless AP 42311. Upload Signature File: First, download the latest signature file from the Xirrus Customer Support site: ArrayOS - XR Platform Latest Release to your file system. Click the Browse button, then browse to locate the new signature file. Click the Upload button when it appears. The new file will be uploaded to the AP and will be used for identifying applications. You must turn Application Control off and back on again on the Filter Lists page to make the new signature file take effect. See “Filter Lists” on page 392. No reboot is required. Active Signature File shows which file is currently being used by Application Control. If you have installed any custom DPI signature files, you may use Manage Signature Files. Web Page Redirect (Captive Portal)The AP uses a Perl script and a cascading style sheet to define the default splash/login Web page that the AP delivers for WPR. You may replace these files with files for one or more custom pages of your own. See Step 14 below to view the default files. See Step 15 page 283 for more information about WPR and how the splash/login page is used.Each SSID that has WPR enabled may have its own page. Custom files for a specific SSID must be named based on the SSID name. For example, if the SSID is named Public, the default wpr.pl and hs.css files should be modified as desired and renamed to wpr-Public.pl and hs-Public.css before uploading to the AP. If you modify and upload files named wpr.pl and hs.css, they will replace the factory default files and will be used for any SSID that does not have its own custom files, per the naming convention just described. Be careful not to replace the default files unintentionally. Figure 202. Managing WPR Splash/Login page files

Wireless Access Point424 Using Tools on the Wireless AP12. Upload File: Use this to install files for your own custom WPR splash/login page (as described above) on the AP. Note that uploaded files are not immediately used - you must reboot the AP first. At that time, the APlooks for and uses these files, if found. Click Choose File to locate the splash/login page files, then click on the Upload button to upload the new files to the AP. You must reboot to make your changes take effect. 13. Remove File: Enter the name of the WPR file you want to remove, then click on the Delete button. You can use the List Files button to show you a list of files that have been saved on the AP for WPR. The list is displayed in the Status section at the bottom of the WMI window. You must reboot to make your changes take effect. 14. Download Sample Files: Click on a link to access the corresponding sample WPR files:•wpr.pl — a sample Perl script. •hs.css — a sample cascading style sheet.Network ToolsFigure 203. System Command (Ping) 15. System Command: Choose Trace Route, Ping., or RADIUS Ping. For Trace Route and Ping, fill in IP Address and Timeout. Then click the Execute button to run the command.

Wireless Access PointUsing Tools on the Wireless AP 425The RADIUS Ping command is a simple utility that tests connectivity to a RADIUS server by attempting to log in with the specified Username and Password. When using a RADIUS server, this command allows you to verify that the server configuration is correct and whether a particular Username and Password are set up properly. If a client is having trouble accessing the network, you can quickly determine if there is a basic RADIUS problem by using the RADIUS Ping tool. For example, in Figure 204 (A), RADIUS Ping is unable to contact the server. In Figure 204 (B), RADIUS Ping verifies that the host information and secret for a RADIUS server are correct, but that the user account information is not. Select RADIUS allows you to select a RADIUS server that you have already configured. When you make a choice in this field, additional fields will be displayed. Set Select RADIUS to External Radius, Internal Radius, or a server specified for a particular SSID, or select Other Serverto specify another server by entering its Host name or IP address, Port, and shared Secret. Enter the RADIUS Credentials: Username and Password. Select the Authentication Type, PAP or CHAP. Click the Execute button to run the command. The message Testing RADIUS connection appears. Click OKto proceed. Figure 204. Radius Ping OutputAB

Wireless Access Point426 Using Tools on the Wireless AP16. IP Address: For Ping or Trace Route, enter the IP address of the target device.17. Timeout: For Ping or Trace Route, enter a value (in seconds) before the action times out.18. Execute System Command: Click Execute to start the specified command. Progress of command execution is displayed in the Progressframe. Results are displayed in the Status frame.Progress Bar and Status FrameThe Progress bar is displayed for commands such as Software Upgrade and Ping. The Status frame presents the output from system commands (Ping and Trace Route), as well as other information, such as the results of software upgrade.CLI The WMI provides this window to allow you to use the AP’s Command Line Interface (CLI). You can enter commands to configure the AP, or display information using show commands. You will not need to log in - you already logged in to the AP when you started the WMI.Figure 205. CLI Window

Wireless Access PointUsing Tools on the Wireless AP 427To enter a command, simply type it in. The command is echoed and output is shown in the normal way — that is, the same way it would be if you were using the CLI directly. You may use the extra scroll bar inside the right edge of the window to scroll through your output. If output runs past the right edge of the screen, there is also a horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of the page. This window has some minor differences, compared to direct use of the CLI via the console or an SSH connection:zThe CLI starts in config mode. All configuration and show commands are available in this mode. You can “drill down” the mode further in the usual way. For example, you can type interface iap to change the mode to config-iap. The prompt will indicate the current command mode, for example:My-AP(config-iap) # zYou can abbreviate a command and it will be executed if you have typed enough of the command to be unambiguous. The command will not auto-complete, however. Only the abbreviated command that you actually typed will be shown. You can type a partial command and press Tab to have the command auto-complete. If the partial command is ambiguous a list of legal endings is displayed. zEntering quit will return you to the previously viewed WMI page.zMost, but not all, CLI commands can be run in this window. Specifically the run-test menu of commands is not available in this window. To use the run-test command, please connect using SSH and use CLI directly, or use the System Tools described in this chapter, such as Trace Route, Ping, and RADIUS Ping. Help commands (the ? character) are available, either at the prompt or after you have typed part of a command.

Wireless Access Point428 Using Tools on the Wireless APAPI DocumentationAPs provide an API interface conforming to the RESTful API model. Developers may use this read-only API to read status, statistics, and settings from the AP. The interactive API Documentation page provides documentation for the API. You may use the AP’s API for purposes such as integrating with third party applications or creating your own applications for network monitoring and analysis. Using the RESTful API eliminates the need to use CLI scripting, or to use SNMP which can be cumbersome for polling large amounts of data. Results are returned in JavaScript Object Notation (JSON) format, a text-based open standard designed for human-readable data interchange. The API documentation is tightly integrated with the server code. The API Documentation page allows you to interact with the API in a sandbox UI that gives clear insight into how the API responds to parameters and options. Security for the API is provided with OAuth, as described in “OAuth 2.0 Management” on page 265. Once registration is completed and a permanent token for this AP has been obtained, your application may access the RESTful API using the client_id and the token at the following URL: https://[AP hostname or IP address]/api/v3/[api-name] Figure 206. API Documentation

Wireless Access PointUsing Tools on the Wireless AP 429The API Documentation page lists all of the APIs that are available, lists their calling parameters, if any, and allows you to perform sample calls and view sample output. Status/SettingsThe RESTful API on the AP is broken into these two main headings: status and settings. Each is a node that may be clicked to expand or collapse the list of corresponding API requests available on the AP. Since this is a read-only API, the list consists exclusively of GET operations.The figure below shows part of the list displayed by clicking /settings. Click again to collapse (hide) the list.Status requests include GET requests for many of the status and statistics items described in the chapter titled, “Viewing Status on the Wireless AP” on page 95. Settings requests include GET requests for many of the settings described in the chapter titled, “Configuring the Wireless AP” on page 161GET RequestsEach request name in the list is a link. Click it to see more information and to try the API and see its output. heFigure 207. API — GET Request Details

Wireless Access Point430 Using Tools on the Wireless APThe figure above shows the GET request for ethernet-stats{name}. Click again to collapse (hide) the API details.High-level details are shown, including the Response Class name and the Response Content Type (limited to JSON at this time). Trying a GET RequestThe Try it out! button allows you to send the GET request to the AP API and see its response. Developers can use this feature to design and implement applications that use this response.Enter any necessary Parameters and click the Try it out! button. Most GET requests do not use any parameters. If they are required, their names will be listed and there will be a field or a drop-down list to specify each one. An example is shown in Figure 207. In some cases, there may be two versions of a request, with and without parameters. For example, GET /ethernet-stats/{name} returns status and statistics for a particular Ethernet port, while GET /ethernet-stats/ returns information for all Ethernet ports.

Wireless Access PointUsing Tools on the Wireless AP 431Figure 208. API — GET Request ResponseThe figure above shows the response for ethernet-stats{name}. The response is produced in the human-readable JSON format. The status and statistics data shown are as described in “Viewing Status on the Wireless AP” on page 95. Click Hide Response if you wish to hide the output. The Response Code and the Response Header are standard for HTTP(S).

Wireless Access Point432 Using Tools on the Wireless APAPI Documentation ToolbarFigure 209. API Documentation ToolbarThe Status and Settings sections each have a toolbar as shown above, offering the following options.zShow/Hide—expands or collapses this list of GET requests. Hiding and then showing again displays the requests as they were before, i.e., expanded GET requests will still be expanded when displayed again. zList Operations—expands this list of GET requests. Each individual entry is collapsed.zExpand Operations—shows all of the GET requests in this list. Each individual entry is expanded.zRaw—shows the source XML code for this list of GET requests. Click the link for the API Documentation page again to return to the normal display.

Wireless Access PointUsing Tools on the Wireless AP 433OptionsThis window allows you to customize the behavior of the WMI. Figure 210. WMI Display OptionsProcedure for Configuring Options1. Refresh Interval in Seconds: Many of the windows in the Status section of the WMI have an Auto Refresh option. You may use this setting to change how often a status or statistics window is refreshed, if its auto refresh option is enabled. Enter the desired number of seconds between refreshes. The default refresh interval is 30 seconds.

Wireless Access Point434 Using Tools on the Wireless APLogoutClick on the Logout button to terminate your session. When the session is terminated, you are presented with the login window.Figure 211. Login Window

Wireless Access PointThe Command Line Interface 435The Command Line InterfaceThis section covers the commands and the command structure used by the AP’s Command Line Interface (CLI), and provides a procedure for establishing an SSH connection to the AP. Topics discussed include: z“Establishing a Secure Shell (SSH) Connection” on page 435.z“Getting Started with the CLI” on page 437.z“Top Level Commands” on page 440.z“Configuration Commands” on page 452.z“Sample Configuration Tasks” on page 497.See AlsoZero-Touch Provisioning and Ongoing ManagementNetwork MapSystem ToolsEstablishing a Secure Shell (SSH) ConnectionUse this procedure to initialize the system and log in to the Command Line Interface (CLI) via a Secure Shell (SSH) utility, such as PuTTY. When connecting to the unit’s Command Line Interface over a network connection, you must use a Secure SHell version 2 (SSH-2) utility. Make sure that your SSH utility is set up to use SSH-2. 1. Start your SSH session and communicate with the AP via its IP address. •If the AP is connected to a network that uses DHCP, use the address assigned by DHCP. We recommend that you have the network #Some commands are only available if the AP’s license includes appropriate features or if the AP model supports it. If a command is unavailable, an error message will notify you. See “About Licensing and Upgrades” on page 412.

Wireless Access Point436 The Command Line Interfaceadministrator assign a reserved address to the AP for ease of access in the future.•If the network does not use DHCP, use the factory default address 10.0.2.1 to access either the Gigabit 1 or Gigabit 2 Ethernet port. You may need to change the IP address of the port on your computer that is connected to the AP — change that port’s IP address so that it is on the same 10.0.2.xx subnet as the AP port.2. At the login prompt, enter your user name and password (the default for both is admin). Login names and passwords are case-sensitive. You are now logged in to the AP’s Command Line Interface.Figure 212. Logging In

Wireless Access PointThe Command Line Interface 437Getting Started with the CLIThe root command prompt (Root Command Prompt) is the first prompt you see after logging in to the CLI. If you are at a level other than the root command prompt you can return to this prompt at any time by using the exit command to step back through each command prompt level. The root command prompt you see in the CLI window is determined by the host name you assigned to your AP. The prompt Xirrus_Wi-Fi_AP is displayed throughout this document simply as a sample host name assigned to the AP. To terminate your session at any time, use the quit command.Entering CommandsWhen typing commands, you need only type enough characters to uniquely specify the command. For example, you can type the abbreviated term config to access the configure prompt, or even simply type c, since no other top level command starts with “c”.Getting HelpThe CLI offers the following two levels of assistance:zhelp Command

Wireless Access Point438 The Command Line InterfaceThe help command is only available at the root command prompt. Initiating this command generates a window that provides information about the types of help that are available with the CLI.Figure 213. Help Window z? CommandThis command is available at any prompt and provides either FULL or PARTIAL help. Using the ? (question mark) command when you are ready to enter an argument will display all the possible arguments (full help). Partial help is provided when you enter an abbreviated argument and you want to know what arguments will match your input.Figure 214. Full Help

Wireless Access PointThe Command Line Interface 439Figure 215 shows an example of how the Help system can provide the argument and format when specifying the time zone under the date-timecommand.Figure 215. Partial Help

Wireless Access Point440 The Command Line InterfaceTop Level CommandsThis section offers an at-a-glance view of all top level commands — organized alphabetically. Top level commands are defined here as commands that are directly accessible from the root command prompt that consists of the name of the AP followed by a “#” sign (e.g. MyAP#). When inputting commands, be aware that all commands are case-sensitive.All other commands are considered second level configuration commands — these are the commands you use to configure specific elements of the AP’s features and functionality. For a listing of these commands with examples of command formats and structure, go to “Configuration Commands” on page 452.Root Command PromptThe following table shows the top level commands that are available from the root command prompt [MyAP]. Command Description@ Type @n to execute command n (as shown by the history command).configure Enter the configuration mode. See “Configuration Commands” on page 452. exit Exit the CLI and terminate your session — if this command is used at any level other than the root command prompt you will simply exit the current level (step back) and return to the previous level.help Show a description of the interactive help system. See also, “Getting Help” on page 437. history List history of commands that have been executed.more Turn terminal pagination ON or OFF.quit Exit the Command Line Interface (from any level).search Search for pattern in show command output.

Wireless Access PointThe Command Line Interface 441configure CommandsThe following table shows the second level commands that are available with the top level configure command [MyAP(config)#]. show Display information about the selected item. See “show Commands” on page 445. statistics Display statistical data about the AP. See “statistics Commands” on page 450. uptime Display the elapsed time since the last boot.xms-override Override XMS managed mode and allow local configuration changes according to your user privileges. See “Managing APs Locally or Using XMS” on page 85.Command Description@ Type @n to execute command n (as shown by the history command).acl Configure the Access Control List.activation Start or stop activation server pollingadmin Define administrator access parameters.auth Configure Oauth tokens. authentication-serverConfigure authentication server parametersboot-env Display or modify boot loader environment variables. cdp Configure Cisco Discovery Protocol settings. clear Remove/clear the requested elements.Command Description

Wireless Access Point442 The Command Line Interfacecluster Make configuration changes to multiple APs.contact-info Contact information for assistance on this AP.date-time Configure date and time settings.dhcp-server Configure the DHCP Server.dns Configure the DNS settings.end Exit the configuration mode.exit Go UP one mode level.file Manage the file system.filter Define protocol filter parameters.group Define user groups with parameter settingshelp Description of the interactive Help system.history List history of commands that have been executed.hostname Host name for this AP.interface Select the interface to configure.lldp Configure LLDP settingsload Load running configuration from flashlocation Location name for this AP.location-reportingConfigure location server settings.management Configure AP management parametersmdm Configure mobile device management server settings.more Turn ON or OFF terminal pagination.Command Description

Wireless Access PointThe Command Line Interface 443netflow Configure NetFlow data collector. no Disable (if enabled) or set to default value.proxy-fwd Configure Proxy Forwarding settings.quick-config Apply configuration template for typical deployment scenario.quit Exit the Command Line Interface.reboot Reboot the AP.reset Reset all settings to their factory default values and reboot. restore Reset all settings to their factory default values and reboot.revert Revert to saved configuration after specified delay in seconds if configuration not saved.roaming-assist Set parameters for roaming assistance.run-tests Run selective tests.save Save the running configuration to FLASH.search Search for pattern in show command output.security Set the security parameters for the AP.show Display current information about the selected item.snmp Enable, disable or configure SNMP.ssid Configure the SSID parameters.station-assuranceLocation name for this AP.statistics Display statistics.Command Description

Wireless Access Point444 The Command Line Interfacesyslog Enable, disable or configure the Syslog Server.tunnel Configure tunnels.uptime Display time since the last boot.vlan Configure VLAN parameters.wifi-tag Configure VLAN parameters.xms-override Override XMS managed mode and allow local configuration changes according to your user privileges. See “Managing APs Locally or Using XMS” on page 85.Command Description

Wireless Access PointThe Command Line Interface 445show CommandsThe following table shows the second level commands that are available with the top level show command [MyAP# show].Command Descriptionacl Display the Access Control List.active-directory Show Active Directory information.admin Display the administrator list or login information.applications Application statistics.arp ARP table information.associated-stationsDisplay stations that have associated to the AP.auth Show Open Authentication tokens.authentication-serverAuthentication server settings summary.bond Bond informationboot-env Display Boot loader environment variables. capabilities Display detailed station capabilities. cdp Display Cisco Discovery Protocol settings.channel-list Display list of AP’s 802.11an and bgn channels. cluster Display Cluster summary.clear-text Display and enter passwords and secrets in the clear. conntrack Display the Connection Tracking table. console Display terminal settings.contact-info Display contact information.

Wireless Access Point446 The Command Line Interfacecountry-list Display countries that the AP can be set to support. date-time Display date and time settings summary.dhcp-leases Display IP addresses (leases) assigned to stations by the DHCP server. dhcp-pool Display internal DHCP server settings summary information.diff Display the difference between configurations.dns Display DNS summary information.env-ctrl Display the environmental controller status for the outdoor enclosure.error-numbers Display the detailed error number in error messages.ethernet Display Ethernet interface summary information.external-radius Display summary information for the external RADIUS server settings.factory-config Display the AP factory configuration information.filter Display filter information.filter-list Filter list information.group User Group summary.iap Display IAP configuration information.ids-event-log IDS event log.ids-stats IDS statisticsinternal-radius Display the users defined for the embedded RADIUS server.intrude-detect Intrusion detection information.Command Description

Wireless Access PointThe Command Line Interface 447lastboot-config Display AP configuration at the time of the last boot-up.lldp Link Layer Discovery Protocol information.location-reportingLocation server reporting information.mac-table MAC address bridging tablemanagement Display settings for managing the AP, plus Standby, FIPS, and other information. mdm MDM (Mobile Device Management) informationnetflow NetFlow informationnetwork-assuranceNetwork Assurance statusnetwork-map Display network map information.proxy-fwd Display Proxy Forwarding summary.radio-assurance Radio Assurance status.realtime-monitor Display realtime statistics for all IAPs. roaming-assist Roaming assist settingsroaming-stations Roaming station informationrogue-ap Display rogue AP information.route Display the routing table. rssi-map Display RSSI map by IAP for station.running-config Display configuration information for the AP currently running.saved-config Display the last saved AP configuration.security Display security settings summary information.Command Description

Wireless Access Point448 The Command Line Interfaceself-test Display self test results.snmp Display SNMP summary information.spanning-tree Display spanning tree information. spectrum-analyzerDisplay spectrum analyzer measurements. ssid Display SSID summary information.station-assuranceStation assurance information.stations Display station information.statistics Display statistics.syslog Display the system log.syslog-settings Display the system log (Syslog) settings.system-info System informationtemperature Display the current board temperatures.tunnel Tunnel informationunassociated-stations Display unassociated station information. undefined-vlan Undefined VLANs detecteduptime Display time since last boot.vlan Display VLAN information.wds Display WDS information.wifi-tag Display WiFi tag summary.wpr-whitelist Show WPR whitelistxrp-tunnels XRP tunnel information.Command Description

Wireless Access PointThe Command Line Interface 449<cr> Display configuration or status information.IAP-NAMEiap1, iap2IAP interface informationCommand Description

Wireless Access Point450 The Command Line Interfacestatistics CommandsThe following table shows the second level commands that are available with the top level statistics command [MyAP# statistics].Command Descriptionethernet Display statistical data for all Ethernet interfaces. filter Display statistics for defined filters (if any).FORMAT:statistics filter [detail] filter-list Display statistics for defined filter list (if any).FORMAT:statistics filter <filter-list> iap Display statistical data for the defined IAP.FORMAT:statistics iap iap2station Display statistical data about associated stations.FORMAT:statistics station billwvlan Display statistical data for the defined VLAN. You must use the VLAN number (not its name) when defining a VLAN.FORMAT:statistics vlan 1wds Display statistical data for the defined active WDS (Wireless Distribution System) links.FORMAT:statistics wds 1<cr> Display configuration or status information.

Wireless Access PointThe Command Line Interface 451Ethernet Nameeth0, gig1, gig2Display statistical data for the defined Ethernet interface (either eth0, gig1 or gig2).FORMAT:statistics gig1IAP-NAMEiap1, iap2IAP interface informationCommand Description

Wireless Access Point452 The Command Line InterfaceConfiguration CommandsAll configuration commands are accessed by using the configure command at the root command prompt (MyAP#). This section provides a brief description of each command and presents sample formats where deemed necessary. The commands are organized alphabetically. When inputting commands, be aware that all commands are case-sensitive.To see examples of some of the key configuration tasks and their associated commands, go to “Sample Configuration Tasks” on page 497.acl The acl command [MyAP(config)# acl] is used to configure the Access Control List.Command Descriptionadd Add a MAC address to the list.FORMAT:acl add AA:BB:CC:DD:EE:FFdel Delete a MAC address from the list.FORMAT:acl del AA:BB:CC:DD:EE:FFdisable Disable the Access Control ListFORMAT:acl disableenable Enable the Access Control ListFORMAT:acl enablereset Delete all MAC addresses from the list.FORMAT:acl reset

Wireless Access PointThe Command Line Interface 453admin The admin command [MyAP(config-admin)#] is used to configure the Administrator List.Command Descriptionadd Add a user to the Administrator List.FORMAT:admin add [userID]del Delete a user to the Administrator List.FORMAT:admin del [userID]edit Modify user in the Administrator List.FORMAT:admin edit [userID]privilege-name Define administrator privilege level namesprivilege-section Define administrator privilege level required by config section.radius Define a RADIUS server to be used for authenticating administrators.FORMAT:admin radius [disable | enable | off | on | timeout <seconds> | auth-type [PAP | CHAP]] admin radius [primary |secondary]  port <portid> server [<ip-addr> | <host>] secret <shared-secret>reset Delete all users and restore the default user.FORMAT:admin reset

Wireless Access Point454 The Command Line InterfaceauthThe auth command [MyAP(config)# auth] is used to configure Oauth tokens. See also, “OAuth 2.0 Management” on page 265. cdp The cdp command [MyAP(config)# cdp] is used to configure the Cisco Discovery Protocol.Command Descriptiondel Delete an Oauth token.FORMAT:auth del <Oauth token>reset Delete all Oauth tokens.FORMAT:auth resetCommand Descriptiondisable Disable the Cisco Discovery ProtocolFORMAT:cdp disableenable Enable the Cisco Discovery ProtocolFORMAT:cdp enablehold-time Select CDP message hold time before messages received from neighbors expire.FORMAT:cdp hold-time [# seconds]

Wireless Access PointThe Command Line Interface 455interval The AP sends out CDP announcements at this interval. FORMAT:cdp interval [# seconds] off Disable the Cisco Discovery ProtocolFORMAT:cdp offon Enable the Cisco Discovery ProtocolFORMAT:cdp onCommand Description

Wireless Access Point456 The Command Line Interfaceclear The clear command [MyAP(config)# clear] is used to clear requested elements.Command Descriptionarp Clear the arp table entry for a requested IP address, or clear all entries if no IP address is entered.FORMAT:clear arp [ipaddress]authentication Deauthenticate a station (specified by MAC address, hostname, or IP address). If you specify the permanent option, then the station is deauthenticated and put on the access control list.FORMAT:clear authentication [permanent] [authenticated station]history Clear the history of CLI commands executed.FORMAT:clear history screen Clear the screen where you’re viewing CLI output.FORMAT:clear screenstation-assuranceClear all station assurance data, but continue to collect new data.FORMAT:clear station-assurancestatistics Clear the statistics for thee change, but it won’t show up requested element.FORMAT:clear statistics [ethname | all-eth | applications | filters |iap | station | vlan | wds]

Wireless Access PointThe Command Line Interface 457syslog Clear all Syslog messages, but continue to log new messages.FORMAT:clear syslogundefined-vlan Clear undefined VLAN information.FORMAT:clear undefined-vlanCommand Description

Wireless Access Point458 The Command Line InterfaceclusterThe cluster command [MYAP(config)# cluster] is used to create and operate clusters. Clusters allow you to configure multiple APs at the same time. Using CLI (or WMI), you may define a set of APs that are members of the cluster. Then you may switch the AP to Cluster operating mode for a selected cluster, which sends all successive configuration commands issued via CLI or WMI to all of the member APs. When you exit cluster mode, configuration commands revert to applying only to the AP to which you are connected.For more information, see “Clusters” on page 401. Command Descriptionadd Create a new AP cluster. Enters edit mode for that cluster to allow you to specify the APs that belong to the cluster.FORMAT:cluster add [cluster-name]del Delete an AP cluster. Type del? to list the existing clusters.FORMAT:cluster del [cluster-name]edit Enter edit mode for selected cluster to add or delete APs that belong to the cluster.FORMAT:cluster edit [cluster-name]operate Enter Cluster operation mode. All configuration commands are applied to all of the selected cluster’s member APs until you give the end command (see above). FORMAT:cluster operate [cluster-name]reset Delete all clusters.FORMAT:cluster reset

Wireless Access PointThe Command Line Interface 459contact-info The contact-info command [MyAP(config)# contact-info] is used for managing administrator contact information.Command Descriptionemail Add an email address for the contact (must be in quotation marks).FORMAT:contact-info email [“contact@mail.com”]name Add a contact name (must be in quotation marks).FORMAT:contact-info name [“Contact Name”]phone Add a telephone number for the contact (must be in quotation marks).FORMAT:contact-info phone [“8185550101”]

Wireless Access Point460 The Command Line Interfacedate-time The date-time command [MyAP(config-date-time)#] is used to configure the date and time parameters. Your AP supports the Network Time Protocol (NTP) in order to ensure that the AP’s internal time is accurate. NTP is set to UTC time by default; however, you can set the time zone so that your AP will display local time. This is done by defining an offset from the UTC value. For example, Pacific Standard Time is 8 hours behind UTC time, so the offset from UTC time would be -8.Command Descriptiondst_adjust Enable adjustment for daylight savings.FORMAT:date-time dst_adjustno Disable daylight savings adjustment.FORMAT:date-time no dst_adjustntp Enable the NTP server.FORMAT:date-time ntp on (or off to disable)offset Set an offset from Greenwich Mean Time.FORMAT:date-time no dst_adjustset Set the date and time for the AP.FORMAT:date-time set [10:24 10/23/2007]timezone Configure the time zone.FORMAT:date-time timezone [-8]

Wireless Access PointThe Command Line Interface 461dhcp-server The dhcp-server command [MyAP(config-dhcp-server)#] is used to add, delete and modify DHCP pools.Command Descriptionadd Add a DHCP pool.FORMAT:dhcp-server add [dhcp pool]del Delete a DHCP pool.FORMAT:dhcp-server del [dhcp pool]edit Edit a DHCP poolFORMAT:dhcp-server edit [dhcp pool]reset Delete all DHCP pools.FORMAT:dhcp-server reset

Wireless Access Point462 The Command Line Interfacedns The dns command [MyAP(config-dns)#] is used to configure your DNS parameters.Command Descriptiondomain Enter your domain name.FORMAT:dns domain [www.mydomain.com]server1 Enter the IP address of the primary DNS server.FORMAT:dns server1 [1.2.3.4]server2 Enter the IP address of the secondary DNS server.FORMAT:dns server1 [2.3.4.5]server3 Enter the IP address of the tertiary DNS server.FORMAT:dns server1 [3.4.5.6]use-dhcp Enable or disable updates to DNS settings via DHCP.FORMAT:dns use-dhcp [off | on]

$Wireless Access PointThe Command Line Interface 463file The file command [MyAP(config-file)#] is used to manage files.Command Descriptionactive-image Validate and commit a new AP software image. backup-image Validate and commit a new backup software image. cat List file contents.check-image Validate a new AP software image. chkdsk Check flash file system.copycpCopy a file to another file.FORMAT:file copy [sourcefile destinationfile]create-text Create a text file on the flash file system, <EOF> to finish.dir List the contents of a directory.FORMAT:file dir [directory]erase Delete a file from the FLASH file system.FORMAT:file erase [filename]format Format flash file system.ftp Open an FTP connection with a remote server. Files will be transferred in binary mode. FORMAT:file ftp host {<hostname> |<ip>} [port <port_#>]  [user {anonymous | <username> password <passwd> } ] { put <source_file> [<dest_file>] | get <source_file> [<dest_file>] }Note: Any time you transfer any kind of software image file for the AP, it must be transferred in binary mode, or the file may be corrupted.$

Wireless Access Point464 The Command Line Interfacehttp-get Perform an HTTP file download. This is the preferred method of downloading files for XMS Cloud. FORMAT:http-get [no-cert-check] <url> [<local_file>]no-cert-check causes the AP to download the file even if the SSL certificate is invalid, expired, or not signed by a recognized CA<url> is a standard HTTP URL, e.g. https://file.example.com:8080/mydir/myfile.ext.zhttp:// or https:// may be omitted, in which case HTTP is assumed<local_file> is an optional parameter that describes the path and name where the file should be savedzif no local_file is specified, the file will be saved in the root of the flash storagezthe local_file does support specifying a directory, which will be created if it doesn't already existlist List the contents of a file.FORMAT:file list [filename]mkdir Create a directory on the flash file system.mv Rename a file on the flash file system.Command Description

Wireless Access PointThe Command Line Interface 465remote-config When the AP boots up, it fetches the specified configuration file from the TFTP server defined in the file remote-server command, and uses this configuration. This must be an AP configuration file with a .conf extension. A partial configuration file may be used. For instance, if you wish to use a single configuration file for all of your APs but don't want to have the same IP address for each AP, you may remove the ipaddr line from the file. You can then load the file on each AP and the local IP addresses will not change.FORMAT:file remote-config <config-file.conf> Note: If you enter file remote-config ?, the help response suggests possibilities by listing all of the configuration files that are currently in the AP’s flash.remote-image When the AP boots up, it fetches the named image file from the TFTP server defined in the file remote-server command, and upgrades to this file before booting. This must be an AP image file with a .bin extension.FORMAT:file remote-image <image-file.bin> Note: This will happen every time that the AP reboots. If you only want to fetch the remote-image one time be sure to turn off the remote image option after the initial download.remote-server Sets up a TFTP server to be used for automated remote update of software image and configuration files when rebooting. FORMAT:file remote-server A.B.C.D rename Rename a file.rm Delete a file from the flash file system.Command Description

$Wireless Access Point466 The Command Line Interfacermdir Delete a directory on the flash file system.scp Copy a file to or from a remote system. You may specify the port to use.tftp Open a TFTP connection with a remote server.FORMAT:file tftp host {<hostname> |<ip>} [port <port_#>]  [user {anonymous | <username> password <passwd> } ] { put <source_file> [<dest_file>] | get <source_file> [<dest_file>] }Note: Any time you transfer any kind of software image file for the AP, it must be transferred in binary mode, or the file may be corrupted. Command Description$

Cambium Networks XR630 802.11ac 3x3 AP User Manual Xirrus AOS Xirrus

Xirrus, Inc. 802.11ac 3x3 AP Xirrus AOS Xirrus

Contents

User Manual

Navigation menu

Namespaces

Views

Navigation